JP2017192678A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of changing sensitivity of a vibration sensor to an appropriate value at a hall side according to a change in a clientele for each hall and a change in the clientele in the same hall.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first fraudulence determination function for determining fraudulent vibration when vibration detection means detects continuation of vibration equal to or more than a predetermined level (low sensitivity) for a first predetermined time (1000 ms); and a second fraudulence determination function for determining a fraudulent vibration when detecting vibration that is equal to or more than the predetermined level but has short time width not determined to be fraudulent by the first fraudulence determination function continuously or intermittently for a second predetermined time (4, 20, 36, 50, 72 ms). Regarding the second fraudulence determination function, vibration detection sensitivity of the vibration detection means can be switched to a plurality of stages of detection levels (4, 20, 36, 50, 72 ms) by manual operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 79

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine or a revolving type game machine, and is particularly suitable for a ball game machine called a type 1 type 2 mixed type.

  The bullet ball gaming machine has a gaming property such that a winning ball is paid out when a gaming ball flowing down in the gaming area enters a winning opening, or a big hit by entering a specific area. For this reason, a fraudulent act of giving a prize or making a big hit is likely to be performed artificially by giving vibrations such as hitting (so-called “sticking”) or shaking to the ball game machine base to influence the movement of the game ball. Therefore, conventionally, a vibration sensor having a certain sensitivity has been attached to the gaming machine stand in order to prevent such an illegal act (Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-077563 A

  However, the strength of the vibration applied to the ball game machine is different for each hall to be installed. In halls where a lot of people who handle game machines stand wildly, a relatively strong vibration is given as an act without illegal intentions, and in a hall where many gentle people who carefully handle game machines gather, acts without illegal intentions As a relatively weak vibration. For this reason, a situation in which appropriate anti-fraud vibration detection cannot be performed simply occurs when the sensitivity of the vibration sensor in the gaming machine is fixed to a fixed detection level value before shipment. In addition, even if it is the same hall, the customer base will change if the date passes, so it will not be possible to cope with such changes in the situation.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraud.

  The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means. The parentheses indicate corresponding elements in the embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this.

(1) vibration detecting means capable of detecting vibration satisfying the first condition (vibration above a predetermined level) and vibration satisfying the second condition (vibration below a predetermined level);
A vibration notifying means capable of notifying the fact when the vibration detecting means detects vibration, and a gaming machine comprising:
The first condition and the second condition are different from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

(2) The vibration detection means is one detection means,
First abnormality determination means for determining a first abnormality when the first condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to (1), further comprising: a second abnormality determination unit that determines a second abnormality when the second condition is satisfied.

(3) The vibration detection means includes:
First detecting means for detecting vibrations satisfying the first condition;
Second detection means for detecting vibration satisfying the second condition,
The first detection means and the second detection means are arranged at different positions,
The gaming machine according to (1), characterized in that:

(4) The first condition is that a vibration (200 ms) of a predetermined level or more is detected by the vibration detection means,
The second condition is that vibration (4 ms to 72 ms) less than the predetermined level is detected continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time by the vibration detecting means.
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).

(5) provided with operation means;
By operating the operation means, at least one of the first condition and the second condition (detection level of the vibration sensor) can be changed.
The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).

(6) By operating the operating means, invalidating at least one of the first condition (detection of vibration above a predetermined level) and the second condition (detection of vibration below a predetermined level). Is possible,
(5) The gaming machine described above.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent fraud.

It is a perspective view of the front side which shows the external appearance of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the front side of the game board of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the inside of a right big prize opening of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows operation | movement of the reciprocating-type rotary body accessory in the right big prize opening of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the motion of the game ball which idles the game area | region in the right big prize opening of the bullet ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control apparatus of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game state transition of the ball game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of the prefetch notice effect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 starting port check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the first half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the latter half part of the process during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement start process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation of the special electric accessory in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning a prize winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a right big winning opening winning number confirmation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of V winning in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory operation | movement continuation determination process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process according to special electric accessory operation status in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect production process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing with which it uses for description of RAM storage of the preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect switch process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production scenario data setting process in FIG. It is a figure which shows the hit random number determination table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot type transfer destination game state table | surface of the special figure 1 side which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, and the special figure 2 side. It is a figure which shows the small hit type transfer destination game state table | surface of the special figure 1 side and the special figure 2 side which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the jackpot symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the small hit symbol table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for jackpot which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table selection table for small hits concerning one Embodiment of this invention (winning at the time of a normal gaming state, winning at the time of V winning and a short time state, at the time of V winning). It is a figure showing a game state transition table selection table for small hits according to an embodiment of the present invention (winning in the normal gaming state, winning in the non-V winning and short time state, winning in the non-V winning). It is a figure which shows the game state transfer table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern distribution designation | designated number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening / closing setting table at the time of the big hit which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big prize opening / closing setting table at the time of the small hit based on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification table | surface of the normal symbol display apparatus which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification table | surface of the ordinary electric accessory concerning one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification table | surface of the special symbol display apparatus which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the special electric accessory and one accessory continuous action | operation apparatus which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the prize ball number table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement usage table (the 1) which concerns on passage of the specific area | region in the right big prize opening which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement usage table (the 2) which concerns on passage of the specific area | region in the right big prize opening which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specification of the external information terminal which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the game process at the time of big hit (per 1 type) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the game process at the time of the small hit (per 2 types) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the operation | movement timing of the accessory in the right big prize opening which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the external information terminal output in the case of the big hit via small hits and the big hit according to one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the production | presentation flow from the normal game state which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention to the time-saving state of time-saving 95 times. It is the figure which illustrated the enemy character selection order of the battle mode which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed the effect flow of the time-short state which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the short time number of times production which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the short time number production effect (in the case of big hit 9 (5 time short times)) which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the number of times reduction according to one Embodiment of this invention (in the case of big hit 7 (number of times reduction 3 times)). It is a figure where it uses for description of the game process in the case of the big hits 5 and 6 and the small hits 5 and 6 which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the effect which appears in the case of big hits 5 and 6 and small hits 5 and 6 concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the structure (big hit 5,6) regarding the production | presentation in the big hit game which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the structure (Big hit 1-4, 7-10) regarding the production | presentation in the big hit game which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the structure (at the time of winning in a normal game state) regarding the production | presentation in the small hit game which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the structure (at the time of winning in a time-short state) regarding the production | presentation in the small hit game which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the production type which appears corresponding to the hit classification which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the production type lottery table which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description about the hit division which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure with which it uses for description of the time grant provision about the hit which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the average number of time reduction about the hit which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the average number of pitches about the hit which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main control side unauthorized vibration monitoring process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the sensor sensitivity change setting process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the vibration error determination process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of two types of vibration sensors which concern on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the sensitivity setting of the vibration sensor which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the sensitivity setting method of the vibration sensor which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure where it uses for description of the setting method in the liquid crystal screen about the sensitivity setting of the vibration sensor which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, a preferred embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a ball game machine according to the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
<1. Outline of Configuration: FIGS. 1 and 2>
With reference to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the outline | summary of a structure of the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the game board.

  First, with reference to FIG. 1, the structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 has a frame-shaped front frame 2 attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, and a game is stored in a game board storage frame (not shown) attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. A board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted, and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 is faced to the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 supporting a transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a.

  A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6. When the key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the glass door 6 is locked to the front frame 2. When operated to the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and opened to the front side.

  A front operation panel 7 pivotally supported on the front frame 2 by a hinge (not shown) is disposed below the glass door 6. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper tray unit 8, and the upper tray unit 8 is formed with an upper tray 9 for storing discharged game balls.

  The upper tray unit 8 includes a ball removal button 14 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 below the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the pachinko hall island facility side. On the other hand, a ball lending button 11 for requesting payout of a game ball and a card return button 12 for requesting return of a valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

  In addition, the upper tray unit 8 is configured so that a player can operate it, and the “frame effect button 13 (used to bring about a change in a specific effect (for example, player participation type effect)) before and after the operation. The operation means for production) ”is provided. The frame effect button 13 can be operated (input reception is possible) when the built-in lamp is lit during a predetermined input reception period, and the effect changes when pressed when the built-in lamp is lit (during the input reception period). Can be brought. In addition, examples of the operation means for production include a button type, a jog dial type, a touch sensor type using a non-contact type sensor, and a touch panel type using a liquid crystal display device. There is no particular limitation as long as it can be used to give some kind of change to the production when the operation is performed (to bring about a change in the production before and after the operation). Further, the type and the number of installed operation means for production are not particularly limited.

  A firing operation handle 15 for operating the firing device 32 (see FIG. 6) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. Speakers 46 that produce sound effects (sound effects) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and above the firing operation handle 15. A plurality of decorative lamps 45 (full color LEDs) that provide a light effect by decoration of light are provided at appropriate positions on the glass door 6.

(1-1. Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 3 shown in FIG. 2 is mainly composed of a substantially square wooden plywood or resin board. As shown in the figure, the game board 3 is provided with a ball guide rail 5 that guides the launched game ball as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed. It is a game area 3a, and the four corners are non-game areas.

  In the substantially central portion of the game area 3a, for example, in three (left, middle, right) display areas (design variation display areas), a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numbers, characters, symbols, etc.) A liquid crystal display device 36 (LCD: Liquid Crystal Display) is provided that is capable of variable display and stop display of the left symbol (corresponding to the left display area), middle symbol (corresponding to the middle display area), and right symbol (corresponding to the right display area). It has been. The liquid crystal display device 36 displays various effects as images under the control of an effect control unit 24 described later.

  Further, a center decoration 48 is provided in the game area 3a so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a distant manner. The center decoration 48 protects the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from surrounding game balls, and is a member that enables the flow path of game balls to be distributed to the left and right according to the strength or stroke length of the game balls. A flow path distributing means), which is arranged at a substantially central portion of the game area 3a so that a game ball flow path is formed on both upper sides (left side and right side) of the game area 3a by the presence of the center decoration 48. ing. However, in the case of this embodiment, the center ornament 48 has a shape bulging slightly to the right.

  The center decoration 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3 and forms a front mounting plate 48a that is fixed to the game board 3 by a fixing screw or the like, and forms an outer periphery of the center decoration 48, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36. An armor frame portion 48b surrounding the screen is integrally provided. The armor frame portion 48b protrudes substantially from the front mounting plate 48a to the front side, and prevents the game ball from entering the inside, that is, the liquid crystal display device 36 side. A play area through which a game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball is guided to the right side. The game balls driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32 are distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and the left down flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 and the right down flow path 3c on the right side. Flow down either.

  Although not shown in the figure, the center decoration 48 is provided with a game ball that is entered from a entrance (not shown) provided on the left side of the armor frame 48b at the front lower portion of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the horizontal direction. The stage is provided so that it can freely roll and drop from the center in the left-right direction (starting port guide path) or from both the left and right sides. Further, the center decoration 48 is provided with a plurality of decorative lamps with full-color LEDs that provide a light effect at appropriate positions.

  In the area of the game board 3, a plurality of movable body accessories that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory: 80) is disposed at the upper right side in the center ornament 48, that is, at a position that does not interfere with the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. A second movable body accessory (flower type accessory 90) is disposed obliquely below. As will be described in detail later, these movable body accessories are configured to be operable in a predetermined operation mode during a hit game or a symbol variation display game.

  In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a display of various functions, and the 7 segment display (with dots) has an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port) and a lower start. A first special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display means) and a second special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the mouth 35 (second special symbol start port). ) And are provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, the special symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of “special symbol” expressed by 7 segments (variation display operation in which variation start and variation stop are set as one set). It has become. Note that the liquid crystal display device 36 described above displays the decorative symbols by the image in a synchronized manner with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in time. (The details of these symbol variation display games will be described later).

  The various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39 (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged. In this normal symbol display device 39, the normal symbol change display operation expressed by two LEDs (for example, seesaw is alternately turned on and off alternately, and it is determined whether it is stopped by either side being lit). As a result, the normal symbol variation display game is executed.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawings, each function display unit is provided with a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) composed of a 7-segment display (with dots). “Composite” refers to a hold / short time composite display device (hereinafter simply referred to as “composite display device”) that has a display function, such as display of the number of suspended balls of special symbol 1 and notification of the status of the change time shortening function in operation (short time). This is because it is referred to as “. The various function display units are provided with a round number display device (round notification LED) including a plurality of LEDs. This number-of-rounds display device functions as a “specified number of rounds notification means” for notifying a specified number of rounds related to a big hit (details of “big hit” will be described later). For example, a combination of lighting / extinguishing states of three LEDs The specified number of rounds is notified.

  Below the center decoration 48, there is a normal variation provided with an upper start port 34 (first special symbol start port: first starter) and a lower start port 35 (second special symbol start port: second starter). The winning devices 41 are provided one above the other, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start opening sensor 34a and lower start opening sensor 35a: see FIG. 6) for detecting the passage of the game ball are formed inside each. .

  When a game ball enters the upper start opening 34 which is the first special symbol start opening, the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol 1”) is displayed on the first special symbol display device 38a. Is a winning port that starts the variable display operation, that is, a winning port related to the starting condition, and allows the starting port opening / closing means (the starting port to be opened or enlarged). A winning rate fixed type winning device without means). In the present embodiment, a game ball dropping direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration 48, etc.) in the game area 3a is operated to the upper start port 34 to the left-down flow path 3b. The game balls that have flowed down the game are easy to win, whereas the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c have a configuration that makes it difficult or impossible to win.

  The normal variation winning device 41 is configured as a winning rate variation type winning device capable of changing the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port by the starting port opening / closing means, and specifically, is a second special symbol starting port. The lower starting port 35 is configured as a so-called “electric tulip type” winning device including a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 that can be opened or enlarged. The lower start opening 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as “special symbol 2”) in the second special symbol display device 38b when a game ball enters this. , In some cases, abbreviated as “Special Figure 2”) is a winning opening that starts the variable display operation, that is, a winning opening related to the starting condition, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 is the operation of the movable blade piece 47. Depending on the state (actuated or deactivated), an open state that facilitates winning (a state that facilitates winning), and a closed state that makes it difficult or impossible to win than the open state (a difficult state to win) Is converted to In the present embodiment, when the movable blade piece 47 is inactive, a closed state (a state in which a prize cannot be awarded) in which a prize cannot be awarded to the lower start port 35 is maintained.

  Below the normal variable winning device 41 (lower start opening 35), a special variable winning device 42 (first first prize winning device 42) configured such that the lower large winning port 40 (first large winning port) can be opened or expanded by the open door 42b. A special variable winning device) is provided, and a lower large winning port sensor 42a (see FIG. 6) for detecting a game ball is formed therein.

  Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, there are four general winning openings 43 on the left side and one on the right side, four in total. A mouth sensor 43a (see FIG. 6) is formed.

  Further, a normal symbol start opening 37 including a passing gate (specific passing area) through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally right above the normal variation winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. . The normal symbol start port 37 (third starter) is a winning port related to the normal symbol variation display operation in the normal symbol display device 39, and a normal symbol start port for detecting a passing game ball is provided therein. A sensor 37a (see FIG. 6) is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side, and is not formed on the left flow path 3b side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed only in the left flow path 3b, or may be formed in each of both flow paths.

  In the middle of the path from the normal symbol starting port 37 to the normal variable winning device 41 in the right flow down path 3c, the right big winning port 50 (second big winning port) is opened by the retractable opening door 52b. A special variable winning device 52 (second special variable winning device) configured to be expandable is provided, and a right big prize opening sensor 52a for detecting a game ball that has entered the right big prize opening 50 is provided therein. (See FIG. 6, SW1 in FIG. 5). The right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening) may be opened and closed by a blade member that rotates with the depth direction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an axial direction. The same applies to the opening and closing of the lower major prize opening 40 (first major prize opening).

  Around the right big prize opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. ing. And if the right big prize opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (large prize opening closed state), the downstream guide part of the right flow path 3c is formed by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging part 55. A part of (upper side 55a) is formed. Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, the flow path correction is made almost parallel to the flow direction of the game ball in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, more precisely, in the game area above the right big prize opening 50. A board 51 d is provided so as to work to bring the game ball flowing down toward the right big prize opening 50.

  The process of entering a game ball into the right grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the play area between the upper surface of the center ornament 48 and the ball guide rail 5 projects on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. Come down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correcting plate 51d protruding from the surface of the game board 3, so that the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction of the right big winning opening 50 (downward). . At this time, if the right big prize opening 50 is covered with the retractable open door 52b (the big prize opening closed state), the game ball rolls over the predetermined arrangement (not shown). The game nail is led in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35) and the first special variable winning device 42 (lower large winning port 40). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 or the lower large winning opening 40 is in a winable state (open state), a game ball can win the winning opening. On the other hand, if the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the right big prize opening 50 is open (right big prize opening state), the game ball is guided into the right big prize opening 50.

(1-2. Free area: FIGS. 3 to 5)
As shown in FIG. 3, a guide path 56 that leads the game ball to the play area 59 is opened in the right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening). In other words, the free area 59 is opened and closed by the open door 52 b of the right big prize opening 50.

  The play area 59 has two game ball routes branched from the guide path 56. One is a first guiding path 56a that guides the game ball that has entered the ball to the discharge basket as it is, and the other one is a first guide channel that guides the game ball that has entered the ball through the SP arm combination 58 to the V lottery combination 60. This is a 2-guide path 56b. The lower part of the guide path 56 is a junction that continues to the branch point of the first guide path 56a and the second guide path 56b. A latch member 65 for first distribution having a (latch portion) is disposed so that its receiving surface having a U-shaped cross section can be switched 90 degrees between upward and lateral. This switching control is performed by a latch solenoid (not shown) (see the latch solenoid column in FIG. 55). While the latch solenoid is ON for 5500 ms, as shown in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (c), the latch member 65 switches to a working position with the receiving surface facing upward, and receives one winning ball. The second and subsequent winning balls are discharged from the escape area 59 through the first guiding path 56a and the fourth guiding path 56d from the escape path 56f. Then, when a predetermined time of 5500 ms elapses, the latch solenoid is turned OFF, the first distribution member 65 returns to the non-operating position with the receiving surface facing left, and takes the received one ball into the floating area 59.

  In the floating area 59, a branch point of the first guide path 56a and the second guide path 56b is located slightly downstream from the junction point. At this branch point, a V chance route (SP route) and a through route are provided. An intermediate distribution member 57 for performing an operation of alternately switching (losing route) in a predetermined time interval pattern for a predetermined time length is provided, and the intermediate distribution member 57 allows the winning ball to be guided to the first guide path 56a and the second guide. It is distributed to one of the paths 56b.

  In the case of this embodiment, the middle distribution member 57 is driven by a one-stage branch solenoid (see the middle distribution solenoid in FIG. 55) and is provided so as to be able to be inserted into and removed from the first guide path 56a. (See FIG. 3), the first guide path 56a is opened, and a through route (loss route) is formed. Further, when in the insertion position (see FIG. 5), the first guiding path 56a is closed, and a V chance route (SP route) for guiding the game ball to the second guiding path 56b is formed. The through route is a route from the first guiding path 56a to the discharge basket as it is (the game ball moving in FIG. 5B is indicated by a dotted line), and the V chance route (SP route) is the SP arm of the second guiding path 56b. This is a path (indicated by an arrow in FIG. 5 (b)) that reaches the V lottery accessory 60 through the accessory 58. There are two patterns of operation 1 and operation 2 for route switching control at this branch point. “Operation 1” is performed when the right grand prize winning opening 50 is opened, and is a short-time operation with a short operation time (ON operation 120 ms and OFF operation 60 ms are alternately repeated for 3060 ms). Operation 2 is performed when winning the big winning opening 50. “Operation 2” is a long-time operation with a short operation time (ON operation 176 ms and OFF operation 224 ms are alternately repeated for 30000 ms). That is, the control of this “operation 2” is started when a winning at the right big winning opening 50 is confirmed (when receiving information that is ON from the sensor SW1). Therefore, the timing for winning the right big prize opening 50 is random (indefinite) with respect to the opening start time, and therefore the timing at which “operation 2” is started is also random with respect to the opening start time.

  By controlling the operation of the latch solenoid and the one-stage branch solenoid, the game balls won in the right big prize opening 50 are randomly distributed to either the first guide path 56a or the second guide path 56b, and the second guide path 56b ( It is difficult to intentionally aim for distribution to the (V chance route). The reason for random distribution is as follows. When the operation control of the latch solenoid is switched from ON to OFF in a specified time of 5500 ms and the game ball is sent out from the merging point, the operation 2 of the one-stage branch solenoid is started at random with respect to the opening start time. This is because the position of the intermediate distribution member 57 may be at the extraction position or may be at the insertion position.

  The SP arm accessory 58 has an upper arm 58a configured as a guide rod located on the near side in the depth direction of the gaming machine, and a lower arm 58b configured as a guide rod positioned on the back side in the depth direction of the gaming machine. The lower arm of the upper arm 58a and the end of the lower arm 58b are connected with a connecting rod so as to be bent in a “f” shape. In a normal state where the SP arm accessory 58 is in a linear form, a storage portion 58c is formed at the lower end of the upper arm 58a, that is, at the connecting portion between the upper arm 58a and the lower arm 58b. Here, the upper arm 58a and the lower arm 58b are made of a transparent member, and it is seen from the player that the game ball located in the storage portion 58c at the lower end of the upper arm 58a is located at the upper end portion of the lower arm 58b. This is related to the movement of the movable object and can be used for the effect that the game ball flows out from the upper end to the lower end of the lower arm 58b, as if the ball is released from the flower-shaped accessory 90. Means.

  And if it transfers to the state bent in the shape of "f", the position of the storage part 58c will rise with the game ball stored there, and will approach the flower type | mold accessory 90 (FIG.5 (c)). In the storage portion 58c in the ascending position, a game ball passage that opens from the upper arm 58a to the lower arm 58b is opened, and the game ball in the storage portion 58c flows down from the upper arm 58a to the lower arm 58b. Led to. At this time, the game ball appears to have been released from the flower-shaped accessory 90. The SP arm combination 58 is a main element constituting the idle area 59 together with the medium distributing member 57 and the V lottery combination 60. The retaining portion 58a may be configured such that the retaining portion is formed when an electromagnet is used and is attracted by the electromagnet.

  In this way, the SP arm accessory 58 stops or stores the game ball that has entered the V chance route in the storage unit 58c, and releases it after waiting for a predetermined stop time to elapse. Such a configuration makes the release timing the same, that is, makes the time value until reaching the V lottery object 60 the same, which helps to prevent fraud and is within the stopping time. This is useful for making it possible to present “the effect that the game ball is currently on the V-chance route”.

  The V lottery object 60 is a reciprocating rotary object 61 formed as a Y-shaped passage, and is positioned below the V-shaped lottery object 61, with a V region (specific region) 63 in the center and a non-V region (non-specific region) on both sides thereof. ) 62 having a passage body. As suggested by the arrows in FIG. 4, the reciprocating rotator accessory 61 reciprocates (slowly swings) in a pendulum manner (FIGS. 4A to 4C). When the tip of the Y-shaped passage is located above the central specific region 63 (FIGS. 4A and 5D), when the game ball flows down from the Y-shaped passage in a timely manner, the V region (specific (Area) 63 has a structure in which a game ball enters.

  A winning ball that has passed through the specific area 63 (shown by a solid line in FIG. 5D) is guided to the third guiding path 56c and treated as a V winning, and a winning ball that has passed through the non-specific area 62 is shown in FIG. d) is indicated by a broken line), and is guided to the fourth guiding path 56d and treated as a non-V prize. In addition, even if the game ball passes the V area 63, no prize ball is paid out, but a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out.

  In each of the guide paths 56, 56b, 56c, and 56d, photoelectric sensors SW1 to SW4 are provided in order to detect game balls passing therethrough. However, the sensor SW1 represents the right big prize opening sensor 52a. In the present embodiment, the sensor SW3 is provided in the guide path 56c. However, when the left reciprocating rotary body accessory 61 comes to the center position, a sensor that detects a game ball flowing out from the Y-shaped passage, or a specific As a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the region 63, a sensor other than the guide path 56c may be provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the escape path 56f are guided to the through route, and are discharged after passing through the sensor SW4, and it is monitored that all the game balls other than the game balls that have passed through the specific area 63 have been discharged. However, as shown in FIG. 3, the sensor SW5 provided in the escape path 56f may be used to monitor the completion of discharge with the sensors SW3 to SW5 as a whole.

  In this embodiment, the game balls won in the right big prize opening 50 are distributed by the medium distribution member 57 and the V area (specific area) 63, and the probability of winning the V prize as a whole is about 1 / 6.7. Is set to Further, when the game ball passes through the V area (specific area) 63 during the small hit game, a V win is awarded and a "round per V game" is started. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls by shifting from the small hit to the big hit.

(1-3. Right-handed advantageous configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims the launch position on the second special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass the right flow path 3c), The game ball is hardly guided to the upper start opening 34 side or is not guided. Therefore, if the right big prize opening 50 is in the closed state, it is difficult or impossible to win the start openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable prize winning device 41 is operated. .

  When the winning means described above belong to which of the left and right flow paths, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can be won, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b The upper start opening 34, the lower start opening 35, the lower large prize opening 40, and the three general winning openings 43 on the left side include the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening, and the winning means belonging to the right flow path 3c. 35, a normal symbol start opening 37, a right large winning opening 50, a lower large winning opening 40, and one general winning opening 43 on the right side.

  Note that the lower start port 35 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c as long as the movable blade piece 47 is in the open state (start port open state). It is possible. However, since the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 has the operating condition for the passage (winning) of the game ball to the normal symbol start opening 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, it is substantially the right flow It can be said that it belongs only to the path 3c.

  In addition, the upper start port 34 generally belongs only to the left flow down route 3b or the left flow down route 3b, and it is difficult or impossible to win a game ball from the right flow down route 3c. That is, the arrangement of the game nail and other game parts in the game area 3a is the same as that of the game ball that has flowed down the left flow path 3b (including the game ball that has passed through the stage of the center decoration 48). However, the game balls that have flowed down the right flow path 3c are arranged so as to form a guide path that makes it difficult or impossible to guide the game ball to the upper start opening 34.

  Further, the lower large winning opening 40 belongs to both the left flow down path 3b and the right flow down path 3c, and it is possible to win from any of the left and right flow down paths. However, the right big winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game balls from the right flow path 3c can win.

  Each winning opening such as the upper starting opening 34, the lower starting opening 35, the normal symbol starting opening 37, the lower large winning opening 40, the right large winning opening 50, or the general winning opening 43 is arranged in the game area 3a. It functions as a winning means, and also detects the upper starting opening sensor 34a, the lower starting opening sensor 35a, the normal symbol starting opening sensor 37a, the lower large winning prize right sensor 42a, the right large winning opening sensor 52a, the general winning opening sensor 43a, etc. The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. The winning detection switch can be constituted by a non-contact switch such as a photo switch or a proximity switch, or a contact switch such as a micro switch.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the various winning holes provided in the gaming area 3a, if there is a winning in a winning opening other than the normal symbol start opening 37, it is promised for each winning opening. The number of winning balls per winning ball is paid out from the gaming ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 6). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, there are three upper start ports 34, one lower start port 35, three large winning ports 40, fifteen right large winning ports 50, and an upper left general winning port. Out of the mouths 43, seven general winning mouths in the upper left and middle left are paid out, and five winning mouths in the lower left and lower right are paid out. Note that the game balls that have not won each winning opening are discharged from the gaming area 3 a through the out opening 49. Here, “winning” is not a structure in which a winning opening takes a game ball inside, or a winning opening takes a gaming ball inside, but a winning opening made of a pass-through gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). If the game ball is detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning slot, a winning prize is displayed at the winning slot. It is treated as having occurred. The game ball related to the winning is also referred to as “winning ball”.

(1-4. Movable object)
In the area of the game board, a plurality of movable objects that provide visual effects are arranged at positions that do not obstruct the flow of the game ball. In the present example, a first movable body accessory (clock-type accessory) 80 is disposed at an upper right side in the center case 48, that is, at a position that does not obstruct the flow of the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c. A second movable body accessory (flower type accessory 90) is arranged on the side. A third movable body accessory (a translucent spherical movable body 73 containing a rotating lamp 83 and a light emitting device) is integrally incorporated in the frame effect button 13 so as to be swingable and rotatable. Although details will be described later, the frame effect button 13 is a normal button 13A (first effect button) or a rotating lamp button 87 (first operation button) depending on the direction of the built-in movable body 73 when it is stationary (the position of the surface visible to the player). 2 function button: lucky pad), and when the movable body 73 is rotating forward, it functions as a refreshing button 70 (third effect button: rolling button).

(1-4-1. First movable body accessory 80)
The first movable body accessory includes a clock panel portion (numerical display portion) 81 composed of a numerical display portion divided into twelve numerical sectors with numerals of Roman letters “I” to “XII”, and this watch. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a short hand and a long hand that can rotate on the board 81 and can indicate the hour and minute as required, and is configured as a clock-type accessory 80 as a whole. The clock panel 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location (number sector from Roman letters “I” to “XII”) indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of a full-color LED. The number sectors marked with the Roman letters “I” to “XII” can individually emit light in different colors.

  The timepiece-type accessory 80 functions as a “main actor” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. The clock hand 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 rotates at a high speed, and the number sector of the clock panel 81 is colored with a predetermined “color and number”, which shows the player's winning expectation degree. For example, the expected winning degree for the player in the order of white (normal color), blue, yellow, green, red, and danger pattern (D pattern) in the LED sector of the number sector in the clock panel (number display section) 81 Is configured to increase. The “danger pattern (D pattern)” is a generic name of a pattern in which a black stripe pattern is applied to the yellow of the ground, or a DANGER character is further arranged in the black stripe band.

  Here, the clock hands 82 of the clock-type accessory 80 continue to rotate until the symbol variation display operation stops, but the clock hands 82 are configured to stop in the middle of the symbol variation display operation. Thus, the winning winning expectation may be indicated by the number of the number sector indicated by the short hand of the stopped clock hand 82 or by the number and the color of the number sector to be colored. Further, when the emission color of the LED of the number sector in the clock panel (number display unit) 81 emits rainbow color (premium color), the big hit can be determined.

(1-4-2. Second movable body accessory 90)
The second movable body accessory 90 includes a plurality of petals A2 around the flower heart A1, moves the flower heart A1 and the flower crown A2 in the vertical direction (falling movement), and moves in the horizontal direction (lateral movement). ) The first movable body 91 that can be configured and the bud B1 is attached to the tip of the stem B2 so as to be located around the outside of the corolla A2, and the bud B1 and the stem B2 can be moved in the left-right direction (protrusion movement). The second movable body 92 configured as described above. In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 can operate independently from each other, and are arranged so that the combined position of both is located near one side (right side) of the liquid crystal screen.

  In terms of the operation mode, the first movable body 91 is normally located at a home position (original position) “above” the solid line position (combined position described later) in FIG. The movable body 92 is usually positioned at the “right” home position (original position) with respect to the liquid crystal screen from the solid line position in FIG. 2. Then, the first movable body 91 can move (drop) so that the flower crown A2 comes from the original upper position alone to the solid line position in FIG. 2 at the upper right of the liquid crystal screen, and the second movable body 92 can be independently moved to the right. From the home position (original position), it can move (projection movement) so that 萼 B1 comes to the solid line position in FIG. When the drop movement of the first movable body 91 and the protruding movement of the second movable body 92 occur simultaneously and move to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2, the corolla A2 and the bud B1 overlap here. Combined, a flower crown A2 is arranged around the flower heart A1, and a bud B1 is arranged around the outside to form a “flower-shaped part” having double flower coats. In this sense, the second movable body accessory 90 is also referred to as a “flower type accessory”. Further, after the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are merged, the flower heart A1, the flower crown A2 and the bud B1 move to the left in the merged state, and temporarily wait at the broken line position (development position) in FIG. It is also possible to move back to the solid line position.

  The flower-shaped accessory 90 functions as a “sub-object” that operates under predetermined conditions in the case of a big hit or a loss. When the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are combined, the first movable body 91 (flower heart A1 and flower crown A2) rotates at the tip of the stem portion B2 of the second movable body 92 and the translucent flower heart. A1, the corolla A2 and the bud B1 are illuminated from behind by a lamp or a full-color LED and lightly shines beautifully. Under special conditions, the flower heart A1, the corolla A2, and the eyelid B1 move between the combined position and the developed position. These actions increase the expectation of winning the game for the player. When the symbol variation display operation is stopped (the symbol variation display game is ended), the flower-shaped accessory 90 returns to the origin position from the effect position (merged position) indicated by the solid line in FIG.

  In the case of this embodiment, the first movable body 91 can be dropped and moved from the upper original position to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2 and laterally moved from the merged position to the broken line position (developed position) in FIG. The second movable body 92 can independently project and move from the right home position (original position) to the solid line position (merged position) in FIG. 2, and a part of the second movable body 92 (１B1) is independently illustrated in FIG. It is assumed that it is possible to move laterally from the solid line position (union position) to the broken line position (development position) in FIG. However, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 may appear or protrude in the liquid crystal screen area and may be combined there. As an operation in the case of such a configuration, the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 are normally stationary at an original position (not shown) determined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen. ing. However, when a big hit winning ball or a loser winning ball is generated and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first movable body 91 drops and moves downward from above, and the second movable body 92 approaches the liquid crystal screen from the right direction. The position or the production position that covers a part of the liquid crystal screen (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 2) protrudes and moves together. This coalescence operation is an aspect of the movable body effect that particularly wins the winning expectation feeling (winning expectation degree), and the higher the expectation effect (for example, during the SP reach effect described later), the higher the probability. Can appear. An effect effect with impact is exhibited by the operation mode of such a movable body accessory.

(1-4-3. Third movable body accessory 73: FIG. 2)
As shown schematically in FIG. 2, the frame effect button 13 includes a transparent push button type cylinder 72 having a relatively large surface area in a transparent frame 71 configured so that the surface of the tray unit 8 is integrated. The movable body 73 as a third movable body accessory can be rolled in the push button cylinder 72 or below (hereinafter simply referred to as the press button cylinder 72). In other words, it is structured to be rotatable and swingable in a plurality of directions.

  The movable body 73 (third movable body accessory) is disposed in the push button cylinder 72 and is translucent and can be rotated about the horizontal axis as viewed from the player and can be swung left and right. A spherical empty frame, a rotating lamp 83 and a light emitting device housed in the empty frame. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed, or at a predetermined timing before and after that, the movable body 73 rolls (rotates and swings), and the operation is illuminated with colored light from inside or around the empty frame. Thus, the player can visually recognize from the outside.

  The frame effect button 13 having the above structure has a “normal button” depending on whether the operation mode of the movable body 73 at the time of operation is “normally stationary”, “waiting for a rotating lamp”, or “rolling operation”. 13A (first effect button) ”,“ rotating lamp button 87 (second effect button: lucky pad) ”, and“ exhilarating button 70 (third effect button: rolling button) ”.

  Here, “normally stationary” means that the rotational angle position of the movable body 73 in a stationary state is 0 degree, and the light emitting body of the rotating lamp 83 (the top surface of the enclosure 88) moves up through the push button cylinder 72. In this state, when the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed, the frame effect button 13 functions as a normal button 13A (first effect button). . In this specification, “normal button 13A” refers to the frame effect button 13 when operating in the “normally stationary” state.

  “Waiting for rotating lamp” means that the rotational angle position of the movable body 73 in a stationary state is switched from the normal stationary position (0 degree) to the position rotated 90 degrees toward the front (90 degrees). The light emitting body of the lamp 83 (the top surface of the enclosure 88) is in a state where it can be seen from above (the position seen by the player) through the push button cylinder 72. Under this state, the push button cylinder 72 When is pressed, the frame effect button 13 functions as a rotating lamp button 87 (second effect button). When working as the revolving light button 87 (second effect button), since the revolving light 83 is visible from above through the push button type cylinder 72, it can be urged to operate and, for example, the revolving light 83 is instantly operated. The operating state can be visually confirmed through the push button type cylinder 72. Therefore, it is suitable for producing a one-notice notice effect, and a very tense moment can be produced. When the period of “waiting for a rotating lamp” has elapsed, the movable body 73 rotates 90 degrees toward the back, and returns to the “normally stationary” position (0 degrees).

  In addition, “rolling operation” refers to a state in which the movable body 73 continues to rotate forward, that is, a state in which the movable body 73 rotates with the horizontal axis as the rotation center axis as shown in FIG. When the push button type cylinder 72 is pressed while the movable body 73 is rotating, the frame effect button 13 works as a refreshing button 70 (third effect button). When acting as a refreshing button 70, the spherical movable body 73 can be seen from the outside through the transparent frame 71 and the push button type cylinder 72 so that the rolling operation (high-speed rotation) is performed. When the normal button 13A or the rotating lamp button 87 is pressed, a very satisfying pleasure can be obtained. When the “rolling operation” period elapses, the movable body 73 stops and returns to the “normally stationary” position.

  In the lower part of FIG. 2, among the three types of button functions that are used properly as described above, the functional parts of the rotating lamp button 87 (lucky pad) and the refreshing button 70 (rolling button) are shown separately. Here, in order to facilitate understanding, the switch 89 dedicated to the rotating light button 87 (lucky pad) and the switch 74 dedicated to the refreshing button 70 (rolling button) are depicted as being, Only switches are used properly.

  The revolving light button 87 (lucky pat) includes a lamp (or LED) 84 as a light source and a reflecting mirror 85 as a reflector that reflects light from the lamp 84 in a red translucent enclosure 88. The rotating lamp 83 is configured such that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light source is changed by rotating the reflecting mirror 85. The third movable body accessory 73 acts as an effect means for making a big hit final announcement (so-called one-shot notification) during the big symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). When making a single announcement, a notification sound (determined sound) at a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display game (for example, at the beginning of symbol variation, during a predetermined timing of a predetermined notice effect such as reach production or pseudo-ream) Is generated and the rotating lamp 83 is operated for a predetermined production time from the generation (notification sound generation), or no notification sound is generated, but the rotating lamp 83 is turned on at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game. Operated for a predetermined production time. For example, along with the notification sound, the effect that the rotating lamp 83 operates over a long fluctuation period from the start of change of the special symbol change display operation to the stop of the change, the generation of the notification sound, or rotation without the notification sound There is a production mode in which the lamp 84 of the lamp 83 is turned on and flashes. That is, during the one-shot notification effect, the lamp 84 of the rotary lamp 83 continues to be lit for a predetermined effect time width, and the reflecting mirror 85 is continuously rotated by the stepping motor 86. Thus, the player can shockly know that the winning game is won before the result of the symbol variation display game is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  Further, in the left side view of FIG. 2, the rotating lamp 83 is depicted as having a rotating lamp switch 89 in the case of acting as a push button type rotating lamp button 87, and the enclosure 88 of the rotating lamp 83 at a predetermined timing. Is operated, the rotating lamp switch 89 is turned ON, a hit notification sound is generated, and the rotating lamp 83 is activated. However, in practice, the rotating lamp 83 is housed in the empty frame (the shell portion of the movable body 73) in the right side of FIG. 2, and therefore it is not the enclosure 88 that functions as the operating portion of the rotating lamp 83. It is a push button type cylinder 72, and the switch 74 is turned on by pressing this push button type cylinder 72 in “waiting for rotating lamp”, and the result is the same as when the rotating lamp switch 89 is turned on. The lamp 83 is activated. The normal button 13 </ b> A that operates during “normally stationary” is an effect button that is frequently used and does not necessarily operate all the effect means. On the other hand, the rotating lamp button 87 is for one notification. For this reason, although the rate at which the revolving light button 87 is selected is not high, a larger effect than that of the normal button, for example, the blinking operation of the revolving light 83 and the sound are generated. It is used as an effect button for confirming and reporting “a specific big hit (for example, a big hit with a time reduction of 95)” at the initial stage of symbol variation.

  When functioning as an exhilarating button 70, as schematically shown in the right side view of FIG. 2, the movable body 73 becomes “during rolling operation” in which the movable body 73 continuously rotates at a high speed in the push button type cylinder 72, and the operation is performed. Illuminated with colored light from the inside or the surroundings, a state appears in which the player can visually recognize this state from the outside through the push button type cylinder 72. Since the refresh button 70 is operated on the premise of the appearance of this state, when the refresh button 70 is operated at the time of a big hit, a very great pleasure is given to the player due to a synergistic effect with the big hit effect that occurs after the operation. be able to.

<2. Control device: Fig. 6>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a control device that controls the game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 6 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

  The control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment receives an effect control command from the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the main control unit 20 that is responsible for overall game operation control, and receives images, light, and sound. A production control unit (production control board, liquid crystal control board) 24 for overall control of production operation control (production appearance control for production means), a payout control board 29 for performing prize ball payout control, and an external power supply ( A power supply control board (not shown) that generates and supplies power necessary for the gaming machine from a not-shown machine is mainly configured. In addition, a liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. In FIG. 6, the power supply route is omitted.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), a ROM 202 (main control ROM), and a RAM 203 (main control RAM). As a whole, a microcomputer (equivalent to a Z80 system) ).

  The CPU 201 is a CPU of Z80 (manufactured by Zylog Corporation or an equivalent thereof). Z80 is a CPU with a data bus of 8 bits and an address bus of 16 bits, but does not require a large memory space, and it is ideal for controlling pachinko machines that do not require high-speed processing or complicated numerical operation processing. It is. The CPU 201 also includes a plurality of types of registers for reading and writing data necessary for executing processing.

  The ROM 202 functions as storage means (main control side storage means) for storing game data related to game operation control, and stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program describing a game operation control procedure. ing. The RAM 203 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for the progress of the game is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter used for a predetermined lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery related to a special symbol), and functions as a random number generation unit that generates random numbers in software.

  Although not shown in the figure, the main control unit 20 provides a CTC (Counter Timer Circuit), which gives a periodic interrupt, a pulse output generation function (bit rate generator) and a time measurement function to the Z80 system, and a CPU. It also has an interrupt controller circuit, a counter circuit, etc. that exhibit an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timer interrupt that gives an interrupt signal. The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number within a certain range in hardware, and a sampling circuit that samples a random value from the random number generation circuit at a predetermined timing, and as a whole a 16-bit counter work. The CPU 201 sends an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, thereby obtaining the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random value (random number size: 65536), and winning the random value Use for lottery.

  The main control unit 20 detects the passage of the upper start opening 34a for detecting the winning to the upper start opening 34, the lower start opening sensor 35a for detecting the winning to the lower start opening 35, and the normal symbol start opening 37. A normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a lower large winning opening sensor 42a for detecting a winning at the lower large winning opening 40, a right large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting a winning at the right large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43. A general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning is connected to the fraud detection sensor 99, and the main control unit 20 can receive detection signals from these.

  The main control unit 20 also receives detection signals from the sensors SW1 to SW4 shown in FIG. Therefore, in the main control unit 20, when the sensor SW2 is turned on after the sensor SW1, it is determined that the game ball has gone on the V chance route. When the sensor SW3 is turned on next to the sensor SW2, it is determined that the sensor has passed through the V region (specific region) 63. If the sensor SW4 is turned on next to the sensor SW2, it is determined that the V chance route has been reached but no V prize has been won. When the sensor SW4 is turned on next to the sensor SW1, it is determined that the vehicle has gone to the through route without going to the V chance route.

  The main control unit 20 also includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower start opening 35 and a large winning opening solenoid for controlling the opening and closing of the open door 42b of the lower large winning opening 40. 42c and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for controlling opening / closing of the open door 52b of the right large winning opening 50 are connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for controlling them.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a first special symbol display device 38a and a second special symbol display device 38b, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of the special symbol. Yes. The main control unit 20 is connected to a normal symbol display device 39, and can transmit a control signal for display control of the normal symbol.

  In addition, a composite display device (not shown) is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of various information displayed on the main display unit. In addition, a round number display device is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for display control of a specified number of rounds by jackpot.

  Also, the main control unit 20 is connected to a frame external concentration terminal board 21, and the main control unit 20 provides information on the game progress (for example, jackpot winning information, prize ball number information, symbol variation display game execution number information, etc.). Can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The hall computer HC is a management computer that manages the operating status of pachinko hall gaming machines based on information sent from the main controller 20, and is arranged outside the gaming machine.

  The main control unit 20 is connected to a payout control board (payout control part) 29. The payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control part) 28 for controlling the launching device 32, and a game ball payout. Is connected to a game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19. The main control unit 20 can send a payout control command (a payout control command for designating the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29.

  The main control unit 20 can transmit various effect control commands including information related to the special symbol variation display game and information related to errors to the effect control unit 24 according to the processing state. Such a production control command from the main control unit 20 is produced by one-way communication in order to prevent an illegal signal due to an external goto action from being input to the main control unit 20 via the production control unit 24. It is transmitted to the control unit 24.

(2-2. Dispensing control unit 29)
The payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is equipped with a microprocessor having a payout control CPU, and a payout control ROM storing a control program describing a payout control procedure for game balls, and a payout in which a work area is formed A control RAM is mounted to constitute a one-chip microcomputer. The main role of the payout control board 29 is to receive a payout control command from the main control unit 20, award ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and transmission of a payout state signal to the main control unit 20. Etc.

  The payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor (a detection sensor for detecting a storage state of game balls in the ball tray (in this embodiment, the upper tray 9)) that detects that the upper tray 9 is full of game balls, and a front A door opening sensor (in this embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting the open state of the front frame 2 and / or the front operation panel 7) and the game ball payout device 19 are connected.

  The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a supply replenishment detection sensor 72 for detecting insufficient supply of game balls, and a ball counting sensor 73 for detecting game balls to be paid out (award balls). These detection signals can be received. The game ball payout device 19 is provided with a payout motor 74 that drives a ball payout mechanism (not shown) for paying out game balls. The payout control board 29 controls the payout motor 74. The control signal can be transmitted.

  In addition, the payout control board 29 is connected to the main control unit 20 based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor, the front door opening sensor, the replenishment detection sensor, or the ball counting sensor. Open / close state signal, full detection signal, replenishment out signal, payout shortage error signal, prize ball counting signal, and other payout state signals can be transmitted. Based on this payout state signal, the main control unit 20 determines whether or not the game ball payout device 19 is functioning normally (for example, a prize ball payout failure (payout error), and the upper tray 9 is full of game balls. Whether it is or not is monitored.

  Further, a discharge control board 28 is connected to the payout control board 29 so that a discharge control signal can be transmitted to the discharge control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization to a launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .

(2-3. Production control unit 24)
The production control unit 24 includes a microprocessor with a built-in CPU 241 (production control CPU), and is mainly configured by a microcomputer with a ROM 242 (production control ROM) and a RAM 243 (production control RAM). An interrupt controller circuit having an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a sound source IC, CTC, and timer interrupt, a counter circuit for generating random numbers in hardware, and the like are provided. The ROM 242 functions as storage means (effect control side storage means) for storing game data related to effect operation control, and stores various data necessary for effect operation control in addition to the effect control program in which the effect control procedure is described. Has been. Further, the RAM 243 functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and data necessary for producing an effect is stored and used according to the processing state. The RAM 203 functions as a random number counter for effect lottery random numbers used for effect lottery, and functions as a random number generating means for generating random numbers in software.

  The main roles of the production control unit 24 are reception of production control commands from the main control unit 20, selection of production based on production control commands, image display control of the liquid crystal display device 36, sound control of the speaker 46, decorative lamps. 45, the number display portion 80 of the clock-type accessory, and the light emission control of various LEDs (production LED: not shown) disposed in the game machine, the movable hand of the clock hand 97 and the flower-type accessory 98 It is the operation control of things.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display control of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is an image ROM storing VDP (Video Display Processor) that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, and image data (effect image data) on which the VDP performs image development processing. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores image data developed by the VDP, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for the VDP to perform display control, and a display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU. A liquid crystal control ROM that stores the described program and various data necessary for display control thereof, and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area and a buffer memory are mainly configured.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a frame effect button 13 that can be operated by the player, and the effect control unit 24 can receive an operation detection signal from the frame effect button 13.

  The effect control unit 24 includes a light display control unit for a light display device 45a including a decorative lamp 45, a number display unit 80, an LED disposed at an appropriate place, and a speaker 46 in order to perform a light effect and a sound effect. A sound control unit (sound source LSI) for the sound generator 46a and a drive control unit for the movable body accessory motors 97a and 98a for operating various accessories (the clock hand 97 of the clock-type accessory and the flower-type accessory 98) (Motor drive circuit: not shown). The effect control unit 24 can transmit control signals related to the effect means to these control units.

  The effect control unit 24 is connected to a position detection switch 97b for the clock hand 97 and a position detection switch 98b for the flower-shaped accessory 98, and the effect control unit 24 can receive detection signals from these. . The production control unit 24 grasps the current position from the origin position (initial position) of the movable body accessory based on the detection signals from the position detection switches 97b and 98b, and executes and controls the operation of the movable body accessory. Also, the malfunction of the movable body accessory (whether or not it is a normal operation (for example, whether or not it has correctly returned to the original position after the operation)) is monitored.

  The effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, and controls various effect means at a necessary timing. To do. Thereby, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 corresponding to the effect pattern, the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46, and the lighting and blinking driving of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED are realized. The production of “production scenarios” in a broad sense is realized.

  The effect control command defines a function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and an event (EVENT) of 1-byte length. In order to distinguish MODE from EVENT, MODE Bit 7 is Bit 7 of ON and EVENT is set to OFF. When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time elapses from this setting. The strobe signal is transmitted. Furthermore, event (EVENT) information is set and output after the elapse of a predetermined time from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second time of the strobe signal is transmitted after the elapse of the predetermined time from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be in an active state by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (production control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

  Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal and executes a control program for command reception interrupt processing so that the effect control command is acquired in this interrupt processing. It has become. Unlike the CPU 201, when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process based on another interrupt (timer interrupt process executed periodically). Even in such a case, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if another interrupt occurs simultaneously.

<3. Outline of operation>
Next, a gaming operation according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 6) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol change display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, the main control unit 20 The “big hit lottery” is performed by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b in a variable manner to start the special symbol variation display game. Derived and displayed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

  Here, in this embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning to the upper start opening 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning to the lower start opening 35 are performed separately and independently. For this reason, the big hit lottery result regarding the upper start port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the big hit lottery result regarding the lower start port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the side of the special symbol display device 38a, on the condition that a game ball has entered the upper start opening 34, the special symbol 1 is variably displayed and the first special symbol variation display game is started. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, on the condition that a game ball has entered the lower start opening 35, the special symbol 2 is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol variation display game is started. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game in the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, if the big win lottery result is “big hit” after the predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the predetermined “big hit” is given. If the lottery lottery result is “Small Win”, the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined “Small Win” mode. Thus, the game result (big hit lottery result) is derived and displayed.

  In this specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol on the special symbol display device 38b side. The variation display game is referred to as “special symbol variation display game 2”. Unless otherwise required, “special symbol 1” and “special symbol 2” are simply referred to as “special symbols” (sometimes abbreviated as “special symbol”), and “special symbol variation display game 1” and “special symbol” The symbol variation display game 2 ”is simply referred to as“ special symbol variation display game ”.

  In addition, when the above-described special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol variation display game is started by variably displaying the decorative symbol (proactive game symbol) on the liquid crystal display device 36. Various developments are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorated design is derived and displayed. In other words, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the stunning ornamental symbol variation display game including the decorative symbol variation display operation.

  Therefore, for example, if the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game is “big hit” or “small hit” (when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), the decorative symbol fluctuation display game will reflect the result. The directed performance is developed. In the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which the special symbol indicates a big hit or a small hit (for example, the display state of 7 segments is “7”), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays “left”, “middle”. "Right" display area in which the decorative symbol reflects "big hit" or "small hit" (for example, three decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" display areas) Is stopped and displayed at “7” “7” “7” display state).

(Big hit game)
When this “big hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game is terminated, and the decorative symbol variation display game is terminated accordingly. As a result, the symbol pattern of “hit” is derived and displayed. Thereafter, the lower large prize opening solenoid 42c (see FIG. 6) included in the first special variable prize winning device 42 is actuated to open and close the open door 42b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby opening and closing the lower large prize opening 40. Or the special prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 6) of the second special variable prize winning device 52 is operated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby the right special prize opening 50 Is opened and closed, and a special gaming state (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs. In this jackpot game, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening (the winning balls in the big prize opening) until the opening time of the big prize opening reaches a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 28.5 seconds, for example) or Is a predetermined number (maximum number of winnings: the entrance is opened by one operation of the character or the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for an expanded winning port: for example, 8 (lower large winning port 40) “Round game” in which the winning area is opened or expanded until it reaches four (right big winning opening 50), and the big winning opening is closed when either of these conditions is met. A predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 16 rounds) are repeated. The conditions for closing the lower grand prize opening 40 and the right major prize opening 50 are not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the big prize opening, or the number of game balls won in the grand prize opening. It may be based on only.

  When the jackpot game is started, an opening effect for informing that the jackpot is started is performed first, and after the opening effect is finished, the round game is performed a plurality of times with a predetermined number of rounds as an upper limit. Then, after the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending effect for notifying that the jackpot is finished is performed, and thereby the jackpot game is finished. That is, the jackpot game is roughly composed of game periods of an opening effect, a round game, and an ending effect. However, the round game execution period excluding the opening effect period and the ending effect period in the closed state of the big prize opening may be regarded as a big hit game period.

(Small game)
In addition, when the “small hit” is reached, specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol pattern “small hit” is derived. After the display, the right big prize opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 6) provided in the second special variable prize winning device 52 is actuated to open and close the open door 52b in a predetermined operation pattern, thereby the right big prize opening. 50 is opened and closed, and a special gaming state (small hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state occurs. In this small hit game, until the opening time of the right big winning opening 50 elapses for a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 1.6 seconds, for example), or the number of game balls won in the big winning opening (to the big winning opening Until the number of winning balls reaches a predetermined number (the maximum number of winning balls: the entrance is opened by one operation of an accessory, or the upper limit of the number of winning balls allowed for an expanded winning port: for example, four) The winning area is opened or expanded. The condition for closing the right big prize opening 50 is not limited to this, and it may be based only on the opening time, or may be based only on the number of winning game balls.

  Further, during the small hit game, when the game ball passes through the route (see FIG. 5) provided in the right big prize opening 50 (see FIG. 5), A game per V is executed after the winning game ends. On the other hand, when the small hit game is finished without passing through the V area (specific area), the V hit game is not executed.

  Regarding the information necessary for the execution of the decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 is based on the fact that a game ball enters (wins) the upper start opening 34 or the lower start opening 35. On the condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 35a and the start condition (start condition relating to the special symbol) is satisfied, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lost” “Lost winning (lottery type lottery)”, which is a lottery, and if it is “big hit”, the big hit type, if “small hit”, the small hit type, If there is a big win lottery including 'design lottery (winning (winning) type lottery)' that draws the type of loss, based on the lottery result information, finally the change pattern of special symbols and finally stop display Special design ( To determine the different stop symbol). Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a “variation pattern designation command” including at least a special symbol variation pattern information (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the special symbol variation time) is provided to the effect control unit 24 side. Send. Thereby, basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the production variations, a “decorative design designation command” including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information (information on the hit type)) is also transmitted to the production control unit 24. ing.

  The special symbol variation pattern information may include information designating the occurrence of a specific notice effect (such as a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect described later). To explain in detail, the variation patterns of special symbols are roughly divided into “hit variation pattern” in the case of winning and “losing variation pattern” in the case of loss, according to the big hit lottery result information. For example, a variation pattern for designating reach production (for example, a reach variation pattern, a reach variation pattern with pseudo-continuous (described below)), or a non-reach production design that does not specify the occurrence of reach production. Fluctuation patterns (for example, a normal fluctuation pattern, a normal fluctuation pattern with pseudo-continuations, etc.) are included. Regarding the variation time for each variation pattern, basically, the reach variation pattern is a variation pattern that specifies an effect that makes you expect to win big hits. Also has a long variation time.

  The effect control unit 24 performs time series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control command (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. Deciding the contents to be developed (effect scenario) and the decoration pattern (decoration stop pattern) to be finally stopped and displayed, and the decoration pattern fluctuation display game by changing the decoration symbols according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbols Is executed. As a result, the decorative symbols by the liquid crystal display device 36 are variably displayed in synchronism with the special symbol variation display by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game are in progress. Are substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generation device 46a so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. Thereby, the reproduction of the image (image effect), the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting and blinking drive (light effect) of the decoration lamp 45 and the LED, etc. are realized on the liquid crystal display device 36.

  In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and the display reflecting the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decoration symbol variation display game. These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. In the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as “symbol variation display games” unless otherwise required.

(3-1-2. Normal symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, based on the passing (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37, “main lottery” is performed by the random number lottery in the main control unit 20. Based on the lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 39 to start the normal symbol variation display game, and after a certain period of time, the result is a combination of lighting and non-lighting of the LED. And stop display. For example, when the result of the normal symbol fluctuation display game is “per assist”, the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39 is turned on in a specific lighting state (for example, all the two LEDs 39 are in a lighting state, or “O” and “ The display is stopped when the “○” side LED among the LEDs representing “x” is in a lighting state.

  When this "subsidiary hit" is reached, the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 6) is activated, whereby the movable blade piece 47 is opened in a reverse "C" shape and the lower start port 35 is opened. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to enter a state in which the game ball is likely to flow in (opening opening state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as “general power open game”) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state occurs. In this open electric game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variation prize winning device 41 is used until the opening time of the lower start opening 35 elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 0.04 seconds or 4.5 seconds) or lower start. The winning area is opened or expanded until the number of game balls won in the mouth 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), and the lower start opening 35 is closed when any of these conditions is satisfied. Is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once). The condition for closing the lower start opening 35 is not limited to this, and may be based only on the opening time of the lower start opening, or only based on the number of game balls won in the lower start opening. Also good.

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
Here, in the present embodiment, a prize is generated at the upper start opening 34 or the normal symbol start opening 37 during the special / decorative symbol change display game, the normal symbol change display game, the big hit game, or the open-circuit game. In other words, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition (symbol game start condition) is satisfied, this is related to the start right of the variable display game. Except for data that is involved during variable display, the data is reserved and stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, a maximum of 4). The on-hold hold data that has not been subjected to the symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the hold data is also referred to as “operation hold ball”. In order to clarify the number of the operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a holding provided as an icon image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 Turn on the indicator.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if a prize is generated at the lower start opening 35 during a special / decorative symbol variation display game, a normal symbol variation display game, a big hit game, or a general electric open game, Even if a detection signal is input from the start port sensor 35a, the corresponding start condition (design game start condition) is not satisfied. Therefore, the operation holding ball is not stored on hold.

  Further, in the present embodiment, up to four special operation balls and special operation balls for the normal symbol are stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are stored as the number of times that the special symbol or the normal symbol is changed. On the other hand, the operation holding ball relating to the special symbol 2 is not stored in the RAM 203. Note that the maximum number of stored operation balls (maximum number of stored memories) for the special symbol 1 and the normal symbol is not particularly limited, and the special symbol 2 may also have an operation reserved ball (stored in the RAM 203). The maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different (for example, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 1 side is four, the maximum number of reserved memories on the special symbol 2 side is four, the normal symbol side 6) Moreover, regarding the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the maximum number of reserved memories on the symbol side where the profit obtained by the big hit lottery is relatively high may be set. In the present embodiment, since the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol 2 can obtain a jackpot type that is relatively profitable for the player, for example, the maximum number of reserved memory on the special symbol 1 side is two, the special symbol 2 side The maximum number of reserved memories may be set to 4 more than that.

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the jackpot that is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a “variable time reduction (hereinafter referred to as“ time reduction ”) function” that the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) serves as a function unit. There are two types of time-shortening functions relating to special symbols (hereinafter referred to as “special symbol time-shortening functions”) and time-shortening functions relating to ordinary symbols (hereinafter referred to as “normal symbol time-shortening functions”).

  The special symbol time reduction function shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change until it is fixedly displayed (average fluctuation time of the special symbol)). This is a function that generates a special symbol short-time state. Under the gaming state in which the special symbol time reduction function is activated (special symbol short time state), the average variation time of the special symbol in one special symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, the average time required for the variation without reach) Is reduced from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), a lottery number improvement state is achieved in which the number of big lotteries per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the special symbol short-time state does not occur, This is due to the control process.

  The normal symbol time shortening function is the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from the start of normal symbols to the final display (average fluctuation time of normal symbols)) This is a function to generate a shortened "normal symbol time short state". Under the game state in which the normal symbol short-time function is activated (normal symbol short-time state), the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, from 7 seconds to 0.5 seconds). In other words, the number of lotteries per assistance is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the normal symbol variation time may be shortened due to the difference in the number of suspended balls, but in this case, the normal symbol short-time state does not occur. This is due to the control process. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the normal symbol short-time function is the same as the operation start condition of the special symbol short-time function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol short-time function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions.

  Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an “open extension function” in which the main control unit 20 serves as a function unit.

  The open extension function is a function for generating an “open extension state” in which the opening operation period (at least one of the opening time and the number of opening times of the movable blade piece 47) of the movable blade piece 47 of the normal variation winning device 41 is extended. is there. This open extended state is referred to as a so-called “electric chew support state”. Under the gaming state (open extended state) in which the open extension function is operating, the opening operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from 0.04 seconds to 4.5 seconds, for example, The operating rate is improved so that the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved compared to the normal gaming state. In this embodiment, the movable blade piece 47 is opened and closed once regardless of whether the opening extension function is activated or not. However, the opening and closing function may be extended twice when the opening extension function is in operation. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation start condition of the opening extension function is the same condition as the operation start condition of the special symbol time shortening function described above, and the operation end condition is also the special symbol time shortening function. The conditions are the same as the operation end conditions. Accordingly, during the open extended state, the normal symbol time shortening function also acts, so that a gaming state in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 is remarkably improved occurs.

  By operating one or more types of the functions as described above, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. Here, in the present embodiment, the operation start conditions of the normal symbol time-shortening function and the open extension function are the same as the operation start conditions of the special symbol time-shortening function, so that each function operates at the same opportunity. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a gaming state in which the special symbol time-shortening function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a “time-shortening state”. In addition, a state in which all of the special symbol time-shortening function, the normal symbol time-shortening function, and the open extension function are not in operation (non-operational) is referred to as “normal gaming state” and abbreviated as “normal state”. In addition, during the big hit, a big hit game is generated in which the big winning opening is opened and closed. However, all the above functions are deactivated, and are basically placed under the same game state as the normal game state.

(3-2-1. High base gaming state)
In the present embodiment, the functions related to the above normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol short-time function and the open extension function are the same conditions as the operation start conditions of the special symbol short-time function. Will work. However, when focusing on the normal symbol time-shortening function and the open extension function individually, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operating rate of the movable blade piece 47 is improved. Since the frequency of winning at the lower start opening 35 is increased, the gaming state includes a “high base gaming state (starting) in which the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the big win lottery result is higher than the normal gaming state. Condition improvement state).

  On the other hand, when paying attention to the function related to the special symbol (special symbol short-time function), the special symbol variation display game has a “special symbol short-time state” that is faster than the normal gaming state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the “high base gaming state” in which the starting frequency of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, as an example of the “high base game state”, an electric chew support state to which at least an extension function is provided is treated as a “high base game state”. Under the electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normally variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Therefore, the game state is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the electronic chew support state is not set (low base game state). Focusing on the presence / absence of the electric chew support state, when the game state is “normal game state”, “no electric chew support state” (hereinafter referred to as “no electric support” state) ”and the game state is“ short time ” In the case of “state”, “electric chew support state exists (hereinafter referred to as“ electric support state ”)”. Note that a gaming state focusing on the operation status of each function (special symbol time shortening function, normal symbol time shortening function, and open extension function) related to the determination of the presence or absence of electric support is referred to as an “internal gaming state”.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the “internal gaming state (see YJ column in FIG. 46)” includes the normal gaming state and the short-time state, and the gaming state relating to the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (in other words, relating to the determination of the effect) In the type of “gaming state (variation pattern selection mode)” when focusing on (gaming state), there are provided more types of variation pattern selection modes than the types of internal gaming states (see the column of Tcode in FIG. 46). ).

(3-3. Transition of gaming state: FIG. 7)
Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 7, in the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal game state” or the “time saving state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which the electric chew support function is not given (a state without electric support). Specifically, the “normal game state” is a case where a lottery result per auxiliary is given that the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to a relatively long time (for example, 7 seconds) and the lower start opening 35 is opened. This is a gaming state in which the opening time of the lower start opening 35 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.04 seconds × 1 time) (FIGS. 49 and 50).

  The “time-short state” is a gaming state to which the electric-chu support function is given, more precisely, a gaming state to which the time-shorting function and the open extension function are given, and is also abbreviated as “time-short state”. Specifically, the “short time state” is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol variation time, and a lottery result per auxiliary when the lower start opening 35 is opened is issued. In this case, the opening time of the lower start port 35 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 4.5 seconds × 1 time) (FIGS. 49 and 50).

(3-3-1. Normal gaming state → winning game)
Since the “normal game state” is a “no electric support” state, it is difficult to win a prize at the lower start opening 35. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player aims to win the upper start opening 34 by left-handed, and advances the game aiming for winning in the special symbol variation display game 1 (big hit or small win). Then, when winning a prize at the upper start port 34, a special lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed. As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the lottery probability of the winning lottery with the special symbol 1 is the same as the probability of selecting “big hit” and the probability of selecting “small hit”, which is about 1/29. It is.

  When the winning lottery of special symbol 1 is won (line L1 in FIG. 7) and the winning symbol (big hit symbol or small hit symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 38a, according to the winning type A winning game (big hit game or small hit game) is executed. In this win game, the right big prize opening 50 is kept open until a predetermined time (for example, 1600 ms) elapses after the right big prize opening 50 is opened, and then the opening door 52b for closing the right big prize opening 50 is used. The operation is executed a specified number of times (for example, 16 times for big hits and once for small hits). The right winning prize opening 50 is an entrance to the idle area 59 as shown in FIG. For this reason, the occurrence of a small hit makes it possible for the game ball to enter the right big prize opening 50 (playing area 59).

(3-3-2. Big hit game → short-time state or normal game state)
In the line L1 in FIG. 7, when the result of the special symbol variation display game 1 is “big hit”, the big hit game is executed. In this jackpot game, for the right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening), the right big prize opening 50 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 1600 ms) elapses after the right big prize opening 50 is opened. After maintaining the above, the operation of the open door 52b (first round game) for closing the right grand prize winning opening 50 is executed. Next, after moving to the lower prize winning opening 40 (the first prize winning opening) and maintaining the state where the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 28500 ms) elapses after the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened. The operation (long open round game) of the open door 42b for closing the lower major prize opening 40 is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, the first half of 15 times). Next, an operation (short) of closing the lower major prize opening 40 after maintaining the state where the lower major prize opening 40 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 60 ms) elapses after the lower major prize opening 40 is opened. An open round game) is executed a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times in the latter half of 15 times). Therefore, in this example, a total of 16 round games are played as big hit games, with one initial round game, five long open round games, and 10 short open round games.

  When the jackpot game is over, 61% of those determined to be jackpots will shift to the “short-time state” (line L2 in FIG. 7) as the game state transition destination based on the type of the jackpot that has been won. 39% continues in the “normal gaming state” (line L3 in FIG. 7). In other words, in the case of special figure 1 big hit (big hit in the normal gaming state except for the irregular case), 61% of them are big hits with time reduction (number of time reduction N: 3, 4, 5, 95) The time shifts to the short time state, and the remaining 39% is a big hit with no short time (number of short time N: 0), and the original normal gaming state is continued. Here, the irregular special figure 1 big hit is a rare case where the special figure 1 big hit that should have occurred at the time of the left strike has occurred in the short state when the right strike is advantageous.

(3-3-3. Small win game-> V prize-> game per V-> short-time game state, or small win game-> no V prize)
When the result of the special symbol variation display game 1 is “small hit” in the “special figure 1 small hit” block (box) in FIG. 7, “small hit game” is executed. In this “small hit game”, the right big prize opening 50 is opened for the right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening) until a predetermined time (for example, 1600 ms) elapses after the right big prize opening 50 is opened. The operation of the open door 52b that closes the right big prize opening 50 after maintaining the state is performed a prescribed number of times (for example, once). The right winning prize opening 50 is an entrance to the idle area 59 as shown in FIG. For this reason, when a small hit occurs, there is a chance that a game ball enters the play area 59 from the right big prize opening 50.

  A line L4 in FIG. 7 shows that a game ball has entered the play area 59 from the right big prize opening 50 during the small hit game, and the game ball has passed the specific area 63 (V area) of the V lottery bonus 60. The case, that is, the case of “V winning” is shown. As a result, a big hit (hereinafter referred to as “per V”) due to V winning occurs and “game per V” is executed. “Game per V” is a round game similar to the big hit game in the case of a big win in the special symbol variation display game 1, and corresponds to the special hit type on the special figure 1 side (small hit 1 to small hit 6). Thus, a plurality of game types per V are determined. The "per V" is a hit belonging to the "big hit" type that triggers the operation of the condition device. Therefore, per V can be handled in the same row as one of the big hit types.

  When the game per V ends, the game state transitions based on the type of small hit. In this embodiment, 50% of those determined to be small hits shift to the “short-time state” (line L6 in FIG. 7), and the remaining 50% continues in the “normal gaming state” (FIG. 7). Middle line L7). In other words, in the case of special figure 1 small hit (small hit in the normal gaming state except for the irregular case), even if it hits V, 50% per V is a big hit with time reduction (number of time reduction N: 100) The remaining 50% is a big hit without time reduction (number of time reduction N: 0), and only half of those determined to be per V shift to the time reduction state. This is different from the case of special figure 2 small hits (small hits in the short time state except for the irregular case) described later. Here, the irregular special figure 1 small hit is a rare case where a special figure 1 small hit that should occur when left-handed has occurred in a short time state when right-handed is advantageous.

  On the other hand, as indicated by the line L5 in FIG. 7, when the V prize is not won during the small hit game, the “normal game state” continues as it is as the game state transition.

(3-3-4. Shorter times)
The short-time state is a gaming state to which a short-time function and a release extension function are added. “Time reduction count” is used as information for managing the continuation of the short time state. The time reduction count is set in a predetermined counter (time reduction count monitoring counter in FIG. 7) that monitors the time reduction count when shifting to the time reduction state, and the remaining time reduction count is monitored by this counter. In this counter, a special electricity counter that counts the number of executions of the winning game (small winning game or big winning game) (the number of winning winnings, the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol, the number of times of opening the general electric game, or the number of winnings per auxiliary may be used) And a special symbol short time counter that counts the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (in this embodiment, the total variation number of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2). When the end of change is finished, the winning game may be started), and values for specifying the number of time reductions are set in these counters (see the time reduction number columns in FIGS. 38 and 39). Specifically, in the short-time state, the special electric power counter is decremented by 1 every time a winning game is executed, or the special graphic short-time counter is decremented by 1 every time the symbol variation display game is consumed. When either one of the counters becomes zero, the normal gaming state is restored.

  In FIG. 7, when shifting from the special figure 1 big hit to the time-saving state at a rate of 61% after the big hit game (the route of the line L2), or changing from the special figure 1 small hit to the time-saving state at a rate of 50% after the game per V If it is to be performed (the route of the line L6), a predetermined number of times is set as the number of time reductions N. The time reduction number N set at the time of transition to the “time reduction state” is based on the type of big hit or small hit at the time of winning (see FIGS. 47 and 48), and a predetermined number of times is set. In this embodiment, in the case of “big hit”, any of 0, 3, 4, 5 and 95 times is set (FIG. 47), and in the case of “small hit”, 0 or 95 times. Any one of the values is set in the short-time count monitoring counter (FIG. 48). Then, the number N of short times is subtracted by 1 when the special symbol variation display game is played once or when the special electric accessory is actuated once (winning game is executed). The current time reduction count N is monitored by a time reduction count monitoring counter (time reduction count monitoring means), and when the remaining time reduction count becomes 0, a transition is made to the “normal gaming state” (line L8 in FIG. 7).

(3-3-5. Hit under short-time condition)
Since the short time state is a state with electric support, it is easy to win a prize at the lower start opening 35 (second special symbol start opening). For this reason, during the short-time state, the game is advanced with the aim of winning a prize in the lower start opening 35 and aiming for winning (big hit or small hit) in the special symbol variation display game 2. Then, when winning the lower start opening 35 and winning the winning lottery with the second special symbol (lines L10 and L11 in FIG. 7), the big hit game or the small hit game according to the winning type is started.

  That is, when the result of the special symbol variation display game 2 is “special symbol 2 big hit”, that is, when one of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 38b (line L10 in FIG. 7). In addition, a “big hit game” is performed by special figure 2 big hit. When the big hit game is finished (line L12 in FIG. 7), the gaming state again shifts to the “time saving state” and does not return to the “normal gaming state”. When shifting to the “short time state”, a predetermined short time number value is set (reassigned) as a new short time number N based on the type of jackpot. In the case of the present embodiment, the re-granting time reduction number N is any of 3, 4, 5, and 95 times, and is given when shifting from the big hit game of special figure 1 big hit to the time reduction state. Unlike the case of the number of time reduction N in the special figure 1 big hit system, the case where the number of time reduction “0” (no time reduction) is given is not included. Therefore, when a big hit is made in the short-time state, the number of time reductions of 3 or more is always added as the time reduction number N of the special figure 2 big hit system.

  When the result of the special symbol variation display game 2 is “small hit (special symbol 2 small hit)”, that is, when any of the small symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 38b (FIG. 7). Line L11), “small hit game” is executed. The transition of the game state depends on whether or not the V winning is made during the small hit game, depending on whether the short-time state becomes “continue” or “end”. When winning V in the small hit game (line L14 in FIG. 7), "per V" is generated by winning the V and "game per V" is executed. The line L16) in FIG.

  When the game per V ends and returns to the short time state (line L16 in FIG. 7), the “short time number” is set (re-assigned) as a new short time number N based on the type of small hit. In the case of this embodiment, the “number of times shortened” given again is any of 3, 4, 5 and 95 times. Unlike the case of the special figure 1 small hit system “time reduction”, the case where the time reduction “0” is given is not included. Therefore, when the power is reduced from the small hit to the V in the time-short state, the number of time-shortening times of 3 times or more is always added as the “number of time-shortening times” of the system per special figure 2V.

  On the other hand, if the V prize is not won during the small hit game in the time-saving state (line L15 in FIG. 7), the time-saving number N is decremented by 1, and if the remaining time-saving number remains, the “time-saving state” continues and remains When the number of time reductions becomes 0, the state is shifted to the “normal game state”.

  Here, regarding the lottery probability of the big hit lottery with respect to the special symbol 2 in the short-time state, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the probability that the “big hit” is selected is about 1/229 (FIG. 7). The probability that “small hit” is selected is about 228/229 (line L11 in FIG. 7). In other words, almost every time you win a “big hit” and rarely win a “big hit”. When a game ball wins the right big winning opening 50 during the small hit game, the probability that the game ball passes through the specific area 63 is about 1 / 6.7. Therefore, even in the case of “small hit”, if the number of time reductions is set to a large number, the time-saving state can be continued by the number of time reductions. ) Will be more likely to do. For example, if you win a small hit with a set time of 95 times, the number of time reductions of 95 times is far higher than the denominator of about 1 / 6.7 V winning probability, so the number of times of time reductions is 95 times. It is almost definitive to win V in between. On the other hand, when winning a small hit with a small number of time reductions, for example, a small hit with a set number of time reductions of 3 to 5, it is necessary to make a V prize luckily with the short number of time reductions. If it cannot be done, the time-short state will end.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when V is won from the small hit in the normal gaming state, the game per V is executed, and ½ per V is shifted to the short-time state. At that time, the V winning probability is about Since the number of time reductions of 95 times exceeding the denominator of 1 / 6.7 is given, there is a high possibility that the V winnings will be won again from the small hits and the V hits will continue. However, in the time-saving state after that, 3-5 times or 95 time-savings will be given per V, so there is a high possibility of going to a long time. You will play the game you want. Therefore, while having the great expectation that it will be a continuous resort, it creates an interesting game that aims to win the V prize with a sense of tension that the shortage may end without hitting the V.

<4. About winning: FIG. 38, FIG. 39>
Next, “winning” of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the winning symbol is a winning symbol when the winning symbol is stopped (per type: a big hit or a small hit by winning the lottery in the special figure 1 or the special figure 2) and a V during the small hit game. There is a winning by winning (per two species: per V).

(4-1.1 Type per species: FIGS. 38 and 39)
FIG. 38 (a) shows that the special symbol 1 (special diagram 1) side is the jackpot type that is won in the normal gaming state and the short time state (short time state), that is, the special symbol 1 is displayed in a stopped state ( This is a “special figure 1 side jackpot type transition destination game state table” showing the type of per one type), the destination game state after the end of the jackpot game determined in accordance with the type of hit, and the number of time savings. Similarly, FIG. 38 (B) is a “special figure 2 side jackpot type destination game state table” for the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) side. FIG. 39 (a) shows that the special symbol 1 (special diagram 1) side is the small winning type that is won in the normal game state and in the short time state (in the short time state), that is, the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed "Special figure 1 side small hit type transfer destination game state table" showing the type of hit (per type), the destination game state after the end of the small hit game determined in accordance with the hit type, and the number of time savings It is. Similarly, FIG. 39B is a “special figure 2 side small hit type migration destination game state table” for the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) side.

  The “winning in the normal gaming state” column on the left side of FIG. 38 (a) shows a case where a big win is won in the symbol game of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state (when the left-handed advantage is advantageous). It is a case. The “winning in the short-time state” column on the right side of FIG. 38 (a) is a big hit game or a per V game with at least one operation holding ball in the normal game state, and is set to the short time state after that hit game. This shows the case where the operation holding ball that was held at the time of winning is a big hit, and it is an irregular case that can occur rarely when playing with the correct gaming method. Or, it shows a case where the top start port (first special symbol start port) is won in the short time state (when right-handed advantage is advantageous), and a big win is won in the symbol game of special diagram 1, It is a rare irregular case that cannot happen.

  The same applies to FIG. 38 (b), and the “winning in the normal gaming state” column on the left side wins the lower starting port (second special symbol starting port) in the normal gaming state (when left-handed is advantageous). This shows a case where a big win is won in the symbol game shown in Fig. 1, which is a rare irregular case that cannot normally occur. In addition, the “winning in the short-time state” column on the right side of FIG. 38 (b) shows the case where the jackpot is won in the symbol game of special figure 2 in the short-time state (when right-handed is advantageous) (usually possible cases). Yes. FIG. 39 is different only in that the small hits are handled. The relationship between the left column and the right column in FIGS. 39 (a) and (b) Same as relationship.

  As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, there are “big hit 1 to big hit 17” and “small hit 1 to small hit 14” as types per type in this embodiment. All of these wins are defined as those of 16 round games, but with regard to the opening operation of the grand prize opening, by setting some rounds of 16R as long opening operations and other rounds as short opening operations, Big hit types with different appearances such as 4R, 5R, 10R, and 15R are made substantially. The same applies to games per V that are generated by winning V in the case of a small hit.

(4-1-1.1 per type)
In the special drawing 1 side, there are “big hit 1 to 10 big hits” as big hit types and “small hit 1 to 6 big hits” as small hit types (FIGS. 38 (A) and 39). (I)). Further, the big hit lottery objects on the special figure 2 side include “big hit 11 to big hit 17” as the big hit type, and “small hit 7 to small hit 14” as the small hit type (FIGS. 38 (B) and 39 (B). B)).

  Among these hits, “big hit 1 to big hit 17” is a hit belonging to the “big hit” type that triggers the operation of the condition device, and “small hit 1 to small hit 14” does not act as the trigger of the condition device “non-big hit” Is a hit belonging to the category. The “per V” when winning V during the small hit game is a hit that triggers the operation of the condition device. Here, the “condition device” is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for the operation of the accessory continuous operation device for performing a round game, in which a combination of specific special symbols is displayed or a game ball is displayed. The one that operates when it passes a specific area in the big prize opening. Each of the hits belonging to the above-mentioned “big hit” type and the hits belonging to the “non-big hit” type (small hits) both have an opportunity to shift to a special gaming state (winning game) with opening / closing operation of the big prize opening (occurrence trigger) It is a hit. Therefore, the hit (small hit) belonging to the “non-big hit” type is different from the simple “losing”.

(4-1-2. Transition game state at the time of big hit: FIG. 38 (b) (b))
The left column of FIG. 38 (a) shows the transition game state when the big win is won in the special figure 1 in the normal game state, and the “short time state” or “normal game state” is selected according to the type of the big win. Which is to be transferred is determined (see L2 and L3 in FIG. 7). Out of the big hits 1 to 10, the big hits 1, the big hits 2, the big hits 5, and the big hits 7 to 10 are the ones in which the gaming state after the big hitting game is shifted to the “time-short state” ( It is classified as belonging to “L2) in FIG. The remaining “big hit 3”, “big hit 4” and “big hit 6” are those in which the gaming state after the big hit game is shifted to the “normal gaming state” (L3 in FIG. 7). ) ”. The right column of FIG. 38 (a) shows the transition game state when the big hit is shown in FIG. 1 (Irregular) in the short-time state, and “big hit 1 to big hit 10” is after the big hit game ends. This is a big hit that belongs to the “short and big big hit” that shifts the gaming state to the short time state.

  The left column of FIG. 38 (B) shows the transition destination game state when the big win is won in the special figure 2 in the normal game state (regular), and “big hit 11” to “big hit 17” The game state after the end is shifted to the “normal game state” and belongs to “non-temporal big hit (normal big hit)”. Also, the right column of FIG. 38 (b) shows the destination game state in the case of a big hit in the special figure 2 at the “short time state” (L12 in FIG. 7), This is a big hit belonging to the “short-time big hit” that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to the short-time state.

(4-1-3. Transition game state at the time of a small hit: FIG. 39 (A) (B))
The left column of FIG. 39 (a) shows the transition game state when winning a small hit and winning V during the small hit game (see L4 in FIG. 7). It is defined whether the destination game state after the game per V shifts to the “short time state” or “normal game state”. Among the small hits 1 to 6, the “small hit 1”, “small hit 2”, and “small hit 5” are those in which the gaming state after the end of the game per V shifts to the “short time state” (see FIG. 7 L6), which is a small hit belonging to the “short time short hit”. The remaining “3 per small portion”, “4 per small portion” and “6 per small portion” are those in which the gaming state after the game per V transitions to “normal gaming state” (L6 in FIG. 7). It is a small hit belonging to "short small hit (usually small hit)". The right column of FIG. 39 (a) shows the transition game state in the case of a small hit in FIG. 1 (Irregular) in the time-short state, and “small hit 1 to small hit 6” is per V This is a big hit belonging to “short time short hits” for shifting the game state after the game to the short time state.

  The left column of FIG. 39 (b) shows the transition destination game state when the player wins a small hit in FIG. 2 in the normal game state (regular). This is a small hit belonging to the “non-time short hit (normal small hit)” for shifting the gaming state after the winning game to the normal gaming state. Also, the right column of FIG. 39 (b) shows the case of hitting V per short-time state (L16 in FIG. 7), and “7 to 14 per small hit” is the gaming state after the end of the game per V Is a small hit belonging to the “non-time short hit (normal small hit)” that shifts to the normal gaming state.

  Also, although not shown in FIG. 39, when a V prize is not won during the small hit game (L15 in FIG. 7), it is a hit type for continuing the game state at the time of winning. The “small hit” is a hit belonging to the “non-big hit” type, but for convenience of explanation, unless otherwise necessary, it is treated as one of the big hit types in the same row without being distinguished from the above big hit.

  When winning V in the small hit game, the game per V is started after the small hit game ends. As for the per V game, “game per V” predetermined for each of the small hits 1 to 14 is started. The correspondence is made as follows. Therefore, games per V that are executed corresponding to “1 per small portion” to “6 per small portion” on the special figure 1 side are referred to as “1 per V” to “6 per V”, respectively. Further, games per V that are executed corresponding to “7 per small portion” to “14 per small portion” on the special figure 2 side are referred to as “7 per V” to “14 per V”, respectively. The whole of “1 per V” to “14 per V” is collectively referred to as “per V”.

  In this embodiment, all the small hit types are configured to execute a small hit game in which the “right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening)” is opened. Also, for all jackpot types, the “right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening)” is opened at the first round, and the subsequent rounds (from the second round onwards) are “lower big prize opening 40 (first round). A round game that opens the “1 big prize opening)” is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special jackpot type that opens either the “right big prize opening 50” or the “lower big prize opening 40” according to the number of rounds may be included.

(4-2. Game progress when hitting: FIGS. 57 and 58)
Next, the game progress when winning a big hit or a small win will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing the game progress of the big hit (per type) system, and FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the game progress of the small hit (per type 2) system.

(4-2-1. Game history of big hit (per type): Fig. 57)
In FIG. 57, time t1 indicates the time when the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is won in the big lottery. When the fluctuation display of the special symbol won in the big hit is finished (time t2), the big hit symbol is displayed over the symbol fixed time (500ms) (time t2 to t3), and then the “big hit game” starts through the big hit start interval. Is done. This jackpot game is composed of 16 round games, the first round is a round game in which the right big prize opening 50 (second big prize opening) is opened, and the second to the 16th round is a lower big prize opening. It is a round game where 40 (first big prize opening) is opened.

  For each round game in which the lower major winning opening 40 is opened, which round section is designated as “short open game” or “long open game” differs based on the type of jackpot. “Short opening game” is a round game in which the maximum opening time of the lower large winning opening 40 is set to 60 ms, and “long opening game” is a round in which the maximum opening time of the lower large winning opening 40 is set to 28500 ms. It is a game. This “28500 ms” is a time width that can be awarded to the lower major prize opening 40, and “60 ms” is a time width that is very difficult to win the lower major prize opening 40. For this reason, in the “short open game”, it is not possible to expect the winning ball, and the number of rounds in the section where the “long open game” in which the winning ball can be acquired is executed is substantially equal to the number of rounds ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “substantial number of rounds”.

  When the big hit game is started, a predetermined time start interval (time t3 to t4) is provided before the opening of the right big winning opening 50 in the first round. As for the start interval time, the game state at the time of winning is “normal game state” or “short-time state” as shown in the “opening” column of FIG. It is made different depending on which one is. That is, among the big hits 1 to 10, the opening time of the 1R is the same as the case of the small hits, which is as long as 1600 ms, except for “big hit 5” and “big hit 6”, and other “big hits 1 to 5” and “big hit 7 For “-10”, “11440 ms” is set as the start interval time when the game state at the time of winning is “normal game state”, and as the start interval time when the game state at the time of winning is “short time state” “14440 ms” is set. For “big hit 5” and “big hit 6”, “21000 ms” is set as the start interval time if the game state at the time of winning is “normal game state”, and “500 ms” if it is “short time state”. Is set. This is because the opening time of the 1R is as long as 1600 ms, and there is a possibility of winning while the right big prize opening 50 is opened, so that a long production will appear even at the opening. Using these start interval times, an opening effect for notifying that the big hit game is started is performed.

  A value of 1600 ms for the opening time of the right big winning opening 50 is a time width in which there is a possibility of winning V in the case of a small hit. Even in the case of “big hit 5” and “big hit 6”, the opening time of the 1R is set to a long value of 1600 ms. Even in this case, it becomes possible to show V winning games. For the same reason, the big hit start interval time is set to 21000 ms or 500 ms, unlike the cases of “big hit 1-5, big hit 7-10” in the case of “big hit 5 and big hit 6”. That is, for the big hits 5 and 6, the same start interval time (21000 ms, 500 ms) and the right big winning opening opening time (1600 ms) as in the case of the small hits 5 and 6 (FIG. 48) are set. This makes the game content of the 1R in the case of a big win indistinguishable from the game content in the case of a big win, and gives the player a sense of tension that “I might win a V” even in the case of a big win. In addition, from the point of view of the production, the notification time is shifted later so that it is not known until the end of the first round whether the big hit or the small hit has been made so that the tension lasts for a long time. . Details of this will be described later.

  When the start interval time ends (time t4), the right big prize opening 50 of the first round is opened. The maximum opening time of the right big prize opening 50 is different based on the type of jackpot. As shown in the “Open” column in the “1R (right big prize opening) prize lottery” item in FIG. 47, for the big hit 5 and big hit 6, a relatively long time of 1600 ms is set as in the case of the small hit. For other jackpots 1 to 4 and jackpots 7 to 17, a relatively short time of 60 ms is set. Therefore, when the big hit type is big hit 1-big hit 4 and big hit 7-big hit 17, there is almost no winning in the right big winning opening 50 in the first round, but in the case of big hit 5 and big hit 6 one round In the eyes, there is a possibility of winning in the right big winning opening 50 as in the case of the small hit.

  Further, when the right big prize opening 50 is opened, the detection signal from the sensor SW1 (right big prize opening sensor 52a) provided in the right big prize opening 50 is valid (acceptance permission) for counting the number of winning balls. Set to The period during which the sensor SW1 is valid is during the time when the right big prize opening 50 is opened (time t4 to t5), and thereafter the remaining balls until all the game balls are discharged from the right big prize opening 50. It is the sum of the discharge time (time t5 to t6). In addition, when it is detected that the related role in the play area 59 (the medium distribution board 57, the SP arm role 58a) starts operating at time t4 and has won the right big prize opening 50 from time t4 to t6. The operation is continued for the period up to time td, and if it is not detected that the right big prize opening 50 has been won by time t6, the operation is continued until the time when the remaining ball discharge time ends (time t6). (See FIG. 59). The reciprocating rotator accessory 61 is always reciprocatingly rotated (rotated) within a certain rotation angle range (for example, within a range of 90 degrees). In relation to the action of the play area 59, at time t4, the detection signals from the sensors SW2 to SW4 are also set to valid (acceptance is permitted), and if there is a winning at the right big prize opening by the time t6 (winning ball) Is detected by sensor SW1), when sensor SW3 or sensor SW4 is turned ON at time td, the setting is returned to invalid, and if there is no winning in right big prize opening 50 by time t6 (the winning ball is detected by sensor SW1). If not, it is returned to the invalid setting at time t6. Note that even if the sensors SW1 to SW4 detect the game ball at times other than these, the detection is invalidated, error notification is executed, and countermeasures against the goto action are taken.

  In the first round game, the right big prize opening 50 is opened and closed for the maximum opening time (time t4 to t5). The game ball is shown in FIG. 5 within the time from when the right big prize opening 50 is opened until it is closed (time t4 to t5) or until the remaining ball discharge time ends (time t4 to time t6). Enter the V chance route and stop at the SP arm accessory 58 (reservoir 58c) (time ta), the game ball is released from the reservoir 58c and enters the V lottery accessory 60 after a predetermined time has elapsed. And it passes the specific area 63 or the non-specific area 62 of the V lottery object 60. The sensor SW3 is turned on when it passes through the specific area 63, and the sensor SW4 is turned on when it passes through the non-specific area 62. When the game ball passes through either the specific area 63 or the non-specific area 62, the sensor SW3 or SW4 is turned on after a predetermined time from the sensor SW2 being turned off (time td), and passes the specific area 63 at this time. Whether it has been won (V winning) or passed through the non-specific area 62 (V lost without V winning) is determined. However, unlike the case of passing through the small hit, in the case of the big hit (per 1st type), the condition device has already worked, so that the action of V hit does not particularly occur even if it passes through the specific region 63. The time point at which the sensor SW3 is turned on is only the same time td as in the case of the small hit.

  On the other hand, when the game ball enters the through route of FIG. 5, it is detected by the sensor SW4 (time tc, td).

  As described above, the 1R round game ends when the opening of the right big prize opening 50 (time t4 to time t5) ends. Therefore, if the V lottery system is not taken into consideration, that is, when there is no winning, the one-round end INT is started from the time when the right big winning opening 50 is closed (time t5). However, if the number of game balls (the number of winning balls) won in the right big prize opening 50 reaches the maximum number of prizes (four) even before the maximum opening time has elapsed, the right big prize opening 50 is closed. After the current round game is over and a predetermined interval time between rounds has elapsed, the next round game is entered. In other words, when the maximum opening time of the right big prize opening 50 has passed or when the number of game balls won in the right big prize opening 50 reaches the maximum number of prizes, it is released. The right big prize opening 50 is closed and the next round game is entered with the interval time between rounds (the same applies to the round game where the lower big prize opening 40 described later is opened).

  The “interval time between rounds” between round games is the time width during which the big prize opening is closed. The “remaining ball discharge time” (time t5 to t6) and the next after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. It consists of “interval time before opening” (time td to t7 or time t5 to te) until the round game is started. “Remaining ball discharge time” refers to an extra time for discharging the remaining balls inside the grand prize opening after the grand prize opening is closed. However, sufficient time is secured until it passes through the winning detection switch (the lower large winning port sensor 42a or the right large winning port sensor 52a) formed inside the large winning port. As the remaining ball discharge time, a time of 1480 ms is set as shown in the column “Remaining discharge” in the “1R (right big prize opening) prize lottery” item of FIG.

  However, for a round game where the right grand prize winning opening 50 of the first round is opened, there is a possibility that a game ball still exists in the V-chance route guidance path even if the remaining ball discharge time of 1480 ms has elapsed. Because there is, it waits until the discharge of all the game balls is confirmed, and it does not shift to the next round (interval time before release) (in the end of the first round at the seventh stage in FIG. Time td). The confirmation that all the game balls have been discharged from the right big prize opening 50 is the same as the number of winnings detected and counted by the sensor SW1 and the number of discharging detected and counted by the sensor SW3 or SW4. This can be confirmed.

  In the case of a big win, since the condition device is already working, it is determined to move to the second round regardless of whether or not the right big prize opening 50 is won. Therefore, when no game ball has won a prize in the right grand prize opening 50 (the 7 ′ stage “round end INT” “no prize” column in FIG. 57), when the right big prize opening 50 is closed. At (time t5), the process proceeds to “round end INT”, that is, “interval before opening” for the next round. In addition, when the game ball won in the right big prize opening 50 passes through the through route (when SW4 is turned on by time t6), when the remaining ball discharge time of 1480 ms elapses (time t6), the round end INT, that is, the next Transition to the pre-open interval time for the next round.

  As the “interval before opening” that precedes the round game of the second round, as shown in the column “INT” in the “1R (right big prize mouth) character lottery” item of FIG. 47, A time of 20 ms or 62500 ms is set. Even when the lower major prize opening sensor 42a or the right major prize opening sensor 52a detects a game ball during the pre-opening interval, the game ball is regarded as an illegal prize due to fraud, as in the remaining ball discharge period. Then, predetermined error processing (error processing due to illegal winning) is performed.

  When the pre-release interval time elapses, the second round game is started at time t7 when V-chance is passed, and at time te when no winning is made. From the second round, the lower prize opening 40 is opened. The maximum opening time of the lower prize winning opening 40 differs based on the type of jackpot, as shown in the column “Opening” in the “2R to 16 (lower prize winning opening) long opening” item of FIG. In addition, for long open games, a time of 28500 ms is set. In addition, as shown in the column “Open” in the “2R to 16 (lower prize winning opening) short open” item of FIG. 47, a time of 60 ms is set for the short open game. Specifically, for jackpot 1, jackpot 2, jackpot 5, jackpot 7 to jackpot 10, the second to sixth rounds are long open games, and the seventh to sixteenth rounds are short open games. For big hit 3, big hit 4, and big hit 6, rounds 2 to 11 are long open games and rounds 12 to 16 are short open games. In addition, for jackpot 11 and jackpot 12, all the 2nd to 16th rounds are long-open games. As for jackpot 13 to jackpot 17, rounds 2 to 5 are long-open games, and rounds 6 to 16 are short-open games. The larger the number of rounds of the long open game, the larger the game that is given a relatively high profit.

  When the big hit game progresses, the lower big prize opening 40 is closed in the 16th round, and all the round games for 16 rounds are finished, the big hit game is finished after the end interval time. This “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the last round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and a time range that defines the section in which the ending effect is performed Point to. As shown in the “Ending” column in FIG. 47, the end interval time is set to a predetermined time based on the game state at the time of winning (the normal game state or the short time state) and the type of jackpot. In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1, 1420 ms to 3220 ms is set. Also, 18020 ms or 100 ms is set for the big hit in the special figure 2 in the normal state (regular), and 11020 ms or 100 ms is set for the big hit in the special figure 2 in the short time state.

(4-2-2. Small per game (per 2 types) game progress: FIG. 58)
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the game process of the small hit (per two types) system will be described. Note that the same contents as the big hit (per type) game progress (FIG. 57) will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  Referring to FIG. 58, when the big win lottery of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 is won (time t1), when the special symbol variation display is finished (time t2), the small hit symbol is the symbol fixed time ( 500 ms) (time t2 to t3), and then a small hit game is entered.

  When the small hit game is started, a start interval of a predetermined time (a third jackpot start INT column: times t3 to t4 in the figure) is provided before the right big prize opening 50 is opened. As for the start interval time, a time of 17000 ms or 21000 ms is set if the game state at the time of winning is a normal game state, and a time of 500 ms is set if the game state is a short time state (see “Big winning at the time of a small hit” in FIG. (See "Opening" column in "Mouth Open / Close Setting Table").

  When the start interval time ends (time t4), the right big prize opening 50 is opened (the first round start column in the fourth row in FIG. 58). The maximum opening time of the right big winning opening 50 is set to the same time of 1600 ms regardless of the small hit type as shown in the “opening” column in the “role drawing (right big winning mouth)” item of FIG. The This time of “1600 ms” is a time width in which the game ball wins the right big prize opening 50 within the time, but the number of game balls won does not reach the maximum number (4). Therefore, in actuality, not limited by the number of winning balls, but by time, and when the maximum opening time “1600 ms” of the right big winning opening 50 has elapsed, the small hit game ends. In contrast to the opening / closing operation of the right big prize opening 50 (1600 ms opening) performed during the small hit game, the opening / closing operation (1600 ms opening) performed during the big hit game of 5 and 6 in the special figure 1 is substantially the same operation. It is controlled so as to be an aspect, and it is impossible to determine which opening operation is apparent.

  When the above-mentioned maximum opening time has elapsed for the right prize winning opening 50, the right prize winning opening 50 is closed (time t5), and the remaining ball discharge time is within the item “Routine lottery (right prize winning mouth)” in FIG. As shown in the “Remaining discharge” column, a remaining ball discharge time of 1480 ms is set (time t5). When this 1480 ms elapses (time t6) and the discharge of all the game balls in the right big prize opening 50 is confirmed by the sensors SW1 to SW4 (time td), the small hit game ends.

  By this time td, the game ball that has won the right big prize opening 50 passes through the V area (specific area) 63 in the play area 59 or wins the V area (specific area) 63. The following setting is performed based on the result of the V character lottery that the player passes through the non-V region (non-specific region) 62 and loses the game.

  When the game ball passes through the specific area 63 of the V lottery item 60, that is, when the result of the V character lottery is V prize, it is confirmed that all the game balls in the right big prize winning port 50 are discharged. Then (time td), the round game of the second round (the first round per V) sandwiching the interval time before release from the time td to the time t7 (the column of INT at the end of the first round in the seventh row in FIG. 58). (Time t7). As the interval time before opening, a time of 15000 ms or 21000 ms is set based on the type of the small hit as shown in the “INT” column in the “Rolling lottery (right big prize opening)” item of FIG. The Note that the interval time before opening is referred to here because it is considered that a big win will be generated by winning a V at time td, and if the time until t7 is considered to be the 1R round game It can also be expressed as one round end INT.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passes through a non-specific area (losing area) of the V lottery winning feature 60, that is, when a V winning is not won in the character lottery (the 9th stage "7 '" small hit end INT in FIG. 58) "V no winning" column), when it is confirmed that all the game balls in the right big winning opening 50 (playing area 59) are discharged (time td), the small hit game is finished after the end interval time. (Time tg).

  Also, if the game ball does not win while the right big prize opening 50 is opened (the “no win” column in the 10th stage “6 ′” small hit end INT in FIG. 58), the right big prize opening 50 is closed. Is confirmed (time t5), the small hit game is completed after the end interval time (time tf).

  As shown in the “Ending” column of FIG. 48, the end interval time in the case of “no V-winning” or “no win” indicates the gaming state at the time of winning (ordinary game). The time of 5000 ms to 34500 ms is set based on the state or time-short state) and the small hit type.

  However, in the case where the gaming state is the short-time state, it is not preferable to digest the short-time state at a high speed because a long ending time is provided when the right big prize opening 50 is not won, so that a long ending time is provided. Therefore, the end interval time (ending time) (time t5 to tf) in this case may be set to zero or almost zero (several ms) (the 10th stage “6 ′” small hit end in FIG. 58). (Dotted line in “No Win” column of INT). By shortening the game time of a small hit game in this way, the time to the next small hit game can be shortened, the speed of digestion of the game is increased, and the game progresses speedily. I can enjoy it. That is, when the result of the lottery means is the second winning (small winning), the second winning is the winning in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is placed in the variable winning means (special variable winning device, right big winning opening). If the player has not entered the ball, the variable winning means is operated in a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern, and then the next game is started after the first predetermined time (t5 to tf in FIG. 58) has elapsed. When the winning is a bonus game (short time state) and the game ball does not enter the variable winning means, after the variable winning means is operated in a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern, the first predetermined time The next game can be started after a short second predetermined time (t5 to tf = 0 in FIG. 58, or less than t5 to t6, or less than t5 to tf).

On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state and the right big prize opening 50 is not won, the ending effect is executed by providing a predetermined time (time t5 to tf) as the end interval time (ending time). It is possible to encourage the player to try again for the next hit (big hit or small hit).

(4-2-3. External information terminal output: FIG. 60)
The output of the external information terminal will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 (b) shows a case where a signal is output to the external information terminal when winning big wins 5 and 6, and FIG. A case where a signal per V is output to the terminal is shown. Here, as shown in FIG. 56, the external information terminal is provided with information terminals 1 to 10, and particularly indicates the information terminal 5 (big hit) among them.

  Normally, when a big hit is won by displaying a big hit symbol, regardless of whether or not the player launches a hit ball, it receives the big hit signal sent from the external information terminal and the island facilities of the gaming machine. The big hit notification lamp of the data display provided on the side is automatically turned on, and a notification such as adding 1 to the big hit number display is performed. The timing at which a jackpot signal is output to the external information terminal in order to notify the jackpot is generally “at the time when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed”. On the other hand, when winning a small win in Special Figure 1 and becoming “per V” after winning a V, the timing of outputting a big win signal to the external information terminal is delayed from the time of winning the small win “ "become. That is, there is a difference (time difference) between “timing when the big hit notification lamp is turned on” and “timing when the number of big hits is added” of the data display provided on the island facility side of the game stand.

  For this reason, if the big hit notification lamp on the game stand is turned on when the change display of the symbols is stopped, it means “big hit”, and if it is turned on later than this, it means “per V”. The player will know which of the “per V” is won before the result of the V lottery comes out. This means that when the jackpot notification lamp of the game stand is turned on when the symbol fluctuation is stopped and it is determined that the game is a “hit”, the V winning lottery performed thereafter becomes meaningless to the player. , It develops into a situation where the player stops launching and looks at the performance of whether or not to win the V prize with a cold feeling. Therefore, the significance of making a V winning effect such as “Aim for V” appears to be weakened.

  Here, for the “big hit” and “per V”, the same production is made to appear and the player does not know whether the “big hit” or “per V” is won until the result of the V lottery comes out. If it can comprise, it can raise the interest which concerns on V lottery game. Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to make the big hit notification timing (outside end notification timing) of “big hit” and “per V” closer, the big hit notification timing of “big hit” is delayed to the start timing of the second round.

  With this configuration, the “big hit” hit notification timing is delayed to “at the time of winning V”, which is the “per win” hit notification timing, so that “big hit” and “per V” are almost equal. At the same time, on the data display, the hit notification lamp is turned on, and 1 addition display of the hit display count occurs. Therefore, since it is not possible for the player to know whether “big hit” or “per V”, the player is nervous when he wants the player to win V in the stage of “Aim for V” with respect to the V lottery 60. Therefore, the game is performed, and the existence of the V lottery mechanism and the V lottery effect becomes significant.

  Even if it is a “big hit”, the section up to the timing when the second round starts is treated as a “spoofed big hit” with the same effect as the case of the small hit, that is, until the V winning lottery result is obtained. It is possible to conceal the fact that it is a “hit” and prevent the V winning lottery mechanism and the V winning effect from being meaningless. Therefore, the existence significance of the V winning lottery mechanism and the V winning effect can be maximized.

  However, strictly speaking, a time difference remains between the big hit notification timing of “big hit” and “per V”. In other words, in the “big hit”, the big hit is notified at the start timing of the second round, and in “per V”, the big win is notified at the V winning timing in the middle of the first round. Is born. However, this difference in lighting timing is only a difference of a few seconds that is difficult to visually recognize, so it is impossible for a player to recognize the difference, and there is no fear that it will be used for V winning capture etc. Absent. Therefore, the notification timing for the big hit and per V can be handled as almost simultaneous in the big hit and per V.

(When per V)
Specifically, the case of “per V” will be described. FIG. 60 (a) deals with a case where a small win and a V win are made, and a V win is made.

  In FIG. 60 (a), when the small winning symbol is won in the special symbol 1 winning lottery and the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the big winning game is started after the symbol determination time (500 ms) has elapsed (time t3). Winning effects occur. In the case of this embodiment, the signal output to the external information terminal is only the big hit notification signal, and even if the small hit occurs, the small hit notification signal is not output to the external information terminal.

  Prior to opening the first big right winning opening 50 (corresponding to the first round because it is premised on winning V), the start interval time (time t3 to t4) of the first round is for small hits. 21000 ms is set (see the “Opening” column in FIG. 48).

  When this start interval time ends (time t4), the right big prize opening 50 is opened. In the case of a small hit, the maximum opening time of the right big prize opening 50 is 1600 ms (see FIG. 48), which is a time width in which there is a possibility of winning the right big prize opening 50. The first sensor (right big prize opening sensor 52a) SW1 is valid while the right big prize opening 50 is opened and until the remaining ball discharge time elapses. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, the SP arm combination 58 and the lottery combination 60 of FIG. 5 start to operate from the time when the right big prize opening 50 is opened (time t4). Then, whether the game ball wins the right big prize opening 50 (time ta), enters the V chance route, the sensor SW2 is turned on (time tb), and then the sensor SW3 is turned on (V prize) at time td. Each accessory continues to operate until the sensor SW4 is turned on (lost).

  SW2 is turned on when the game ball enters the right big prize opening 50 during the period when the right big prize opening 50 is open (time t4 to t5) and the first ball stops at the storage section 58c of the V chance route. (Time tb). The game balls that enter after that flow down to the through route. Thereafter, after a predetermined stopping time has elapsed (time tc), the storage portion 58c of the SP arm accessory 58 moves from the protruding position in FIG. 5 to the retracted position, and the game ball stopped in the storage portion 58c is removed from the storage portion 58c. After being released (SW2 = OFF), head to V lottery.

  A game ball that has entered the V lottery object 60 passes through the specific area 63 or the non-specific area 62 of the V lottery object 60. If this happens, the sensor SW4 is turned ON. Here, since it is premised on winning V, the game ball passes through the specific area 63 and the sensor SW3 is turned on (time td). At this point, the fact that the vehicle has passed the specific area 63 (V winning) is recognized on the main control unit 20 side, and a signal per V is output to the external information terminal (time td). The end interval is started from time td, and when a predetermined end interval time of 62500 ms elapses (time t7), the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened, and the next 2R round game is started.

(In case of big hit)
Next, the case of “big hit” will be described. FIG. 60 (b) deals with the case where “big hit 5, 6” is won as “big hit”. The reason for this is that, as shown in FIG. 47, “Big hit 5, 6” has a 1R right big winning opening opening time of 1600 ms, which is the same as the right big winning opening opening time 1600 ms in the small hit shown in FIG. This is because the premise that a big hit can be treated as a “fake small hit” is established. The other “big hits 1-4” and “big hits 7-10” do not satisfy this precondition.

  In FIG. 60 (b), when the big win symbol 5 or 6 is won in the special symbol 1 big hit lottery and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is started after the symbol fixed time (500 ms) has elapsed (time t3). . And in order to conceal that it is a big hit, the same effect as the small hit effect in the case of a small hit is generated. At this time, the big hit notification signal is not yet output to the external information terminal.

  Prior to the opening of the right big winning opening 50 in the first round, 21000 ms is set as the start interval time (time t3 to t4) in the case of a big hit 5 or 6 (time t3 to t4) (FIGS. 47 and 48). (See “Opening” column). As for the effects, the same opening effects as those for the small hits are generated as the opening effects for the big hits 5 and 6.

  When the start interval time ends (time t4), the right big prize opening 50 of the first round is opened. The maximum opening time of the right big prize opening 50 is 1600 ms, which is the same as that in the case of the small hit, and is a time width in which there is a possibility of winning the right big prize place 50. The first sensor (right big prize opening sensor 52a) SW1 is valid while the right big prize opening 50 is opened and until the remaining ball discharge time elapses. Further, when the right big winning opening 50 is opened (time t4), the SP arm combination 58 and the lottery combination 60 of FIG. It is turned ON (time ta), and thereafter, each accessory continues to operate until SW3 is turned ON (V winning) or SW4 is turned ON (lost) at time td.

  SW2 is turned on when the game ball enters the right big prize opening 50 during the period when the right big prize opening 50 is open (time t4 to t5) and the first ball stops at the storage section 58c of the V chance route. (Time tb). The game balls that enter after that flow down to the through route. Thereafter, after a predetermined stopping time has elapsed (time tc), the storage unit 58c moves from the protruding position in FIG. 5 to the retracted position, and the game ball stopped in the storage unit 58c is released from the storage unit 58c (SW2 = OFF), head to V lottery bonus 60.

  A game ball that has entered the V lottery object 60 passes through the specific area 63 or the non-specific area 62 of the V lottery object 60. If this happens, the sensor SW4 is turned ON. Here, since the case of big hits 5 and 6 is handled, the condition device is already operating. Therefore, although it has been determined that the big hit notification can be finally made regardless of whether the specific area 63 or the non-specific area is passed, in order to realize the playability of “apparent small hit”, the big hit notification is still performed here. Is not made.

  When the game ball passes through either the specific area 63 or the non-specific area 62, the sensor SW3 or SW4 is turned on after a predetermined time from SW2 = OFF at time tc. In FIG. 60, the times tc and td are shown at the same position, but there is a time difference between the time tc and td until the sensor SW3 or SW4 is turned on after a predetermined time from SW2 = OFF. Here, since the cases of big hits 5 and 6 are handled, the game ball passes the specific area 63 and the sensor SW3 is turned on (time td). At this point, the main control unit 20 recognizes that it has passed through the specific area 63 (V winning). However, in the case of big hit (per 1st type), since the condition device has already worked, the effect of hitting V in particular does not occur just because it passes through the specific region 63. The time point at which the sensor SW3 is turned on is only the same time td as in the case of the small hit.

  When the maximum opening time of the right grand prize opening 50 elapses or the number of game balls won in the right big prize opening 50 reaches the maximum winning number, the opened right big prize opening 50 is closed and during this time All the game balls that have been played are discharged by time td. When the 1R round game ends, the end interval starts from time td. When a predetermined end interval time of 62500 ms elapses (time t7), the lower major winning opening 40 is opened and the next 2R round game is started. Is started. When the next 2R round game is started, that is, at the same time when the symbol variation is started, a big hit signal is output to the external information terminal (time t7).

  As described above, in both “big hit” and “per V”, the start interval time is the same 21000 ms, the 1R right big prize opening time is the same 1600 ms, and the first one enters the V chance route and stores 58 c The time during the stop (SW2 = ON to SW2 = OFF) is the same, and there is no difference between the two. As for the jackpot winning notification timing, the case of “big hit” is the start of two rounds of symbol fluctuation, and the case of “per hit V” is “at the time of winning V”, both of which are almost the same time. For this reason, no difference is recognized from the viewpoint of the player when the game table hit notification lamp lights up or when the number of jackpots is incremented by one. Also, since the productions that appear during this time are the same, it is impossible to know from the productions whether the game is already a big hit or a small hit before winning the V prize. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the V prize game and the production using the V lottery role 60.

(Modification)
In the said embodiment, it comprised as follows. With the predetermined opening / closing pattern, it is difficult to allow the game ball to pass through the specific area, or the open state for easily passing the game ball through the specific area (V area). Variable winning means (second special variable winning device 52) configured to be controllable to a closed state for disabling, lottery means (win lottery) for performing lottery related to winning, and winning by the lottery means When a lottery is drawn, special game control means (S505 to S509 in FIG. 19) for executing and controlling the winning game for generating the open state in the variable winning means, and a specific area for detecting a game ball passing through the specific area A gaming machine comprising detection means (SW3) and output means (S063 in FIG. 11) capable of outputting information relating to the game to the outside. , A first hit (big hit) and a second hit (small hit) are included, and the special game control means has at least a first opening / closing pattern when the first hit (big hit) is lottery by the lottery means. First winning game control means for executing the first winning game (big winning game) for controlling the variable winning means with an opening / closing pattern including (in the case of 1R opening at 5 and 6 o'clock in FIG. 47, big winning in FIG. 60) ), When the second winning (small winning) is lottery by the lottery means, a second winning game that controls the variable winning means with an opening / closing pattern including at least an opening / closing pattern that is the same as or similar to the first opening / closing pattern. The second hit game control means for executing the (small hit game) (in the case of the small hit in FIG. 48, in the case of the small hit in FIG. 60), during the second hit game, the specific area detecting means And a third winning game control means for executing a third winning game (game per V) for controlling the variable winning means with an opening / closing pattern including at least a second opening / closing pattern when issued. In the case where execution control of the first winning game is performed, information relating to the first winning game is not output until a predetermined output condition established after the first opening / closing pattern is executed, and the predetermined winning game is not output. When the output condition is satisfied, information on the first winning game is output (time t7 in the case of big hit in FIG. 60), and when the second winning game is controlled to be executed, information on the second winning game is output. When the game ball is detected by the specific area detecting means, information on the third hit game is output (time tc in the case of a small hit in FIG. 60).

  However, when the second winning game is executed and controlled, the output means may output information related to the second winning game as follows. That is, it further comprises display means (liquid crystal display device 36) capable of effect display relating to a game, and display control means (effect control unit 24) for controlling display of the effect display on the display means. When execution control of the first winning game is performed, a first winning effect indicating that the first winning game is displayed at a timing different from a timing at which information related to the first winning game is output, and the third winning game is displayed. When the execution control is performed, a second hit effect indicating that the third hit is displayed at substantially the same time as the timing at which the information about the third hit game is output. In short, in the case of the third winning (small hit → per V), the V winning prize is used as a trigger for the outer end output and the big hit effect. In the case of the first hit (originally a big hit), the outer end output may be performed at the start of the second round, and the big hit effect may be performed when a predetermined number of seconds of the first round has elapsed.

(4-3. Game state after winning game: FIGS. 38 and 39)
Next, a description will be given of the destination game state that is transferred after each winning game. FIG. 38 (a) shows the destination game state when a big hit is made with the special symbol 1, and FIG. 38 (b) shows the destination game state when a big hit is made with the special symbol 2. FIG. Also, FIG. 39 (a) shows a small hit with special symbol 1 and shows a transition game state when winning V and winning V during the small hit game. FIG. 39 (b) shows a small hit with special symbol 2. In addition, a transition destination game state in the case of winning V and winning V during the small hit game is shown. If no V prize is won during the small hit game, the gaming state does not shift after the small hit game.

  As described above, in the “short time state” of the transfer destination game state, after the transition to the short time state, the number of executions of the symbol variation display game (total variation number of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2) is executed a predetermined upper limit number of times. (First short time end condition) or after the transition to the short time state, the game is continued until a predetermined upper limit number of times (special electric power) is executed (second short time end condition). The time-short state is terminated when one of the first time-short end condition and the second time-short end condition is met, and the normal game state is entered. As shown in FIGS. 38 to 39, the number of fluctuations and the number of special electric powers that are the end conditions differ depending on the big hit type and the small hit type.

In the case of setting the “time reduction number” of one or more times, the “special figure fluctuation frequency” is set to a value greater than the “maximum reserved memory number”, more specifically about five times more than the “special electricity frequency”. The reason for this will be described below.
(I) First, as a precondition, the special drawing 1 is executed with priority given to the special figure 1 over the special figure 2. For this reason, when the operation holding ball of the special figure 1 exists when the state is shifted to the short-time state, the special drawing must be first made after all the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 have been digested. The 2 big hit lottery cannot be received.
(Ii) Considering a configuration in which only “special figure fluctuation count” is handled here (no “special power count count”), and assuming that the special figure fluctuation count is set to four times, for example, a person who has an operation pending ball number (game) The following unfairness occurs between the person A) and the person who does not (player B).
(A) In the case of the player A (with 4 holding balls), even when the state shifts to the short-time state, all the 4 holding balls in FIG. Otherwise, you will not be able to receive the special prize 2 small lottery. The number of special figure fluctuations is set to four, but these four times are used as the number of fluctuations four times (fluctuation for four reserved balls) in the above-mentioned special figure 1. Since the special winning lottery probability in FIG. 1 is 1/299, in many cases, the player loses, and the player returns to the normal gaming state without obtaining a chance to win a V from the small hit.
(B) On the other hand, in the case of the player B (no holding ball), since the number of active holding balls is zero, the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is changed from the first symbol variation. Since the number of special figure fluctuations is set to four times, all four times become the symbol fluctuations of special figure 2. Since the special winning probability of the special figure 2 is 298/299, all the four special figure fluctuation times set are chances to win V from the small hit. In other words, it is possible to challenge whether or not to win a V in a small hit, up to 4 times.
(Iii) Therefore, in order to eliminate such unfairness, a configuration is adopted in which “the number of special electricity” is handled in addition to “the number of special figure fluctuations”. For example, if 3 times is set as the number of special electricity and 4 times, which is one more than the number of special electricity, is set as the number of special figure fluctuations, the following is obtained.
(A) In the case of the player A (with four holding balls), even when the state shifts to the short time state, all four operating holding balls in FIG. The special lottery lottery shown in FIG. 2 cannot be received until the number of fluctuations 4 times, which is one more, has elapsed.
Since the number of special symbol fluctuations is set to four times, the four symbol variations are exercised by the four symbol variations of the above special diagram 1. Therefore, as in (ii) above, if the special figure 1 loses four times in succession, it will return to the normal gaming state, so the small hit lottery of the special figure 2 cannot be received.
(B) On the other hand, in the case of the player B (no holding ball), since the number of active holding balls is zero, the symbol variation of the special symbol 2 is changed from the first symbol variation. If the V is not won during the small hits three times in succession, the remaining number of special electricity is 0, and the normal gaming state is restored. Therefore, it is possible to challenge whether or not to win a V in the small hits up to three times.
(C) Also, if the number of special electricity is set to 3 and the number of special figure fluctuations is 6 (a number three times larger than the number of special electricity), in the case of the player A (with 4 holding balls), 4 If the symbol variation of special figure 2 is performed twice after the symbol variation of the number of times, the remaining number of special symbol variations will be 0, and the game will return to the normal gaming state. You can challenge whether to win or not. On the other hand, in the case of the player B (no holding ball), it is possible to challenge whether or not to win a V in the small hits up to three times.
(Iv) In this way, in the case of setting the “special power fluctuation count” in addition to the “special map fluctuation count”, the value of the “special map fluctuation count” is a number greater than the special power count and the maximum value of the number of suspended balls If the number is less than 4, specifically, less than 4 times, unfairness will occur between those who have the number of suspended balls (player A) and those who do not (player B).
(V) Therefore, if the setting of adding 4 times (or 5 times), which is the maximum width that may fluctuate from the number of reserved balls, is added to the value of the number of special electricity, Even after all four balls have been digested, the value of the number of special electricity remains. Since it is exercised as many times as the number of special electricity remaining, even if there are four reserved balls, the symbol variation by special figure 2 is ensured.

  In the case of the present embodiment, the number of special electricity set is a game based on the fact that the working memory ball of the special symbol 1 is preferentially digested over the special symbol 2 and there is no working memory ball of the special symbol 2 The maximum number of reserved memories is set to 4 or more based on the characteristics, but when these game characteristics are different, the set number of special electricity can be changed as appropriate. For example, if there are working memory balls of special symbol 2 (up to 4) and the working memory balls of special symbol 2 are digested preferentially over special symbol 1, the number of special electricity is set smaller than the maximum number of reserved memories. May be.

  Hereinafter, when these “special times” and “fluctuation times” are collectively referred to as “hours / times”, and in the following text, “setting the number of times” is 3-5 times, 5 times, the number of fluctuations is set to 8-10 times, more precisely, “3 times of special electricity, 8 times of fluctuation”, “4 times of special electricity, 9 times of fluctuation”, “5 times of special electricity, This means that the number of fluctuations is 10 times. In addition, the phrase “setting the number of time reductions to 95 times” means setting to “95 times of special electricity and 100 times of fluctuation”.

(Modification)
In the present embodiment, both the number of fluctuations and the number of special electric powers are set as end conditions (conditions for shifting from the short-time state to the normal gaming state).

(4-3-1. Game state after jackpot game related to special symbol 1: FIG. 38 (a))
After the big hit game in the case of big hit with the special symbol 1, as shown in FIG. It is different whether it is transferred to "state". In addition, when shifting to the “short-time state”, the set “short-time number (number of special electricity, number of fluctuations)” differs depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When the big hit 1 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the big hit type is “big hit 1”, and the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal gaming state” (left column in FIG. 38), After the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the “short time state”, and 95 times (the number of special electricity is 95 times, the number of times of fluctuation is 100 times) is set. The same applies when the jackpot is 2, the jackpot is 5, the jackpot is 10, and the winning state is the normal gaming state.
(2) When the big hit 3 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the big hit type is “big hit 3” and the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal gaming state”, “Game state” is entered. The same applies when the big hit is 4, the big hit 6 and the winning state is the normal gaming state.
(3) When the big hit 7 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the big hit type is “big hit 7” and the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal gaming state”, "Status" is set, and the number of time reductions is set to 3 (3 times of special electricity and 8 times of fluctuation).
(4) When the big hit 8 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the big hit type is “big hit 8” and the gaming state at the time of winning is “normal gaming state”, "Status" and 4 times (4 times of special electricity and 9 times of fluctuation) are set as the number of time reductions.
(5) If the big hit 9 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, if the big hit type is “big hit 9” and the gaming state at the time of winning is the “normal gaming state”, the short time state after the big winning game ends Then, 5 times (5 times of special electricity and 10 times of fluctuation) are set as the number of time reductions.
(6) If jackpot 1 & win time is in short-time state, that is, if the jackpot type is “big hit 1” and the game state at the time of winning is “short-time state” (right column in FIG. 38), After the end, the process shifts to the “short time state”, and the number of time reductions is set to 95 (the number of special electricity is 95 times, the number of fluctuations is 100 times). The same applies when the jackpot is 3, jackpot 5 to jackpot 10 & the winning time is short.
(7) If the winning time is 2 & winning time, that is, if the big hit type is “Big winning 2” and the game state at the time of winning is “Time saving state” (right column in FIG. 38), After the end, the process shifts to the “short time state”, and the time reduction number is set to 3 (the number of special electricity is 3 times, the number of fluctuations is 8 times). The same applies to the case where the big hit is 4 and the winning time is in the short time state (right column in FIG. 38).

(4-3-2. Game state after end of jackpot game related to special symbol 2: FIG. 38 (b))
After the big hit game in the case of a big hit with the special symbol 2, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, it will shift to the "short time state" or to the "normal game state" Is different. Also, when shifting to the “short time state”, the set “short time number (“ special power number ”,“ fluctuation number ”)” differs depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When the big hit 11 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the big hit type is the big hit 11 and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, it shifts to the normal gaming state after the big winning game ends. . The same applies to the case where all other big hits 12 to big hit 17 & winning are in the normal gaming state.
(2) When the jackpot 11 & winning time is in the short-time state, that is, when the big hit type is the big hit 11 and the game state at the time of winning is the short-time state, the system shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, Is set to 95 times (95 times of special electricity and 100 times of fluctuation). The same applies when the big hit is 12, the big hit 17 & winning time is short.
(3) When the jackpot 13 & winning time is in the short-time state, that is, when the big hit type is the big hit 13 and the game state at the time of winning is the short-time state, the system shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, Is set to 3 times (3 times of special electricity and 8 times of fluctuation). The same applies when the jackpot 14 & winning time is short.
(4) When the jackpot 15 & winning time is in a short-time state, that is, when the big hit type is a big hit 15 and the game state at the time of winning is in a short-time state, the system shifts to a short-time state after the big hit game ends, Is set to 4 times (4 times of special electricity and 9 times of fluctuation).
(5) When the jackpot 16 & winning time is in the short-time state, that is, when the big hit type is big hit 16 and the game state at the time of winning is in the short-time state, the game shifts to the short-time state after the big hit game ends, Is set to 5 times (5 times of special electricity, 10 times of fluctuation)

  As shown in (1) above, even when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, even if the big winning lottery with respect to the special symbol 2 is won, the gaming state is not shifted to the “short time state”. Also, for special symbol 2, even if a big win lottery with a lottery probability of 1/299 is won, it does not shift to the short-time state, so it is not advantageous for the player, and the big lottery for special symbol 1 with the same lottery probability Since 69% shifts to the short-time state when a big hit is made, it is recommended to aim for a big hit in the big hit lottery regarding this special symbol 1 in the normal gaming state.

(4-3-3. Game state after the end of the small hit game regarding the special symbol 1: FIG. 39 (I))
After the small hit game when the special symbol 1 is hit, it is determined whether the game state shifts or continues depending on whether or not the V win is made during the small hit game. If no V prize is won during the small hit game, the game state after the small hit game is continued. However, if the number of time reductions becomes 0 in the time reduction state (when the specified number of times is reached), the time reduction state is terminated and the normal gaming state is entered. On the other hand, when winning V during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), depending on the small hit type and the game state at the time of winning the small hit, the game shifts to the “short time state” or “normal game” It is different whether it is transferred to "state". Also, when shifting to the “short time state”, the set “short time number (“ special number of times ”,“ fluctuation number ”)” differs depending on the type of small hit. Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) If the small win 1 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, if the small hit type is 1 small hit, and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, V prize is won during the small hit game As a result, after the game per V is completed, the state shifts to the time-saving state, and the number of time reductions is set to 95 (the number of special electricity is 95 times and the number of fluctuations is 100 times). The same applies to the case of 2 in a small game, 5 in a small game, and a normal game state.
(2) When the small win 3 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the small hit type is 3 per small hit, and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, a V prize is awarded during the small winning game As a result, after the game per V is completed, the normal game state is entered. The same applies to the case where the small game is 4, the small game 6 & winning is the normal game state.
(3) If you are in a short-time state at the time of winning 1 & winning, that is, if the game type at the time of winning is 1 After completion of the game per V performed by the above, the state shifts to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number is set to 95 (the number of special electricity is 95 times, the number of fluctuations is 100 times). The same applies when the small win is 3, the small win is 5, the small win is 6 & the winning time is short.
(4) If you are in a short-time state with 2 small wins, that is, if the game type at the time of winning is a short-time state when the small hit type is 2 per minute, you have won a V in the small hit game After the game per V is completed, the time shifts to the time-saving state, and the number of time reductions is set to 3 (3 times of special electricity, 8 times of fluctuation). The same is true if the small win 4 & winning time is short.

(4-3-4. Game state after the end of the small hit game regarding the special symbol 2: FIG. 39 (b))
After the small hit game with the special symbol 2 after the end of the small hit game, as in the case of the special symbol 1, if the V prize is not won during the small hit game, the game state after the small hit game is continued as it is Is done. On the other hand, when a V win is made during the small hit game, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the game is shifted to the “short time state” or “normal game state” depending on the game state at the time of winning the small hit. It is different. Also, when shifting to the “short time state”, the set “short time number (“ special number of times ”,“ fluctuation number ”)” differs depending on the type of small hit. Specifically, it is as follows.

(1) When the small win 7 & winning time is in the normal gaming state, that is, when the small hit type is the small winning type 7 and the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, a V prize is awarded during the small winning game As a result, after the game per V is completed, the normal game state is entered. The same applies to the case where all other small hits 8 to 14 per win & winning are in the normal gaming state.
(2) If the winning time is 7 & the winning time is short, that is, if the small hit type is 7 and the gaming state at the time of winning is the shortest time, you have won a V in the small winning game After completion of the game per V performed by the above, the state shifts to the time reduction state, and the time reduction number is set to 95 (the number of special electricity is 95 times, the number of fluctuations is 100 times). The same applies when the small win is 8, short win 14 & winning time is short.
(3) If the small win 9 & winning time is in the short-time state, that is, if the small hit type is 9 small hits, if the game state at the time of winning was short-time state, V winning during the small hit game After the game per V is completed, the time shifts to the time-saving state, and the number of time reductions is set to 3 (3 times of special electricity, 8 times of fluctuation). The same applies to the case where there is 10 small hits, 11 small hits & winning time.
(4) If the winning time is 12 & the winning time is in the short-time state, that is, if the gaming type at the time of winning is in the short-time state when the small hit type is 12 per minute, the player has won a V during the small winning game After the game per V is completed, the time shifts to the time-saving state, and the number of time reductions is set to 4 (4 times of special electricity, 9 times of fluctuation).
(5) If the small win 13 & winning time is in the short-time state, that is, if the small hit type is small hit 13 and the game state at the time of winning is in the short-time state, V winning during the small hit game After the game per V is completed, the time shifts to the time-saving state, and the number of time reductions is set to 5 (5 times of special electricity and 10 times of fluctuation).

  As shown in (1) above, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, even if the big winning lottery with respect to the special symbol 2 is won and the V winning is won during the small winning game, Will not be transferred to. Here, for the special symbol 2, the lottery probability of the big hit lottery winning for the small hit is 298/299, and the winning lot is almost always won. However, in the normal gaming state, the opening time of the lower start opening 35 related to the special symbol 2 is 40 ms, and no big win lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed since no winning is made first. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to win the lower start opening 35. Even if winning a small hit, it is not known whether or not a V win is won during the small hit game. Since it does not shift to the short-time state after the game, it is not advantageous to the player, and it is recommended to aim for a big hit or a small hit in the big hit lottery regarding the special symbol 1 in the normal gaming state.

(4-3-5. Summary)
As described above, in the present embodiment, as a means for shifting the game state to the short-time state on the special figure 1 side, a small hit game is generated with the same probability 1/299 as the big hit, and the short-time state is generated at a rate of 50%. To migrate. On the special figure 2 side, as a means for continuing the short state at that time, a big hit is generated with a hit probability of 1/299, and a small hit is generated with a hit probability of 298/299. That is, on the special figure 2 side, a small hit or a big hit is generated at a rate of almost 100%. In the player, since the short time state shifted on the special figure 1 side is continued on the special figure 2 side, the gameability to shift to the short time state on the special figure 1 side and the short time state that occurred are on the special figure 2 side. You can enjoy the gameplay that continues in the game.

  In addition, when shifting to the short-time state, the number of short-time times may be set to 3-5 times that the short-time state may end in a short period of time, or a V prize may be won during the short-time state, resulting in a big win Is set to 95 times, which is almost 100%. As a result, if the time shifts to a short time state and it is possible to finish in a short period of time, the lottery Players can be grateful for the movement of the ball in the object. On the other hand, if the situation continues for a short time for a long period of time, the next time per V is almost fixed, so the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind, and when the V win and the big hit, The game can be enjoyed with the expectation that a short time of 95 times should be set. In this way, the gameability that provides a small hit or a big win in which various time reduction times are set at the time of short-time state transition, and the gameability that shows whether or not to win a V in a limited time reduction number with a lottery game I can enjoy it.

(4-4. Benefits granted for irregular hits)
Irregular hits are hits that occur in the following two cases (not shown in FIG. 7). In the first case, a big hit lottery for the special symbol 1 is performed during the short state when the right-handed state is the correct gaming situation, and a special figure 1 big hit or a special figure 1 small hit that should normally occur during the normal gaming state occurs. This is a rare case (FIG. 38 (A) right column and FIG. 39 (A) right column). In the second case, a big hit lottery related to special symbol 2 is performed during the normal gaming state in which the left-handed game is correct, and a special figure 2 big hit or special figure 2 small hit that should occur in the short-time state occurs. This is a rare case (left column in FIG. 38 (b) and left column in FIG. 39 (b)). In the former, when the big hit in FIG. 1 and the shift to the time reduction state, the operation holding ball of FIG. 1 has already accumulated, and the operation holding ball was in the big hit hold, so If a big hit situation was born, or if the firing operation handle 15 was missed during the short-running state, the game ball was not hit with sufficient strength (stroke length) and left-handed, resulting in a top prize This occurs under the condition of playing a correct game, such as when a winning is made in the mouth 34 and a situation where a big hit was made in FIG. On the other hand, in the latter case, a person who recognizes that the operation mistake of the firing operation handle 15 or the special figure 2 small hits is advantageous makes a right turn in the right gaming situation and gains a profit. The case where it intentionally tried to be considered. Here, when the launch direction of the game ball (left strike or right strike) is mistaken due to an operation mistake of the launch operation handle 15, the correct launch direction of the game ball is notified. Therefore, the latter is intentionally generated in a gaming state in which it is difficult to say that the player is improperly gaining profits and is not the correct way to play, rather than thinking that it has occurred due to an operation error of the firing operation handle 15. Conceivable.

  On the other hand, standard hits that are not irregular, that is, normal hits, are the following two cases. One is a case where a special hit 1 or a special win 1 is generated by winning at the upper start opening 34 (first special symbol start opening) in a normal gaming state where left-handed is advantageous (left in FIG. 38 (b)). Column and FIG. 39 (b) left column), and the other is a special hit 2 or a special hit in the lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port) in a short time when right-handed is advantageous. 2 is a case where a small hit occurs (FIG. 38 (b) right column and FIG. 39 (b) right column)).

  Therefore, these four are handled separately as shown in FIG. First, the normal special figure 1 big hit or special figure 1 small hit in the “first quadrant I” in the normal gaming state (FIG. 38 (b) left column and FIG. 39 (b) left column), in the short time state Irregular special figure 1 big hit or special figure 1 small hit in the "second quadrant II" (Fig. 38 (b) right column and Fig. 39 (b) right column), irregular in normal gaming state Special figure 2 big hit or special figure 2 big hit in “3rd quadrant III” (left column of FIG. 38 (b) and FIG. 39 (b) left column), and normal special figure 2 big hit in time-short state Or, the special figure 2 small hit is a hit in the “fourth quadrant IV” (the right column in FIG. 38 (b) and the right column in FIG. 39 (b)).

  Here, it is assumed that the profit given to the player is the same as the profit in the second quadrant (regular) and the profit in the first quadrant (normal). The big hit (normal) in the first quadrant and the big hit (irregular) in the second quadrant are both rare hits with a hit probability of 1/299. The jackpots in the first quadrant include those that have zero benefit times (no time savings). Then, even though the big hit in the second quadrant is a rare hit with a chance of 1/299, the hit in the first quadrant includes those with zero time reduction (no time reduction). For this reason, when a big hit with zero time reduction in the second quadrant is won, even if a big hit is made, it does not shift to the time reduction state, so the normal time gaming state is returned from the time reduction state. This will give a disadvantage to the player and impair the interest in the game. Therefore, while satisfying the regular requirement of making the big hit probability of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 the same (the probability of the small hit may be different), the hit of the second quadrant (Irregular) It is desired that the profit is set to be more advantageous to the player than the profit in the first quadrant.

Furthermore, in the case where the profit in the second quadrant is set to be more advantageous to the player than the profit in the first quadrant, the profit to be granted is too large, and the fourth quadrant If it is larger than the profit due to the normal hit, the original game play of V winning and hitting the V of the type 1 and type 2 gaming machine is impaired. Therefore, from this point of view, it is desired that the profit in the second quadrant (irregular) is smaller than the profit in the fourth quadrant (normal). In other words, for the profit in the second quadrant,
Hit in the first quadrant (Normal) <Hit in the second quadrant (Irregular) ≤ Hit in the fourth quadrant (Normal)
It is in this relationship.

  In order to make the profit in the second quadrant (irregular) comparable to the profit in the other quadrants 1, 3 and 4, it is necessary to make the same comparison preconditions There is. This is because, as can be seen from the number of time reductions given corresponding to the hit types shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, and the hit type assignment values in the big win lottery shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the first quadrant to the fourth quadrant. Each quadrant includes a different number of hits with different number of times in each quadrant, and the hit judgment value range (assignment value of hit type) is also different, and the actual number of rounds ( This is because the number of balls is also different.

  Therefore, the average ratio (hereinafter referred to as “temporal grant rate”) set to the short-time state for all hits in each quadrant, and the average number of short-time grants given to all hits in each quadrant ( In the following, we will focus on “average number of short times”.

(4-4-1. Profit given as short-time grant rate: Fig. 73)
“Time saving rate” is a probability that a winning type in which a time saving state is given in the winning lottery will be selected. Since there are big hits and small hits, first, the short-time grant rate when winning big wins and winning small hits is calculated for "first quadrant I" to "fourth quadrant IV", respectively. Then, the average value of the short-time grant rate for the calculated big hit and the small hit is obtained, and the obtained average value is set as the short-time grant rate for each quadrant.

  FIG. 73 displays the short-time grant rate for each of “first quadrant I” to “fourth quadrant IV” in an easy-to-read manner. The distinction of whether or not it belongs to “first quadrant I” to “fourth quadrant IV” is represented by adding characters “I” to “IV” in the chart.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when the hit type is “big hit”, the time saving rate is 61% in “first quadrant I”, 100% in “second quadrant II”, and 0% in “third quadrant III”. , “4th quadrant IV” is 100%. In addition, when the hit type is “small hit”, the time saving rate is 50% for “first quadrant I”, 100% for “second quadrant II”, 0% for “third quadrant III”, “fourth” 100% in “Quadrant IV”.

As a result, as shown in the column on the right side of the “short-time grant rate” of each quadrant in FIG. %, “3rd quadrant III” is 0%, and “4th quadrant IV” is 100%. Therefore, the magnitude relationship of the short-time grant rate per each quadrant is as follows.
3rd quadrant hit (Irregular): 0% <1st quadrant hit (Normal): 55.5% <2nd quadrant hit (Irregular): 100% = Fourth quadrant hit (Normal): 100 %

  In this way, if the “short-time grant rate” has a magnitude relationship of “first quadrant” <“second quadrant”, the player wins a big win with special symbol 1 with a probability of 1/299 in the normal gaming state, and 55.5% of the time when you are in the short-time state, or in the normal gaming state with a probability of 1/299, you will be lucky to win a small win with special symbol 1, win a V during the small hit game, and 50% If the special symbol 1 wins an irregular hit with a probability of 1/299 in the short time state, the win rate in the “second quadrant” is 100. %, It does not immediately return to the normal state.

  For example, in a normal gaming state, when a game is progressing with the goal of winning a big hit or a small win in the special symbol 1 big hit lottery (1/299), the player has a relatively long variation time. During the reach production, it is possible to store up to the upper limit number of operation holding balls of special symbol 1. Then, when the result of the reach effect is a big hit (V win at the time of a small win), and when the game shifts to a short time state after a big hit game, there are cases where up to the upper limit number of operation holding balls are stored. In such a case, even if the big hit lottery with the operation holding ball is an irregular hit, the time grant rate for the “second quadrant” is not given, but the time grant rate for the “first quadrant” is not 55.5%. Since the rate of 100% is applied, it does not return to the normal state. Therefore, even if the “second quadrant” is an irregular hit, the player is not disadvantaged, and the interest in the game is not impaired.

  Further, the short-time grant rate as a profit to be given to the player has a magnitude relationship of “second quadrant” = “fourth quadrant”. Then, the gaming state shifts to the short-time state, and when the special symbol 1 wins an irregular winning with a probability of 1/299, and the special symbol 2 wins the win (with a probability of 298/299) Since the short-time grant rate in the case of winning a small win and winning a V) is the same, it does not impair the original game performance of winning a V and having a big win in a type 1 and type 2 gaming machine. For example, even if there are up to the maximum number of action-holding balls of special symbol 1 when the game is shifted to the short-time state after a big-hit game, The same short-time grant rate per “second quadrant” as that of the normal “fourth quadrant” is applied.

  The hits for "Second quadrant" and "Third quadrant" are irregular hits, but the short-term grant rate for "Second quadrant" is 100%, whereas "third quadrant" The short-time grant rate per hit is 0%. The winning probability for the small hit in the “third quadrant” is 298/299, and when the special symbol 2 fluctuates, the small winning is almost won. If the person who has the advantage of this special figure 2 small hit is trying to gain profits by making a right-hand strike under the correct gaming situation, that is, not playing the game in the right way Since the short-time grant rate, which is a privilege granted to the player, is 0%, it has the meaning of giving a penalty instead of a privilege.

  As described above, among the benefits granted to the player, the time saving rate has a magnitude relationship of “third quadrant” <“first quadrant” <“second quadrant” = “fourth quadrant”. As a result, even if the game is played in a correct manner without damaging the original gameplay, and the player becomes an irregular hit in the “second quadrant”, it does not give the player a disadvantage, Can be improved.

(Modification)
In addition, although the short-time grant rate has a magnitude relationship of “first quadrant” <“second quadrant” = “fourth quadrant”, it may be set to a relationship other than this. The magnitude relationship may be “first quadrant” (for example, 55.5%) <“second quadrant” (for example, 90%) <“fourth quadrant” (for example, 100%). In such a magnitude relationship, since the profit from the hit in the second quadrant is relatively moderate, it is possible to emphasize the original game nature of winning a V and having a big win by having one type and two kinds of gaming machines. it can.

  Alternatively, the magnitude relationship of “first quadrant” (for example, 55.5%) <“fourth quadrant” (for example, 90%) <“second quadrant”: 100% may be used. In such a magnitude relationship, hits in the fourth quadrant include hits that return to the normal gaming state, whereas hits in the second quadrant are hits that do not return to the normal gaming state. While having a thrilling feeling that it may return to the normal gaming state after the game, it is possible to enjoy the game with the desire to become an irregular per short-time grant confirmed, with a gameability different from the above Can be provided. Alternatively, the magnitude relationship may be “second quadrant” (for example, 60%) <“fourth quadrant” (for example, 70%) <“first quadrant” (for example, 80%). In such a magnitude relationship, it is easy to shift from the normal gaming state to the time saving state by reversing the magnitude relationship of the time saving grant rate of the “first quadrant” and “fourth quadrant” to the above relationship, and the time saving state Then, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with yet another gaming property that it is difficult for the short-time state to continue after the big hit game ends. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to eliminate rut in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to have many players enjoy the game of whether or not to win a V prize that is continuously executed in the time-shortening state.

(4-4-2. Benefits given as average time savings: Fig. 74)
Next, the above-mentioned “average number of short times” will be described.

  The “average time reduction count” is an average value of the time reduction count N (N = 0, 3, 4, 5, 95) given for each hit type selected in the big hit lottery. Similar to the above “time saving rate”, first, the average number of time savings for the case of winning the big win and the case of winning the small win is calculated for each of “first quadrant I” to “fourth quadrant IV”. And the average value of the average time reduction number about the calculated big hit and the small hit is calculated | required, and let the calculated average value be the average time reduction number about the hit of each quadrant.

  FIG. 74 displays the average number of time reductions for each of “first quadrant I” to “fourth quadrant IV” in an easy-to-read manner. As shown in FIG. 74, when the hit type is “big hit”, the average time reduction is about 43 times in “first quadrant I”, 49 times in “second quadrant II”, and 0 in “third quadrant III”. Times, “4th quadrant IV”, about 58 times. In addition, when the hit type is “small hit”, the average time reduction is about 48 times in “first quadrant I”, 49 times in “second quadrant II”, 0 times in “third quadrant III”, It becomes about 58 times in "4 quadrant IV".

As a result, as shown in the column on the right side of “Average number of times” in each quadrant of FIG. 74, the average number of times shortened per hit is about 45 times in “first quadrant I” and 49 times in “second quadrant II”. , “3rd quadrant III” 0 times, “4th quadrant IV” 58 times. Therefore, the magnitude relationship of the average number of time reductions per quadrant is as follows.
3rd quadrant hit (Irregular): 0 times <1st quadrant hit (Normal): about 45 <2nd quadrant hit (Irregular): 49 <4th quadrant hit (Normal): approx. 58 Times

  As described above, the “average time reduction count” per each quadrant is similar to the case of the “time reduction grant rate”, and the magnitude relationship of “first quadrant” <“second quadrant” is considered. Even if it becomes an irregular hit in the “second quadrant”, it does not give a disadvantage to the player and further does not impair the interest in the game. In addition, since the first quadrant <the second quadrant <the fourth quadrant is satisfied and the profit in the second quadrant is relatively moderate, two types It is possible to emphasize the original gaming nature of a gaming machine that wins a V prize and wins a big hit. In addition, by setting the average number of time reductions in the “third quadrant” to 0, when a game is not played in a correct manner, the player is given a penalty instead of a privilege.

  The “average number of short times” is also set to a relationship of “third quadrant” <“first quadrant” <“second quadrant” <“fourth quadrant”, but may be determined to be other relationships. As in the case of the “shortening time grant rate” described above, regarding the “average time saving number”, the magnitude relation “first quadrant” <“second quadrant” = “fourth quadrant”, “first quadrant” <“fourth quadrant” ”<“ Second quadrant ”, and“ second quadrant ”<“ fourth quadrant ”<“ first quadrant ”, and these magnitude relationships can provide the same effects as described above. .

(4-4-3. Benefits given as average number of starts: Fig. 75)
By paying attention to the average number of winning balls that can be obtained for each quadrant (hereinafter referred to as “average number of balls to be played”), it is possible to grasp the profits given to the player. This will be described below.

  “Average number of balls to be played” is multiplied by the number of real rounds (FIGS. 40 and 41) set for each hit type selected in the jackpot lottery and the number of prize balls that can be obtained per round (for example, 100 balls). It is a combination. In the same way as above, the average number of balls for winning big win and winning big win is calculated for "1st quadrant I" to "4th quadrant IV" respectively, and the average for the calculated big win and small hit Let the average value of the number of balls be the average number of balls for each quadrant. Here, it is not the actual number of rounds (FIGS. 40 and 41) in the present embodiment, but the actual number of rounds set per “second quadrant, third quadrant”, which is per irregular, and per normal. A case will be described in which the actual number of rounds in the “first quadrant, third quadrant” is different.

  FIG. 75 shows the average number of balls played for each “first quadrant I” to “fourth quadrant IV” in an easy-to-read manner. As shown in FIG. 75, the average number of rounds (“average R number” in the chart) and the average number of pitches when the hit type is “big hit” are 6.95 times and 695 in the “first quadrant I”. The spheres are 8.95 times and 895 spheres in the “second quadrant II”, 0 times and 0 spheres in the “third quadrant III”, 9.5 times and 950 spheres in the “fourth quadrant IV”. In addition, when the hit type is “small hit”, the average number of time reductions is 7.5 times and 750 balls in “first quadrant I”, 9.5 times and 950 balls in “second quadrant II”, and “third “Quadrant III” is 0 times and 0 balls, and “4th quadrant IV” is 9.5 times and 950 balls. Here, regarding “third quadrant III”, when all of 2R to 16R are the above short-open game (game in which the maximum open time of the lower prize winning opening 40 is 60 ms), the number of substantial rounds is zero. .

As a result, as shown in the column on the right side of “average number of balls” in each quadrant of FIG. 75, the average number of balls played is 722.5 balls in “first quadrant I” and “second quadrant II”. 922.5 balls, “3rd quadrant III” is 0 balls, “4th quadrant IV” is 950 balls. Therefore, the magnitude relationship of the average number of balls played per quadrant is as follows.
3rd quadrant hit (Irregular): 0 ball <1st quadrant hit (Normal): 722.5 balls <2nd quadrant hit (Irregular): 922.5 balls <4th quadrant hit (Normal) : 950 balls

  In this way, the “average number of balls played” per quadrant is similar to the above “time grant rate” and “average number of times”, and the magnitude relationship of “first quadrant” <“second quadrant”. As a result, even if it becomes an irregular hit in the “second quadrant”, the player is not disadvantaged and the interest in the game is not impaired. In addition, if the size relationship of “first quadrant” <“second quadrant” <“fourth quadrant” is satisfied, the profits from the hit in the second quadrant are relatively moderate, so one type and two types of games It is possible to emphasize the original playability that the machine has a V prize and a big hit. In addition, by setting the average number of balls in the “third quadrant” to 0, when a game is not played in the correct manner, the player is given a penalty instead of a privilege.

  It should be noted that the “average number of balls to be played” is also set to a relationship of “third quadrant” <“first quadrant” <“second quadrant” <“fourth quadrant”, but may be determined as a relationship other than this. As in the case of the “shortening time grant rate” and “average number of shorting times”, regarding the “average number of balls to be played”, the magnitude relationship “first quadrant” <“second quadrant” = “fourth quadrant”, “first quadrant” “Quadrant” <“fourth quadrant” <“second quadrant”, and “second quadrant” <“fourth quadrant” <“first quadrant” may be used. The same effect can be obtained.

(4-4-4. Other benefits)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the privilege granted to the player for winning the jackpot lottery includes granting a short time state (granting the number of short times) and award balls for the number of real rounds. By setting a magnitude relationship for each quadrant, a difference is made in the player's profit. In the above description, attention is paid to the “shortening rate”, “average number of times played”, and “average number of pitches”, and the magnitude relationship is set between the hits of each quadrant. However, the attention is not limited thereto. For example, you may pay attention to the “special privilege rate” that combines the short-time grant rate and the average number of balls. In other words, for this “special privilege rate”, by setting the size relationship for each quadrant, the interest in the game can be improved without giving the player a disadvantage (for example, “first quadrant”). <In the case of “second quadrant” <“fourth quadrant”), it is possible to provide a gaming machine having another gameability (for example, “first quadrant” <“fourth quadrant” <“ 2nd quadrant "or" 2nd quadrant "<" 4th quadrant "<" 1st quadrant "). In addition, the above “shortening time grant rate” is a hit that may end due to a shortage of remaining time without playing a big hit game during the time-shortened state after transition (for example, per 3-5 shorted times) Although it was a numerical value, as in the case of the above-mentioned “special privilege rate”, a hit with the number of times when the big hit game is expected to be almost 100% during the time reduction state (for example, per 95 times of the time reduction) Processing may be performed paying attention to the “special time saving rate” on condition that

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, an effect mode (effect state) will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes for causing an effect related to the gaming state to appear, and is configured to be able to go back and forth between the effect modes. Specifically, the above-mentioned effect modes include “normal effect mode” when the game state is “normal game state”, “short time effect mode” when “short time state”, and “per game state”. Is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes corresponding to each game state, such as “winning game effect mode”.

  The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) includes a function unit (effect state transition control means) that controls transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) designates a specific effect control command sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU 201), specifically, the current gaming state (including the internal gaming state), or the gaming state "Specific effect control command (in this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command, a decoration symbol designation command, a game state designation command, a short-time end command, a predetermined command transmitted during hitting" ("Big hit start interval command (big hit start command)", "Big hit end interval command (big hit end command)", "Small hit start interval command (small hit start command)", "Big winning prize winning command 1, 2" “V Chance Command”, “V Prize Command”, “Discharge Command”, “Round End Command”, “Right Large” Matching with the game state managed on the main control unit 20 side based on the production control command including information on the game state managed on the main control unit side, such as a prize closing command ") It is configured to be able to control transition between a plurality of types of effect modes. The production control unit 24 has a function unit (production state management means) for managing the production mode related to the gaming state. Specifically, the above-mentioned specific production control command is used to grasp the internal gaming state and the variation pattern selection mode managed on the main control unit 20 side, and maintain this in a form consistent with the main control unit 20 side. Configured to be manageable.

(5-1-1. About production under each production mode)
There are “normal effect mode” and “short-time effect mode” in the effect mode. In “normal effect mode”, whether or not the decorative symbol related to the special symbol 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a big hit or a small hit is displayed. An effect, an effect that suggests the number of short times in the case of winning a win, etc. are executed using the following notice effect. Further, in the “short time effect mode”, “the effect suggesting the remaining number of short times” indicating how many times the variation display of the special symbol 2 can be executed, that is, how many times the small hit game related to the special symbol 2 can be executed, etc. Is executed.

  The “normal effect mode” further includes a plurality of effect modes depending on the game situation, and specifically includes “normal mode”, “re-challenge mode”, and “meditation mode”. The “re-challenge mode” is used when the normal game state is entered after the big hit game is finished, when the short-time state is finished and the normal game state is entered, or when the normal game state is entered after the game per V is finished. This is an effect mode that is executed as many times as the number of changes. Further, the “meditation mode” is an effect mode in which a normal winning state is won by a small hit, a V prize is not won during the small hit game, and a predetermined number of fluctuations are executed after the end of the small hit game. When the special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times in these “re-challenge mode” and “meditation mode”, the production mode is switched to “normal mode”. By executing the “re-challenge mode” and the “meditation mode”, it is possible to give the player a reverberation that was enjoyable in the hit game and the game in the short time state.

  Similarly, the “short-time effect mode” includes a plurality of effect modes depending on the game situation, and specifically includes a “RUSH mode” and a “retraction mode”. The “RUSH mode” is one of the “short-time effect mode” executed when the number of time reductions is set to 95 at the time-short state transition after the big hit game ends. In addition, the “withdrawal mode” is an effect mode that is executed when the number of time reductions is set to 95 at the time-short state transition after the end of the big hit game. By dividing the “short-time effect mode” according to the set short-time number, it is possible to express the following game situation by effect. As for “RUSH mode”, the number of time reductions is 95, and the probability of winning a V during a small hit game is about 1/7. It is possible to express the game situation that can be relieved that the ball can be acquired and that it will shift to the short time state next time. In addition, in the “retraction mode”, there are 3-5 times of the time reduction, so there is a possibility that V won not be won during 3-5 small hit games. It is possible to express a critical game situation that the short-time state ends without any effect.

  Further, in the “small hit game effect mode” which is one of the “win game effect mode”, whether or not a game ball passing through the branch path in the right big winning opening 50 wins a V prize during the small hit game. Productions such as singing are performed. In addition, in the “big hit game effect mode” and the “per win game effect mode”, which are other ones of the “per game effect mode”, an effect that tells whether or not to shift to the short-time state after the hit game ends, An effect or the like is performed that tells how many times the number of times is reduced.

  In each production mode of "normal production mode", "short-time production mode", and "per game production mode" In the present embodiment, the background display as the background displays different background image effects. However, the present invention is not limited to changing the background image effect according to each effect mode as described above, and each effect mode can also be suggested by changing the sound effect or the light effect.

  The production of the above production modes and combinations of the productions are formed as production scenarios of free combinations, and a large number of production scenarios are prepared and selectively used as needed from the many production scenarios. It can be configured. For example, at the time of winning, the “normal effect mode”, “small game effect mode” and “per game effect mode” effects appear, or “normal effect mode” and “small game effect mode” A scenario in which a desired series of effects is executed can be constructed by combining a plurality of effects so that the effects appear.

(5-2. Advance notice)
Next, the notice effect in the “normal effect mode” will be described. The effect control unit 24, under the above-described effect mode, includes the contents of the effect control command from the main control unit 20, specifically, the variation pattern information included in at least the variation pattern designation command (for example, winning lottery result, reach effect) Based on the presence / absence and the variation time of the special symbol, etc., a function unit (notice performance appearance control means) that controls various notice effects related to the big hit lottery result under the aforementioned effect mode is provided. The notice appearance appearance control means of the present embodiment includes information (for example, winning lottery result information, presence / absence of reach effect, special stop symbol type information (information on the hit type) included in the variation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command. , Various notice effects can be controlled on the basis of special symbol variation time information).

  Such notice effect forms include not only notice effects represented by “reach effects (effect forms related to reach variation patterns)” but also those that occur in association with these effects or independently. Basically, these production modes are such that a plurality of notice productions are generated in duplicate to increase the game content, and the reliability or expectation level (hereinafter, “ It is called “big win winning expectation”), and serves as a “drinking effect” for encouraging the player's winning expectation (winning winning expectation). Representative examples of the notice effect include “reach effect”, for example, “pseudo-continuous effect” and “prefetching notice effect”.

(5-2-1. Reach Production)
The “reach effect” refers to an effect mode with a so-called “reach state” (variable display mode with a reach state). Specifically, an effect mode in which the final result is derived and displayed via the reach state. Say. This reach production is a notice (suggestion) of the jackpot winning expectation degree (that there is a possibility of being a big hit), and includes a plurality of types of reach effects associated with the jackpot winning expectation degree. For example, when a reach effect with a specific reach state appears, the expectation of winning a big hit is relatively higher than when a reach effect with a normal reach state ('normal reach (N reach)') appears There is. Such reach production with a specific reach state is called “super reach (SP reach)”. Many of these SP reaches have a longer production time (variation time) than the N reach in order to increase the expectation of a big hit. In addition, there are multiple types of SP reach with different SP win expectations (slight SP reach types (for example, weak SP reach 1-5 (the higher the number, the higher the expectation)), and more SP wins than SP “Strong SP reach type (for example, strong SP reach 1-3)” is included.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-continuous production)
“Pseudo-ream” refers to a production mode with a pseudo continuous variation display state (pseudo variation) of a decorative symbol. “Pseudo variation” refers to a part or all of a decorative symbol in a decorative symbol variation display game. Is temporarily stopped (a change stop operation that looks as if it has been stopped), and a display operation such as executing a re-change display operation of the decorative symbol from the temporary stop state is performed once or multiple times (this In the embodiment, it means a variable display mode that is expressed as if a variable display operation to be set as one set is executed a plurality of times by repeating a maximum of four times. This is different from a “prefetching notice effect (continuous notice effect)” described later that is developed over a plurality of variable display operations.

  When performing this pseudo-variation, for example, a temporary reach state (a change display state that suggests that there is a possibility of a reach state before the temporary stop state, or that the reach symbol appears to stop) is formed. However, once it is temporarily stopped with a combination of symbols that are lost, it is displayed again, or it is replaced with a normal decorative symbol. A re-variable display operation can be performed after a temporary stop state with a combination of symbols including a special decorative symbol (pseudo continuous activation chance symbol). Such “pseudo-reams” are mainly determined in terms of their occurrence rate (probability of pseudo-reams depending on the number of pseudo-reams), so that the greater the number of pseudo-reams, the higher the chance of winning a big hit. It is used as a notice effect that suggests the possibility of production (expecting reach production) (in the case of this embodiment, it can be generated at the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before reach production)). The higher the number of times, the higher the winning expectation level, that is, the occurrence of an SP reach type with a relatively high winning expectation level. The fluctuation display operation developed after the pseudo fluctuation is finished is also referred to as “main fluctuation”. For example, in the case of passing through the reach state, the reach state is formed by this main fluctuation, and the reach effect appears. The final game result is derived and displayed.

（5-2-3.
In addition, the effect is that there is a possibility of winning a winning ball for an operation holding ball (an undigested operation holding ball) that has not yet been provided for execution of the symbol change display game (special symbol change display operation). There is a pre-reading notice effect that informs the degree of expectation in advance. Regarding the pre-reading notice effect, first, in the main control unit 20, when an operation holding ball is generated (when a start condition is satisfied), the operation holding ball is used for executing the symbol variation display game (variable display operation of a special symbol). Before being provided, a “pre-fetching determination” is performed to determine in advance the jackpot lottery result related to the operation holding ball (steps S317 to S318 (random number determination processing to special stop symbol data creation processing) in FIG. 13), 15 Steps S409 (Random number determination process for determining operation of special electric accessory) to S410 (Special stop symbol creation process)).

  Furthermore, by using the result of the “pre-reading determination”, a “pre-reading variation pattern determination” is performed to determine in advance the variation pattern of the special symbol when the operation-pending ball is used for the execution of the symbol variation display game in the future. (Refer to S319 in FIG. 13 (Random number determination process at start-up winning prize)). The variation pattern of the special symbol determined in advance is referred to as a “prefetch variation pattern”. In this look-ahead variation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance whether the reach state is a “reach variation pattern” or a “normal variation pattern” that does not pass the reach state. Since the prefetch variation pattern is determined using at least the winning lottery result, the prefetch variation pattern information transmitted to the effect control unit 24 includes information such as the presence / absence of reach, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream and the number of times. In addition, information on whether the variation pattern at the start of variation is a “hit variation pattern” at the time of winning a big hit (including a small hit) or “losing variation pattern” at the time of winning a loss is also included. When the information on the prefetch variation pattern is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs effect control processing related to the prefetch notice effect. A series of processes for determining the prefetch variation pattern through the prefetch determination in this way is referred to as “prefetch determination”.

  Specifically, a “hold addition command” including information on the prefetch determination result (at least prefetch determination result information (information obtained by prefetching the winning result)) is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, and the hold addition command When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect, the effect control process related to the pre-reading notice effect based on the contents of the pre-reading determination result included in the command is performed. The upper byte side data for specifying the number and the lower byte side data for specifying the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (see FIG. 8). However, the presentation control unit 24 does not necessarily perform pre-reading prediction when a pending addition command is received. If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided by lottery and the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executable, the design variation display that is performed at the timing when the action holding ball is generated or first is performed. At the same time as the start of the game or at a predetermined timing during the game, a pre-reading notice effect for the current operation holding ball is displayed.

  Note that the “look-ahead variation pattern” obtained by the pre-reading determination when the operation holding ball is generated does not necessarily need to be the “variation pattern at the start of variation” obtained when the operation holding ball is actually subjected to the change display operation. Absent. For example, a case where the variation pattern at the start of the variation is a variation pattern designating “SP reach 1” will be representatively described. In this case, the content specified by the look-ahead variation pattern is not the type of reach production of “strong SP reach 1”, but the “strong SP reach” type, which is the main point, specifically “strong SP reach”. It is possible to specify that the variation pattern (strong SP reach 1 to 3) of the same system as “SP reach” is classified as “strong SP reach type”. In the pre-reading notice effect related to this case, an effect mode related to the pre-read “strong SP reach type” appears. Therefore, the main information that is notified by the pre-reading notice effect is highly likely to occur in the future (a strong SP reach type in this case) for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future. It is information such as whether it is low, in other words, whether or not the possibility of winning a big hit is high, by informing the player in advance before such action information is digested, In addition to the current symbol variation display game, the interest of the player is improved not only for the symbol variation display game to be executed in the future, but also for the fun of the game.

(5-2-3-1. Pre-reading notice effect mode: FIG. 8)
Next, referring to FIG. 8, the pre-reading notice effect mode will be described. FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pre-reading notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 8, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of operation reserved balls on the special symbol 1 side in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (below the display area of the decorative symbol in the drawing). Is displayed, and with regard to the presence or absence of the operation holding ball, this is indicated in the lit state (with the operation holding ball: “◯ (white circle)” in the figure)) or in the off state (no operation holding ball) : Information on the current number of balls on which the operation is suspended is notified by a dotted circle). The special holding ball on the side of the special symbol 2 is generated when winning the lower start opening 35 in a state where the variable symbol display can be started in the short time state, and the maximum reserved memory number on the special symbol 2 side. Is 0, even if a prize is awarded to the lower start opening 35 during the special symbol variation display, the operation holding ball is not stored. Therefore, there is no holding display area for displaying the number of holding balls on the special symbol 2 side. Further, the hold display area 76 on the special symbol 1 side is displayed only in the “normal effect mode” and is not displayed in the “short time effect mode”.

  The display regarding the presence / absence of the operation holding ball (hereinafter referred to as “holding display”) is sequentially displayed in the order of generation (winning order), and a maximum of four holding displays can be displayed in the holding display area 76. . Specifically, in the hold display area 76, the leftmost operation hold ball is the first operation hold ball (that is, the oldest) generated on the time axis among all the operation hold balls in the hold display. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the hold display units a1 to d1 including hold icons (icon images) provided on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (four) as the maximum hold storage number are provided. Is provided. These hold display units a1 to d1 are normally switched to the operating state (lighted state) by the same number, for example, three as the number of the active holding balls existing when the pre-reading determination is made. Therefore, this hold display unit functions as a hold display means for displaying the number of hold operations. However, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, the hold display mode of the corresponding one of the hold display units a1 to d1 is changed to a predetermined pre-reading notice display mode (dedicated hold display mode). It works as a means to generate a pre-reading notice effect.

  When receiving the hold addition command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 performs a pre-reading notice lottery for drawing whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is performed as part of the display control process related to the hold display. Do. In this pre-reading notice lottery, the action-holding ball related to the winning becomes the action-holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (for example, the holding display part b2 with hatching in FIG. 8 is applicable). In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice lottery execution condition is based on the condition that there is no reach fluctuation pattern type among the pre-reading fluctuation patterns related to the existing operation holding ball. This is in order to avoid the fact that other reach effects intervene in the middle of the pre-reading notice effects that are continuously generated, the original look-ahead notice effects are cut off, and the effect of the effects becomes dilute. . The winning probability of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice lottery is higher than that of “losing”, and the probability of winning a hit type with a relatively high expectation degree of winning big wins is higher. Depending on whether or not to do, winning expectation degree to the big hit is shown.

  When the pre-reading notice lottery is won, among the holding icons of the holding display parts a1 to d1, the holding icon that is the object of the pre-reading notice is changed from, for example, the blue of the normal holding display to the yellow of the notice display, A pre-reading notice effect of “holding display changing system” such as changing to a special holding color such as green, red, or rainbow color is performed. Here, the blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors on the hold icon mean that the winning expectation is high in the order of these colors. (Accurate) This is a premium hold icon. This reserved color is determined by lottery based on the contents of the prefetch fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the “big hit” is more likely to be selected than the “losing”, and if the reach type has a relatively high expectation level for winning the big hit, the reserved color having the higher expected level of winning the big hit is selected with a high probability. It is like that. Note that the pre-reading notice effect mode of the “holding display changing system” is not limited to changing the holding color as described above, but may be changed to an icon imitating a special character. Such “holding display changing system” pre-reading notice effect is displayed when an operation holding ball is generated, and is therefore referred to as a “winning change system” pre-reading notice effect.

  The existing operation holding balls are sequentially digested with the execution of the symbol variation display game. At this time, in order to express that one operation hold ball has been consumed, the display position of the hold display portion corresponding to the existing operation hold ball is moved up (sequentially shifted to the left), and the display number is reduced. Although the control is performed, the above-described hold display mode different from normal continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the above-described holding display change system (winning change system) causes a dedicated notice effect to appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It can be said that this is an aspect of “continuous notice effect”. This continuous notice effect is executed across a plurality of symbol variation display games, and is different from the notice effect performed during one symbol variation operation like a pseudo-ream.

  In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect, the “variation start changing system” pre-reading notice effect that is triggered by the start of the symbol variation display game can be displayed. It has become. The “change start time change system” pre-reading notice effect is, for example, displaying a pre-reading-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, which is executed over a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games and continuously displayed. This is a pre-reading notice effect of “image display change system”. In other words, the pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system” is a symbol variation display game related to establishment of a start condition when a game ball wins a start opening and a start condition is satisfied during one symbol change display game. In addition to temporarily storing the right to execute and pre-fetching notice lottery regarding whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice effect, if this pre-reading notice lottery is won, all or a part of the reserved memory existing at that time, The symbol variation display game is expressed with some relevance. For example, in all or some of the symbol variation display games relating to the existing operation holding balls from the oldest operation holding ball to the operation holding ball subject to the pre-reading notice in the storage order, a pre-read-only notice image on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (A preview image imitating the lightning bolt shown) is displayed. In this regard, the pre-reading notice effect of the “variation start change system” is the same as the “previous change system” pre-reading notice effect. It can be said that this is one aspect of the “notice effect”. In each symbol variation display game, a different preview image dedicated to prefetching may be used.

  In addition, the execution form of the pre-reading notice effect can be set to the following form. For example, (a) only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (b) only the change starting change system (image display changing system) is executed, (c) winning change system and change starting change Various execution forms such as executing both of the systems can be adopted. In the present embodiment, the configurations (a) to (c) are configured to be executable. Specifically, through the pre-reading notice lottery, the pre-reading notice effect of the winning change system and the pre-reading notice effect of the changing system at the start of change are each drawn independently, and any of the pre-reading of (a) to (c) above is performed. It is determined whether to execute the notice effect or not to execute the prefetch notice effect itself. In other words, at least one look-ahead notice effect of the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear (the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change can appear independently). .

  Therefore, even if the “previous change system” look-ahead notice effect appears, the “variation start change system” look-ahead notice effect does not necessarily appear, and vice versa. Even if the “system” prefetching notice effect appears, the “previous change system” prefetching notice effect does not necessarily appear. In addition, a pre-reading notice effect of “change system at winning (holding display changing system)” and a pre-reading notice effect of “change system at start of change (image display changing system)” may occur simultaneously. In addition, it is not necessary to configure any of the execution modes (b) to (c) above, and at the time of the pre-reading notice, only the winning change system (holding display changing system) is executed, (Indication display change system) only, or both the change system at the time of winning and the change system at the start of change are always executed. The execution form can be determined as appropriate. Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be displayed by other directing means. You may comprise so that it can be taken out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the pre-reading notice effect mode woven by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In the figure (1), during the symbol variation display game (“↓” in the figure indicates that the ornamental symbol is being varied and displayed), the upper start opening 34 is won to win the special symbol 1 side operation holding ball. Suppose that the number has become three, and among the third, the action holding ball on which the second movement start operation is executed is the target of the pre-reading notice effect (in this case, the pre-reading notice lottery and change of the winning change system) This shows a case in which a winning change was made in the pre-change notice lottery at the start. In addition, here, it is assumed that the first operation hold ball previously held and the third operation hold ball held later are operation hold balls that have not been pre-selected for the pre-reading notice lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 1A, the production control unit 24 displays a hold display of the second operation hold ball that has been subject to the pre-read notice, and a hold display dedicated to pre-read that is different from normal (hereinafter, “dedicated hold display”). (Referred to as). At this time, the hold display corresponding to the first and third operation hold balls that are not subject to the pre-reading notice is maintained as a normal hold display (hereinafter referred to as “normal hold display”). In the figure, when the display mode of the hold display of the second operation hold ball subject to the pre-reading notice is changed from the normal hold display (white circle (◯) mark) to the dedicated hold display (hatched circle). Show. This notifies the player that the pre-reading notice effect has been started. FIG. 1 (1) shows that the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is finished and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “246” (the result is “lost”).

  The game progresses to (2) in the same figure, and the main control unit 20 starts a special symbol variation display game based on the operation reservation ball on the special symbol 1 side which is the first (oldest operation reservation ball). The action control ball 24 digests the action hold ball, and the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each action hold ball to the left with the start of the special symbol variation display game. It is set as the hold display mode which shows the state digested by one, and the decoration symbol fluctuation display game based on the first operation hold ball is started. At this time, as a pre-reading notice effect of “variation start change system”, a background image for the pre-reading notice effect (for example, a lightning effect by displaying a lightning image simulating lightning: a dedicated notice image) is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. Display. Thereby, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 has a display mode as shown in FIG.

  Then, the game progresses to FIG. 3 (3), and the symbol variation display game that is currently being executed is terminated and the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed with “351” (the result is “lost”).

  Subsequently, the game progresses to FIG. 4 (4), and the main control unit 20 plays a special symbol variation display game based on the second operation holding ball, that is, the operation holding ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The action control unit 24 starts and digests the operation hold ball, and at the same time as the start of the special symbol variation display game, the production control unit 24 shifts the hold display mode corresponding to each operation hold ball to the left, respectively. The decorative symbol variation display game based on the actuated holding ball is started. At this time, the “dedicated hold display” of the change system at the time of winning disappears from the screen at the time of the shift, and is terminated when the current symbol variation display game is started (with the digestion of the operation hold ball). In addition, a special notice image (in this case, lightning effect) of the change system at the start of the change is ended at the end of the generation in the symbol change display game. FIG. 4 (4) shows the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 immediately after the start of the symbol variation display game. In this way, a series of pre-reading notice effects has been completed. After that, if there is a roaring effect (pseudo-ream or reach effect (SP reach)) that increases the expectation level for winning a big hit during this symbol variation display game, the expectation for the big hit is combined with the content of the pre-reading notice effect. The feeling will be further enhanced.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate the pre-reading notice effect as described above as one aspect of the continuous notice effect. Thereby, since the variation of production can be made rich, the fun of the game can be improved.

(5-2-4. Performance at the time of hitting: FIGS. 61 to 63)
Next, the winning effect when winning in the “normal effect mode” and the “short time effect mode” will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 61 shows that a win is won in the normal game state where the effect in the “normal effect mode” is executed, and after the big hit game, the time is reduced to a time-short state of 95 times and the “short-time effect mode” is started. It is a figure explaining the production flow until. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the setting of effect contents in the “battle mode” that is one of the “time reduction effect modes”. FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the effect flow at the time of hit in the “time reduction effect mode” started with the time reduction set to 95 times.

(5-2-4-1. “Normal production mode” → “RUSH mode”: FIG. 61)
First, referring to FIG. 61, the “normal performance mode” in the normal game state shifts to the time-short state in which the number of time reductions is 95 after the big hit game, and transitions to “RUSH mode” which is one of the “time reduction effect modes”. To do this, there are the following four routes (1) to (4). The “RUSH mode” is an effect mode that is executed when the number of time reductions is set to 95 when shifting to the time reduction state. Note that the route to be taken is determined as follows according to the hit type.

For big hits 1, 2, 5, and 10 (1) Route starting from “Special symbol 1 big hit 7 symbols aligned” block (2) Route starting from “Special symbol 1 big hit other than 7 symbols” block ( 3) The route starting from the block “Special symbol 1 big hit symbol not aligned” is selected.
In the case of 3, 4, and 6 big hits, the route starting from the block of (2) “special symbols 1 other than 7 big hits” is selected.
In the case of the big hit 7-9, the route starting from the block of (3) “No special symbol 1 big hit symbol alignment” is selected.
In the case of 1 to 6 small hits, the route starting from the block of (4) “special symbols other than 7 per small symbol” is selected.
Note that the routes shown in FIG. 61 are representative examples in which the production progresses for each route, and are not limited to these routes. it can.

(1) Production Route Starting from “Special Symbol 1 Big Hit 7 Symbols Matching” In the “Special Symbol 1 Big Hit 7 Symbols Matching” block in FIG. If it is a big hit that shifts to (mainly big hit 1, 2, 5, 10 may include other big hit types), stop display with a combination of 7 "777" decorative symbols To do.

  When the big hit game is started after the stop display of the decorative symbols in the 7 symbols, the “SP bonus” effect peculiar to the big hit game is executed (block of “SP bonus” in the figure). Further, during the big hit game, a mode selection effect for determining the effect content in the “RUSH mode” is executed (block of “mode selection” in the figure). In this mode selection effect, the player is allowed to select either “battle mode” in which the hero and the enemy character fight or “school mode” in which the hero challenges various games. When the big hit game is over, the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state, and the game proceeds in the production mode selected by the player. Details of the “school mode” and the “battle mode” will be described later.

(2) Production route starting from “Special symbols other than 7 big hits” In the block “Special symbols 1 other than 7 big hits” in FIG. 61, the jackpot type related to special symbol 1 is set to 95 times If it is a big hit that shifts to the short-time state, or a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state (mainly in the case of 1 to 6 or 10 big hits, other big hit types may be included), decorative design Is stopped and displayed with a combination of numbers other than 7 such as “111”. In addition, in the case of big hits 1, 2, 5, and 10, in addition to the route of “special symbols other than 7 per big symbol”, the route of “special symbols of 7 big hits” and the following “special symbol of big hits” One of the routes of “no pattern alignment” is selected.

  When the jackpot game is started after the stop display of the decorative symbols with the symbols other than 7, the “decision battle bonus” effect peculiar to the jackpot game is executed. In the “decision battle bonus” production, first, the production where the main character and the boss character 1 confront each other is executed using the start interval time after the start of the big hit game (block of “decision battle bonus VS boss character 1 start” in the figure). .

  Next, the round game of the big hit game proceeds, and an effect that the boss character 1 preempts the hero and attacks in the middle is executed (block of “decision battle bonus VS boss character 1 enemy first” in the figure). Then, when the big hit type is a big hit that shifts to a short time state set to 95 times and short times, at the end of the big hit game, the hero strikes back against the boss character 1 and performs an effect (" Route from “Result” block to “Victory”). During the subsequent big hit game, the mode selection effect for determining the effect content of the “RUSH mode” is executed as in the case of the route (1) (block of “mode selection” in the figure). When the big hit game is over, the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state, and the game proceeds in the production mode selected by the player.

  On the other hand, when the big hit type is a big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state, an effect that the main character is defeated by the boss character 1 is executed at the end of the big hit game (proceeding to "defeat" from the "result" block in the figure) root). During the subsequent jackpot game, an effect that notifies that the gaming state has not shifted to the short-time state is executed, and when the jackpot game ends, the game proceeds in the “re-challenge mode” effect mode (in the figure) "Block to normal game state re-challenge mode").

(3) Production route starting from “No special symbol 1 big hit symbol alignment” In the block of “No special symbol 1 big hit symbol alignment” in FIG. If it is a big hit (in the case of big hit 1, 2, 5, 7-10), the combination of numbers of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a disjointed form (for example, a combination of “315”).

  When the jackpot game is started after the stop display of the decorative symbols without the pattern matching, a “decision bonus” effect peculiar to the jackpot game is executed (block of “decision bonus” in the figure). Then, when the big hit game ends, the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state. In this “decision battle bonus” effect, an effect in which the boss character 2 appears is executed. Then, when the time shifts to the short-time state, a confrontation between the boss character 2 that has appeared and the main character is performed (block of “VS Boss character 2” in the figure).

  If you win a small hit in the short-time state and win a V during the small hit game, the hero's attack hits the boss character 2 (the route going from the “digestion” block to the “attack HIT” in the figure), and the game per V Be started. In the game per V, a “decision battle bonus” effect in which the main character and the boss character 2 continue to confront each other is executed (“decision battle bonus (VS boss character 2)” in the figure).

  Next, when the round game of the game per V proceeds and the small hit type at the time of winning is set to the short time set to 95 times, the main character at the end of the game per V Is performed to win the boss character 2 (route to “win” in the figure). During the subsequent big hit game, the mode selection effect for determining the effect content of the “RUSH mode” is executed as in the case of the routes (1) and (2) (block of “mode selection” in the figure). . When the big hit game is over, the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state, and the game proceeds in the production mode selected by the player. Also, since “boss character 2” is defeated when “battle mode” is selected, “second route” is started, and as shown in FIG. Will come.

  In addition, when the round game of the game per V progresses, and the small hit type at the time of winning is set to 3 to 5 times, the short game is set to the short time state, and at the end of the game per V Then, an effect that the main character is defeated by the boss character 2 is executed (route to “defeat” in the figure). After that, when the big hit game is finished, the gaming state is again shifted to the time saving state where the number of time savings is 3 to 5 times, and returned to the block of “VS Boss Character 2”.

  On the other hand, if you win a lot of small hits in the short-time state but do not win a V during the small hit game, and if you do not win a V even during the last small-a-game where the number of time reductions is 0, the hero The direction in which the boss character 2 leaves without being hit by the boss character 2 is executed (the route that proceeds from the “digestion” block in the figure to “unable to hit attack”). Then, when the small hit game ends, an effect that notifies that the gaming state has not shifted to the short-time state is executed, and when the small hit game ends, the game proceeds in the “re-challenge mode” effect mode. (Block to “Retry mode for normal gaming” in the figure).

(4) Production Route Starting from “Special Patterns Other than 7 per Special Symbol” In the block of “Special Patterns other than 7 per Special Symbol” in FIG. 61, if the hit related to Special Symbol 1 is a small hit (small In the case of winning 1 to 6), the display is stopped and displayed in a combination of numbers other than 7 such that the decorative symbol is “111” as in (2) above.

  When the small hit game is started after the stop display of the decorative symbols with the symbols other than 7, the “decision battle bonus” effect peculiar to the small hit game is executed. In the “decision battle bonus” effect, as in (2), first, an effect in which the main character and the boss character 2 confront each other is executed using the start interval time after the start of the small hit game (“decision battle bonus VS in the figure”). Boss Character 2 Start INT ”block).

  Next, when winning V in the small hit game, it becomes a big hit game, and in the middle of the big hit game, an effect is performed in which the boss character 2 preempts the hero and attacks ("decision battle bonus VS boss character 2 enemy first" in the figure). Block). Then, if the small hit type is set to 95, and the short hit is set to the short time state, an effect that the main character fights back against the boss character 2 and wins is executed at the end of the game per V (see FIG. Route from “Result” block to “Victory”). In the subsequent game per V, the mode selection effect for determining the effect content of the “RUSH mode” is executed as in the routes (1) to (3) (block of “mode selection” in the figure). ). When the big hit game is over, the gaming state is shifted to the short-time state, and the game proceeds in the production mode selected by the player.

  On the other hand, during the game per V after winning the V prize, when the small hit type at the time of winning is a small hit that shifts to the normal gaming state, an effect is performed in which the hero loses to the boss character 2 ("Result" in the figure). ”From the block to“ defeat ”). During the subsequent game per V, an effect that informs that the game state has not shifted to the short-time state is executed, and when the game per V ends, the game proceeds in the “re-challenge mode” effect mode ( "Block to normal game state re-challenge mode" in the figure).

(5-2-4-2. During “RUSH mode”: FIG. 63)
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, transition of effects during the “RUSH mode”, which is one of the “time reduction effect modes”, will be described. “RUSH mode” consists of “battle mode” and “school mode”. As described above, one of the modes is selected by the player during the big hit game, and an effect corresponding to the mode is executed during the short-time state. The After describing the production flow in the “battle mode”, the production flow in the “school mode” will be described.

(Battle mode)
When the player selects “battle mode” in the mode selection effect of FIG. 61, as shown in FIG. 62, the main character (hero character) plays against the enemy character (enemy character) starting from the “first route”. A battle performance will appear. Specifically, in the first time hit in the short-time state, it will play against “enemy character 1”. At this time, if the victory condition is satisfied (a big hit or 95 per hour reduction or per V: see FIG. 63), the player will play “Enemy character 2” and win in the short state and win the victory condition. In addition, the player successively battles with multiple types of enemy characters such as “Enemy character 3”, “Enemy character 4”, “Enemy character 5”, and “Boss character 2”. When “Boss Character 2” is won, the enemy character 1 to “Enemy Character 5” are again battled sequentially. Play against. Then, when “Boss Character 1” is won, a battle effect is developed in which the enemy characters appear in a loop shape, such as again playing “Enemy Characters 1-5, Boss Character 2”. In addition, when “Battle Mode” related to the above “Decision Battle Bonus” is selected, if “Boss Character 2” is defeated, “Second Route” is started, and the main character is various enemies as shown in FIG. Play against the character.

  As described above, in the “battle mode”, the protagonist character and the enemy character battle each other, and the effect progresses by winning or defeating. In the short-time state, when winning at the lower start opening 35, a special symbol 2 big hit lottery will be performed, and almost a small win will be won. It is determined whether or not to win the enemy character in the production. Then, when winning V in the small hit game, the game per V is started, and after the game per V, the time shifts to the short time state again. At this time, the short number of times is also set. Depending on whether it is 3 to 5 times, the production is also affected. This will be specifically described below.

  The transition from the “normal performance mode” in the normal gaming state to the “battle mode” in the short-time state is when the number of time reductions is set to 95 times, and the probability of winning a V in the small hit game is about 1/7. Therefore, the next per V is almost fixed. The effect flow of the “battle mode” will be described starting from the gaming situation in which the next big hit is almost fixed.

  Next, as the specific condition in the middle of the game per V, the production flow is divided depending on whether or not the main character attacks first (block “specific” in the figure). If the small hit type is a small hit that is given 95 times in a short time, the hero destroys the enemy character with the first strike (route from “specific” block to “achieve”) and wins. The celebrating “special round” performance is executed (block of “special round” in the figure). After that, when the game per V progresses and comes to the final stage, an effect in which the next enemy character appears (block of “next enemy character appearance” in the figure) is executed, and the game per V ends and the number of times is reduced. Shifts to a state with a time reduction of 95 times, and the “battle mode” is continuously executed (route returning to “the middle of the determined battle mode” in the figure).

  On the other hand, in the “specific” block in the figure, if the hero made a first strike but failed to defeat the enemy character regardless of the type of small hits, the route from the “specific” block to the “not achieved” ), “Battle Bonus” effect is continuously executed. After that, when the game per V progresses, an effect of attacking by the enemy character is executed (“Result” block in the figure). As a result of this attack, if the small hit type is a small hit that is given 95 times in a short time, if the hero defeats the enemy character by attacking and defeating the enemy character (from the “Result” block in the figure) “Route to“ Victory ”), a“ Movie Round ”production is performed to celebrate the victory (“ Movie Round ”block in the figure). After that, when the game per V progresses and comes to the final stage, an effect in which the next enemy character appears (block of “next enemy character appearance” in the figure) is executed, and the game per V ends and the number of times is reduced. Shifts to a state with a time reduction of 95 times, and the “battle mode” is continuously executed (route returning to “the middle of the determined battle mode” in the figure).

  Also, in the “result” block in the figure, if the small hit type is a small hit that gives 3 times, 4 times, or 5 times, the main character is defeated by the attack of the enemy character (see FIG. In the middle of the “result” block to “defeat”), at the end of the game per V, an effect indicating that the current battle is over is executed (“Battle Bonus End INT” in the figure). Block). After that, the game per V is finished and the time shift is shifted to the time reduction state of 3 to 5 times, and the “battle mode” is continuously executed (route returning to “battle mode mid hit” in the figure).

  When the number of time reductions shifts to the time reduction state of 3-5 times, the effect of “battle mode” is executed as in the case of the time reduction number of 95 times. In other words, the production mode changes depending on whether or not a V prize is won before the time-short state (battle mode) ends. When the V prize is brilliantly (route from “digestion” block to “achieve”) in the figure, “battle bonus” is executed (“battle bonus start INT” block in the figure). On the other hand, if the V prize is not won in the small hit game for the short time (the route going from “digest” block to “unachieved” in the figure), the short time state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state Is done. Along with this, the “battle mode” ends, and the effect mode transitions to the “re-challenge mode”.

  As described above, whether or not the “battle mode” continues depends on whether or not a V win is made during the small hit game before the time-short state is ended. Here, in the “battle mode”, a short time remaining time effect that accurately notifies the player of the currently remaining “short time number” is executed. Specifically, if the remaining short time count is 75 times, the remaining short time effect that displays the remaining short time counts “75 more times” is executed in a partial area of the liquid crystal screen. By this remaining short number of times effect, the player can accurately recognize the remaining number of short times, and thereby can accurately recognize how many times a small hit game can be executed. This allows you to enjoy the “battle mode” with peace of mind when you start from “95 times” when the remaining number of short times starts from “95 times”, while when the remaining number of short times starts from “5”. Can enjoy the “battle mode” with hope for V prize in a limited number of times.

(If remaining time is 0)
Also, in “Battle Mode”, if the number of short hours remaining reaches 0 due to the current small win, for example, the number of special electricity is counted as the number of small wins, or the small win game When counting by the number of executions (when the number of special electricity is subtracted at the start of the small hit game or at the end of the small hit game), a special notification that the short-time state will end if the V prize is not won in this small hit game The production appears. In the case of the small hit game with the remaining short number of times 0, the opening time of the small hit game is set to be longer than the normal time when the remaining short number of times is a finite number of times, and the special effects including the above special effects Scenarios are now appearing (the same is true for “school mode” below). In the special production described above, a special character (strong boss character) different from the boss characters 1 and 2 appears, and the production content is a battle with this. In this way, by executing the special hit effect scenario, it is possible to focus attention on the small hit game that can be the last in the short-time state, and to give the player a sense of tension that the short-time state may end. . When it is fine and the V prize is won, an effect (special V prize effect) at the time of V winning that is different from the effect at the time of V winning when the remaining short time is a finite number is displayed. Note that the above-mentioned special effect (strong boss character) appears in cases where the remaining short time count reaches 0 times, and the remaining short time count is a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 or 2 remaining short times). You may let them. Further, strong boss characters (for example, three wing characters of strong boss characters 1 to 3) corresponding to the remaining short times of 2, 1, and 0 may be displayed. In this way, by changing the character as the remaining number of short times decreases, a sense of tension can be held for a long time (a plurality of small hit game periods). When the remaining short time is 0 or the remaining number is small, the variation display of the variation display in FIG. 2 may be configured to select a variation pattern longer than usual. In this case, a tension can be held for a long time not only during the small hit game but also during the symbol variation display game.

(School mode)
Next, the production flow of the “school mode” will be described starting from a game situation in which the number of time reductions shifts to the time reduction state of 95 times and the next time per V is almost fixed.

  In the “Next school mode mid hit” block of FIG. 63, when the small hit is won in the “school mode” in which the next big hit is almost fixed, the small hit game is started. When winning V during the game, a “Moe Bonus” effect is executed. In the “Moe Bonus” effect, first, an effect in which the hero is playing with the heroine character is executed using the interval time after winning the V prize (block of “Moe Bonus Start INT” in the figure). In addition to the directing effect, there are various effects that can be played against female characters in various games.

  Next, as a specific condition in the middle of the game per V, the production flow is divided depending on whether or not the hero wins the game (“specific” block in the figure). And if the small hit type is set to 95 times and the number of times is set to the short time state, the main character wins the janken (the route from “specific” block to “achieve”) in the figure) Then, a “special round” production is performed to celebrate the victory (“Special Round” block in the figure). After that, when the game per V progresses and comes to the end, an effect that increases the favorability of the heroine character to the main character is executed (block of “connection effect” in the figure), and the game per V ends and the number of times is reduced. Shifts to a state with a short time of 95 times, and the “school mode” is continuously executed (the route to return to “the middle of the next confirmed school mode” in the figure). When the preference for the main character exceeds a certain value, a special production is prepared in a special round production so that the player can enjoy the `` school mode '' aiming to appreciate this special production It has become.

  On the other hand, in the “specific” block in the figure, if the result of Janken is Aiko regardless of the type of small hits (the route going from the “specific” block to “not achieved” in the figure), the “Mo Bonus” The production is continuously executed. After that, when the game per V progresses, the Janken effect between the hero and the heroine character is executed again ("Result" block in the figure). As a result of this Janken, if the small hit type is a small hit that gives 95 times a short time, if the protagonist wins Janken (route going from the “Result” block to “Success” in the figure), celebrate the victory A “movie round” effect is executed (block of “movie round” in the figure). After that, the “connecting effect” is executed (the “connecting effect” block in the figure), the game per V is finished, the time is reduced to 95 times, and the “school mode” is continuously executed. (The route to return to the “next middle school mode hit” in the figure).

  Also, in the “Result” block in the figure, if the small hit type is a small hit that gives three, four, or five times, the main character is defeated by Janken (“Result” in the figure). In the final stage after the game per V progresses, the effect of swearing a rematch to the heroine character is executed (block of “Moe Bonus End INT” in the figure). After that, the game per V is finished and the time shift is shifted to the time reduction state of 3 to 5 times, and the “school mode” is continuously executed (route returning to “medium mode hit in the figure”).

  When the number of time reductions shifts to the time reduction state of 3-5 times, the production of “school mode” is executed as in the case of the time reduction number of 95 times. In other words, the production flow changes depending on whether or not the V prize is won by the time-short state (school mode) is completed. When the V prize is brilliantly (route from “digestion” block to “achievement” in the figure), “Moe bonus” is executed (“Moe bonus start INT” block in the figure). On the other hand, if the V prize is not won in the small hit game for the short time (the route going from “digest” block to “unachieved” in the figure), the short time state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state Is done. Along with this, the “school mode” ends and the production mode transitions to the “re-challenge mode”.

  As described above, whether or not the “school mode” continues depends on whether or not a V prize is won during the small hit game before the time-short state is completed. Here, in this “school mode”, a false remaining short-time effect that informs the player of the “remaining number of times” currently remaining is mixed and executed.

  Specifically, if the remaining short time count is 75 times, a false remaining short time effect such as “25 more times” is displayed in a partial area of the screen. As for the number of times for displaying, the number of times shorter than the actual number of times for shortening is displayed, and the number of times of display is increased or decreased during the “school mode”. As for the effect of increasing the number of times of display, an effect of increasing from the display of “25 more” to the display of “70 more” is executed in the “connection effect” in which the number of time reductions of 95 is set. In addition, with regard to the production in which the number of display times decreases, the number of display times decreases from “25 more” display to “3 more” display in “Moe Bonus End INT” in which 3 to 5 time reductions are set. An effect is performed. In addition, when the number of displayed times is “0 more” and the game ends with no V-winning in this small hit game, the number of displayed times is “0 more” based on the remaining number of short times. The effect of increasing from “20 more times” is executed. By this false remaining short time effect, the player can recognize the remaining short time number vaguely. Thus, the player can enjoy the game while paying attention to the remaining number of times displayed.

  In addition, one correct remaining short time count and at least one false remaining short time number are displayed on the screen (for example, “5 more times” (false), “20 more times” (correct), “after” 30 times "(false)), and it is difficult to know which is the correct remaining short number of times, and it is possible to execute a false remaining short number of times effect that informs the remaining short number of times by mixing falsehood. In this case, the color and background color of each remaining short number of times are changed (for example, “5 more times (blue characters + blue background)” (false), “20 more times (red characters + red background)”, “ The reliability of the correct remaining short time count may be changed 30 times (green letters + green background) ”(false)). By executing such a false remaining short-time effect, it is possible to make the player feel nervous that the time-short state may end quickly.

(When remaining short time is 0)
Also, in the “school mode”, similar to the “battle mode”, when the number of remaining shorts reaches 0, a special performance that informs that the short-time state will end if the V game is not won in this small hit game. Appears. However, in “Gakuen Mode”, the remaining short times displayed on the screen are mixed with false, but only when the correct remaining short times (internally counted remaining short times) reaches zero. A special production scenario including the special production appears. For example, as the contents of the special effect scenario, the contents of the effect that “special heroine character” that does not appear when there is a short number of remaining times appear.

(Other production modes)
The production mode is not limited to the “battle mode” in which the accurate remaining short time count is displayed or the “school mode” in which the false remaining short time number is displayed. There may be. In the third performance mode, the player can always have a sense of tension as to when the short state will end. In addition, with respect to the third effect mode, when a predetermined condition is cleared, for example, when a game per V is continuously executed a predetermined number of times (10 times), a selection operation by the player ( Alternatively, it can be forcibly changed to the third effect mode (other “battle mode” and “school mode” can also be selected). In addition, when the same conditions are cleared, “Battle Mode” is set to a production mode in which false remaining short times are displayed, and “Gakuen Mode” is a production mode in which accurate remaining short times are displayed. In other words, the range of production is widened, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment in the short-time state.

<6. 64. Shortening effect and number of time reductions in the case of big hit (number of time reductions 5 times): Fig. 64>
As can be seen from FIG. 38 (a), after the big hit game, the big hit type that shifts from the normal gaming state to the short-time state includes “big hit 1, 2, 5, 10 (95 times short-time)”, “big hit 7 (short-time number) 3) ”,“ 8 big hits (4 times of time reduction) ”,“ 9 big hits (5 times of time reduction) ”.

  Normally, if a player wins a jackpot, he or she will win the jackpot type (jacket with a shortening) that will be rewarded with 3, 4, 5, or 95 times Will not be notified. The reason for this is that if the player knows the number of time reductions in advance, it is considered to hinder the player's interest in the time reduction state. Based on this way of thinking, the time to notify whether the number of time reductions given is 3 times, 4 times, 5 times, or 95 times is actually entered into the time reduction state, and the predetermined time reduction times (3 times, (4 times, 5 times) is taken as the time when it is digested, that is, when it reaches the boundary number of times whether or not the time-short state further continues.

  For example, after the jackpot game is over, if the time-saving state continues without finishing even after the third time-shortening time is consumed, it is determined that the number of time-shortening times granted by the jackpot is 4 or more. If the time-saving state does not end when the fourth time is digested, it is determined that the number of time-savings given to the jackpot is 5 or more, and the time-saving state ends when the fifth time-shortening time is digested If not, it is determined that the number of time savings given to the jackpot is 95 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions is notified by this event.

  However, looking at this event from the player's standpoint, there is no denying that when the given number of short hours is exhausted, the short time state will end suddenly. The amount of discouragement of the player who expects the continuation of the short-time state increases as much as he feels when the short-time state ends suddenly. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to reduce the discouragement degree (abrupt feeling; disappointment) that is felt that the short-time state has ended suddenly, during the symbol variation display game related to the big hit, the short-time that will be given by the big hit won this time "Prediction production (short-time prediction production)" to show the number of times in advance. And in this predictive effect, the effect of encouraging you to earn and save more time as a point (point) in the production for the short time that has already been won by the big hit but is not known to the player To appear.

  FIG. 64 shows an example of a case where a big hit is “9 big hits (5 times in a short time)” among the big hit types “big hit 1 to 10” on the special figure 1 side shown in FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between "the production which strikes so as to acquire more time saving times (drilling effect)" performed during a display, and the "time reduction times" actually performed after a hit game. Since the small hit probability under the short-time state is 298/299, the small hit occurs every time the special symbol 2 performs one fluctuation display operation, that is, almost every time. In the conventional one-type type, the time saving was merely about “maintaining the current state of the holding ball”, but in the one-type two-type mixed type as in the present embodiment, the expectation level that is a big hit is affected. More specifically, in the related art, a period in which the current state of the holding ball can be maintained at most as described above, regardless of whether the number of time reductions is one type (for example, 100 times) or plural types (for example, 0 times, 50 times, 100 times). However, in the mixed type of 1 type and 2 types, the expectation that becomes a big hit is different even if the number of time reductions is different only once, so the player's interest is increased.

  In FIG. 64, time t1 indicates the time when “big hit 9” is won in the normal gaming state and the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is started. During the symbol variation display of this special figure 1, it continues from time t1 to time t2. From the time ta during the symbol variation display (t1 to t2) of the special figure 1, the prediction effect is generated as the reach effect and continues until the time t2.

  In FIG. 65 (A) “Normal gaming state” column of “Actual case of 9 big hits (5 times of shorts) and lost cases” and “Normal gaming state” column, (a) is the time when the above reach occurs (in FIG. 64). Time ta), and (b) to (g) show configuration examples of specific effect display (prediction effect) executed as a reach effect. In this example, the prediction effects are divided into first half effects (b) to (d) and second half effects (e) to (i).

  The first half effect is an effect (b) in which the ball given the numbers 3, 4, 5, 95 according to the number of times is grabbed by the crane (b), an effect (c) in which the grabbed ball is carried to the storage box by the crane, and the grabbed ball And the effect (d) that is released into the receiving box. In the production (b), the number spheres with the numbers “3”, “4”, “5”, “95” are arranged in the horizontal direction in this order, and the production buttons are repeatedly hit to make as many cranes as possible. The game content is moved to a place with a lot of numbers. In the effect (c), the game content is that the crane moves to the number “5” as a result of hitting the effect button repeatedly, and the crane moves to the receiving box while holding the number ball and lifting it. In the production (d), the crane that lifted the ball is made to stand by swinging in the upper part of the receiving box, and by pressing the production button, the crane performs a one-shot release operation. In the first half effects (b) to (d), it acts as a spear effect that prompts the player to hold a ball with as many times as possible and put it in the receiving box, that is, to accumulate the times.

  The latter half production includes productions (e) to (g) and (h) to (i). If the release operation is successful in the production (d), as shown in the production (e), the ball held by the crane falls into the receiving box and the prediction production becomes a successful challenge. Is displayed. Here, since the case of winning the “big hit 9 (number of times shortened 5 times)” is handled, as shown in the production (f), a message “get 5 times challenge” is displayed. Then, the symbol of the special symbol 1 stops at the symbol that specifies the jackpot 9 and, as shown in the effect (g), the combination “357” with the specified decorative symbol is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as a jackpot notification. In addition, if the one-shot release operation fails, as shown in production (h), the ball held by the crane falls outside the receiving box, the prediction production becomes a challenge failure, and an indication about the number of short times acquired. Instead, as shown in production (i), for example, “212” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen as a notification of loss.

In this way, a prediction effect is made to appear during the hit variation operation, and the player is informed in advance of the number of times that the privilege is given after the subsequent hit game. That is, a lottery means for drawing lots for a plurality of types of hits (special symbol management process of FIG. 11, FIG. 15), a display means (liquid crystal display device 36) capable of displaying an effect related to a game, and an effect on the display means Display control means for controlling display (effect control unit 24), winning game control means for executing and controlling a winning game according to the winning type (special electric accessory management process: S060 in FIG. 11, FIG. 19), After the winning game is finished, until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the privilege game control means capable of executing and controlling a privilege game more advantageous than the normal game (V winning setting process: S645 in FIG. 25, jackpot end process: FIG. 27, S593), and the plurality of types of hits are at least the first hit (any one of the big hits 7, 8, 9, 10 such as the big hit 9, FIG. 65A) and the second hit The first non-per jackpot: e.g. jackpot 7, FIG. 65B) and impregnated with,
The bonus game control means, when the winning type is the first winning (big hit 9), after the first winning game is executed, until the first predetermined condition (5 times shorter) is established as the predetermined condition. When the bonus game is executed and controlled and the hit type is the second hit (big hit 7), after the second hit game is executed, the bonus is given until the second predetermined condition (three times) is established as the predetermined condition. The execution control of the game is performed, and the display control means can display a specific effect (prediction effect) regardless of whether the winning type is the first winning type or the winning type is the second winning type. And
The specific effect display is composed of at least a first section ((b) to (d) in FIGS. 65A and 65B) and a second section ((e) to (i) in FIGS. 65A and 65B), The first section has the same or similar common display modes (first half effects (b) to (b) in both cases where the hit type is the first hit and the hit type is the second hit. d)), and the second section includes a first display mode (second half) including contents indicating the first predetermined condition (5 times shorter) when the hit type is the first hit (big hit 9). If the hit type is the second hit (7 big hits), the contents indicating the second predetermined condition (three times) are included in the productions (e) to (g) and (h) to (i)). It is configured to include the second display mode. In addition, the specific effect display is performed during the bonus game after the first winning game or the second winning game is executed (after the transition to the short time state in FIGS. 65A and 65B) or the first winning game or the It has a third section in which an effect display ((k), (l) in FIGS. 65A and 65B) that takes over the effect content before starting the second winning game is performed.

  Returning to FIG. 64, when the symbol variation display operation when winning “big hit 9” in the special figure 1 is finished (time t2), the big hit game is played (time t2 to t11), and then the gaming state from time t11. Is set to the short-time state.

  65A, “(A) Example of short-time hitting effect (in the case of 9 big hits (5 times short-time))”, “(j) Big hit game state” is a hit effect executed during the above big hit game. A configuration example is shown. In the case of 9 hits, since the opening time of the right big prize opening 50 is short in the first round (60 ms), many prize balls can be obtained in the second to sixth rounds (substantial number of rounds 5). In this case, a special effect of jackpot is executed. For example, an effect appears in which the main character screams enthusiasm for the number of challenges (5 times) obtained above. Here, with respect to the time of the big hit game (time t2 to t11), the actual round number is set to be small (for example, set to zero, 1R) so that the game ends in a short time (for example, about 25 to 40 seconds). It may be. The reason for this is that the production corresponding to the 5 times of the number of challenges obtained above will be delayed by the production during this jackpot game, by reducing the number of real rounds and terminating the jackpot game immediately, The direction of production can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 64, when the gaming state is set to the short time state from time t11, the symbol variation display in the special figure 2 is started. Here, the winning lottery probability of winning for the small winning for the special symbol 2 is 298/299, and winning for the small winning is performed for almost every symbol variation display operation. Therefore, from time t11 to t14, the symbol variation display in the special figure 2 is performed a total of five times, and a small hit occurs each time. In other words, a small hit occurs simultaneously with the end of the symbol variation display operation of the special figure 2, and the small hit game is played five times in total. If you win a V in any of these 5 small win games, you will be promoted to a big win and a game per V will be started. The gaming state is set to the normal gaming state.

  In FIG. 65A, in the column “Time-short state” of “A big hit 9 (5 times of time reductions) and production example in case of loss”, (k) is the time when the time-short state is entered (time t11 in FIG. 64). ), (L) shows a configuration example of an effect that is executed every time a small hit game is executed, and (m) to (o) are effects that are executed when a V prize is won during the small hit game. Configuration examples are shown, and (p) to (q) show configuration examples of effects executed when a V prize is not won in the fifth small hit game.

  When the time is set and the game progresses, a message is displayed to start a challenge game with the maximum number of times corresponding to the ball obtained during reach. Here, as shown in production (k), the message “Challenge game start remaining five times” is displayed. In the production (l), when the special symbol 2 is won in the small hit, the numbers “5”, “4”, “3”, “2”, “1” are obtained each time the small hit game is executed. It counts down and informs the player of the remaining number of times, and the content of the effect is to execute a different challenge game each time.

  The effects when winning V during the small hit game are composed of effects (m) to (o). In the production (m), in order to notify the player that the V prize has been won, the production content is such that the letter “V” is displayed largely on the screen. In the production (n), the production content (for example, production content for waving the Asahi flag) is used to express the joy of success in the challenge game. Then, the jackpot is promoted and the second and subsequent effects are executed (effect (o)).

  On the other hand, the effects when the V prize is not won during the five small hit games are composed of effects (p) to (q). In the production (p), in order to notify the player that the last challenge game has failed, the content of the production is displayed as “Loose” on the screen. In the effect (q), the time reduction state is ended, the game state is set to the normal game state, and the effect content is changed to the background image corresponding to the normal game state.

  Assuming that the productions (k) and (l) are not executed as described above and the player does not know that 3, 4, 5 or 95 times are given, Therefore, when the player reaches the short-time joint of these short times or the short-time number of the boundary, it is an important concern whether the player has exceeded these 3, 4, or 5 times. We hope that the number of times will be over 95 times. On the other hand, if the time-short state ends at the third, fourth, or fifth time, there is a sudden feeling that the time-short state has ended suddenly. In this example, since a case where a big hit (5 times of time reduction) is won is handled, this event is encountered at times t12, t13 and t14 in FIG.

  However, in the present embodiment, in the symbol variation display operation (time t1 to t2) before entering the time reduction state (time t11 to t14), a prediction effect is displayed, and the number of time reductions is given here. Whether or not a privilege is granted, the player is informed in advance of how many times the number of time savings is granted. For this reason, it is possible to reduce the degree of feeling (abrupt feeling; disappointment) when the short-time state ends suddenly. In addition, this predictive effect is an effect of encouraging the player to acquire a ball with a higher number (shorter number of times) for the shorter number of times that is not yet known to the player. A certain playability can be given.

  In the above example of production, the case where the number of time reductions is 5 big hits 9 has been described, but in the case of big hits 7, 8, 10 corresponding to other time reductions 3, 4, 95, the production is advanced in the same flow. be able to. Here, the case of the big hit 7 of the number of time reductions 3 times will be described.

  When the big hit 7 is won in the big hit lottery and the change of the special symbol 1 is started, the effect (a) is executed until the reach occurs (until time ta). This effect (a) may be the same or similar effect contents as in the case of the big hit 9 or may be different effect contents.

  Thereafter, a prediction effect is executed as a reach effect, but for this big hit 7, the number of time reductions is 3 times, which is different from the time reduction number of 5 times for the big hit 9, so this prediction effect (directions (b) to (effects) The structure of (f)) is divided into a common production with common production contents and a non-common production with different production contents, so the other big hit types (big hit 8, 10) have the same relationship. Each of the prediction effects is composed of a common effect and a non-common effect, and the effect time of the prediction effect is set to the same time regardless of the type of jackpot (7-10). Then, let the area where a common effect is performed be a 1st area, and let the area where a non-common effect is performed be a 2nd area.

  The common effect of the prediction effect corresponds to the effect (b) described above, and even in the case of a big hit 7 of 3 time reductions, These are arranged in the horizontal direction in this order, and the game content is such that the effect buttons are repeatedly hit to move the crane to as many digit balls as possible. As described above, the common effect of the prediction effect executed in the first section has the same or similar effect content regardless of the big hit type.

  The non-common effects of the prediction effects correspond to the effects (c) to (f) described above, and in the case of a big hit 7 of 3 time reductions, in the effect (c), as a result of repeatedly hitting the effect button, the number “3” The game content is that the crane moves to the reception box, holds the number ball and lifts it up to the receiving box. In the production (d), the crane that lifts the number ball of the number “3” is made to stand by swinging over the receiving box, and the “one-shot release operation” is performed. In the production (e), the number sphere of the number “3” held by the crane falls into the receiving box, and the prediction production is a successful challenge. In the production (f), a message “get 3 challenges” is displayed. As described above, in the non-common effect of the prediction effect performed in the second section, in the case of the big hit 7 of the number of time reductions, the production content corresponds to the time reduction of 3 times, and the big hit 9 of the time reduction number of 5 times The production contents are different from the case of. Therefore, in the case of the big hit 8 of the number of time reductions 4 times, the effect content corresponds to the time reduction number of 4 times, and in the case of the big hits 10 of the time reduction number of 95 times, the effect content corresponds to the time reduction number of 95 times. In this way, the non-common effects of the prediction effects executed in the second section have different contents of effects related to the jackpot type.

  Further, when the symbol of the special symbol 1 stops at the symbol specifying the big hit 7, as in the case of the big hit 9, the combination “357” in which the decorative symbol is specified on the liquid crystal screen as the big hit notification is provided as an effect (g). Is displayed. Therefore, the effect (g) may be the same or similar effect contents regardless of the type of jackpot, or may be different effect contents (in the case of 95 times of time reduction, it may be “777”).

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started, the hit effect with the same or similar effect contents as in the case of the big hit 9 is executed.

  Next, when the big hit game ends and the time is set to the short-time state, a message “Challenge game start remaining three times” is displayed to start a challenge game with the maximum number of times corresponding to the ball obtained during reach. In the production (l), every time a small hit game for the special symbol 2 is executed, the number “3”, “2”, “1” is counted down to notify the player of the remaining number of times. At the same time, the effect is to execute a different challenge game each time. Then, when winning V, the same effects (m) and (o) as in the case of 9 big hits are executed, and the same effects as in the case of 9 big wins even if V won during 3 small hit games ( p) and (q) are executed.

  Therefore, assuming that the time reduction state is the third section, the production contents in this third section inherit the production contents of the prediction production related to the number of time reductions executed during the reach, and the number of time reductions is a privilege when the time reduction state is set. It is the content of the effect that informs the player of how many times the remaining time has been reduced as the game progresses. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of feeling (abrupt feeling; disappointment) when the short-time state ends suddenly.

<7. Production scenario during hit game>
Next, a description will be given of the effects during the winning game that are performed when the big winning lottery of the special symbol 1 is won in the normal gaming state.

  In the case of Type 1 gaming machines, there is no “per V”, so even if there is no winning in the big prize opening, a winning game corresponding to the current winning game is executed, and an effect corresponding to that winning game (Directed during hit) appears. In other words, in the case of the first type gaming machine, the route to the V region (specific region 63) or the non-V region (non-specific region 62) (the moving path of the game ball in the game region 59) or V There is no need to change the winning game mode or the effect during the winning game depending on the presence or absence of a prize. It is only necessary to determine each of the above-mentioned productions in order according to the progress of the game, and it is not necessary to switch the production scenario in the middle of the game. Is a “time management scenario” where the production changes over time.

  On the other hand, in the case of the second type gaming machine, the winning game mode greatly changes depending on the presence or absence of the V prize. In detail, when a small win is won and a small win game occurs, the presence or absence of a prize at the right big prize opening 50 or the presence or absence of a V prize is determined by the V lottery game 60, so the small hit game starts. At the time, it is not certain whether "per V" will occur or whether it will end with a simple "small hit game". Also, as in the present embodiment, when there are a plurality of moving routes of game balls in the playing area 59, it may take a long or short time to determine whether or not there is a V prize according to each route. Therefore, in consideration of the route through which the game ball passes to become a V prize or a non-V prize, it is necessary to display an appropriate hit effect according to the presence or absence of the V prize. However, in the case of the second type gaming machine, if the “time management type scenario” described above is used, an appropriate performance corresponding to the change of the winning game mode cannot be displayed, and the progress of the winning game and the winning game Inconsistency with the medium performance will occur.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, as the win-winning effects, all the effect scenarios corresponding to each route to the hit type, V region, etc. (all passing routes) and the presence / absence of V winning are prepared in advance. From there, it is possible to extract a production scenario that takes into consideration the route through which a V prize or a V-losing takes place, so that an appropriate hit-challenge production can be displayed. Specifically, when the winning game is started, all the production scenario patterns that may appear are prepared and dealt with in a bundle, and then the game balls are passed by the sensors SW1 to SW4 of the passing route. When a scenario is detected, it is determined whether or not a scenario that does not apply is included from the previous scenario bundle. If a scenario that does not apply is included, the scenario is selected. It is excluded (excluded) from the candidate, and as a result, a scenario of a case that matches at the time of detection of the sensor remains. This is repeated to leave only a scenario corresponding to one case that matches even at a branch point (determination point) at the last sensor detection time (SW3 or SW4). The hit effect scenario (selection target scenario) to be selected is a “non-time management scenario” different from the “time management scenario” prepared in the first type gaming machine. This non-time management scenario is an effect scenario related to at least the V lottery section (until the presence of V winning in the case of a small hit game or until the 1R hit game in the case of a big hit game). Thereafter, even the mid-stage production (after the 2R) can be defined by this non-time management type scenario.

  FIG. 67 to FIG. 69A are schematic diagrams showing an effect scenario during a hit game constructed as a non-time management type scenario, and a flow of effects executed during the hit game according to the scenario. 67 to 68 show a case of a big hit game, and FIG. 69A shows a case of a small hit game. The “big hit game” described here is a big hit game (1R to 16R) based on the big hit win under the normal gaming state, and the “small hit game” is a small hit game based on the small hit win under the normal gaming state. In case of winning in the short time condition, it is omitted to avoid duplicate description. In addition, the effect in the case of overlapping consecutive large hits or small hits will be described later using another figure (FIGS. 62 and 63).

  In this embodiment, first, on the side of the effect control unit 24, when the hit game start is triggered (when a big hit start command or a small hit start command is received), as a hit effect scenario corresponding to the winning type won this time, All the production scenarios that have the possibility of appearing are selected and set. This hit-direction effect scenario passes through the presence / absence of winning in the right big prize opening 50 (SW1) and / or the guide paths in the play area 59 (in this embodiment, the guide paths 56, 56b, 56c, 56d). A game ball is detected by at least one sensor for detecting a game ball (sensors SW1 to SW4 in the case of the present embodiment), so that a joint of production types connected to the front and rear (nodes of production scenario) is generated. In other words, the effect types (section effect types) that should appear as the winning game progresses are sequentially arranged according to the detection results of the sensors SW1 to SW4 so that the effect types are switched. For example, when a big hit game with big hits 5 and 6 in FIG. 67 is started, a section until the SW1 sensor is turned on (section A: OP (t3) to ta, t5 in FIG. 67), from the SW1 sensor ON to the next. Section until SW2 or SW4 sensor is turned on (section B in FIG. 67: ta to tb, ta to td), section from SW2 sensor ON to next SW3 or SW4 sensor is turned on (section of FIG. 67) C: tb to tc, tb to td), a section from SW3 sensor ON to the end of the interval time between rounds (section D: tc to t7 in FIG. 67), SW1 sensor does not turn ON (right big prize opening 50 No interval is awarded), the interval until the interval time between rounds ends (interval E: t5 to te in FIG. 67), the interval time between rounds after the sensor ON of SW4 ends. 67 (intervals F, G: td to t7 in FIG. 67), game intervals from the end of the inter-round interval time (end of the 1R) to the 2R and subsequent games (intervals H1, H2, H3, etc. in FIG. 67: t7 to ED) The section effect type to be displayed in each section, such as a section-specific rendering mode, is provided. When the sensors SW1 to SW4 are turned on, from the main control unit 20 side, the “big prize opening prize command 2”, “V chance command”, “V prize command”, “discharge” corresponding to each of SW1 to SW4 The command "is transmitted, and the production control unit 24 side can recognize which sensor SW is turned on by receiving these commands.

(7-1. Production scenario during hit game: FIGS. 67 to 69A)
67 to 68 show the production scenario during the big hit game and the transition of the production type during the big hit game executed according to this production scenario. FIG. 69A shows the production scenario during the small hit game and this It shows the transition of the production type during the big hit game executed according to the production scenario.

(7-1-1. Production scenario during jackpot game: FIGS. 67 and 68)
First, with reference to FIG. 67 and FIG. 68, an effect scenario during a big hit game will be described. As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the effect scenario during the jackpot game has a relationship in which one effect scenario is determined for each jackpot type and each route in the V role. The expression “the relationship is fixed” is taken into account that the scenario is a non-time management scenario. In the example of FIG. 67, as the jackpot gaming effect scenario relating to the jackpots 5 and 6, a plurality of scenario patterns (hereinafter also simply referred to as “patterns”) 1 to 4 corresponding to each route are shown in the example of FIG. Patterns 5 to 8 are prepared as effect scenarios during the big hit game other than the big hits 5 and 6, and each of the patterns 1 to 8 includes at least one production type A to G, which are cascaded. They are included before and after in a connected manner, that is, in a form in which the order of appearance on the time axis is determined. However, regarding the production types A to G, the time point when the production type is switched from one production type to another production type is not determined in advance. This is because the production types A to G exist not as a time management type scenario but as components of a non-time management type scenario. These production types A to G are matched as the determination results based on whether or not the right big prize opening 50 is won and the detection timing of the sensors SW1 to SW4 is a scenario suitable for the progress of the game. This is an effect that will appear in the scenario (the same applies to the small hit game effect in FIGS. 69A and 69B).

  As the effects belonging to the effect types A to G, as shown in FIG. 71, one or a plurality of effects (specific effects) are prepared. In the case where a plurality of specific effects belonging to the effect type are provided, each effect is made to appear sequentially or in duplicate. In addition, there are cases where a plurality of types of specific effects are provided for the specific specific effects. For example, as shown in FIG. 71A, three types of effects A1 to A3 having different effects are provided for the “search enemy effect” of effect type A. In this case, one of a plurality of types of specific effects is selectively determined (details will be described later). In the case of this embodiment, the production types A to G have productions with different contents between the front and rear production types (for example, a narrative production having a story between the production types before and after). As described above, the content is different (the same applies to the effect types related to the small hit game effect in FIGS. 69A and 69B).

(Big hit game directing scenario pattern 1)
In FIG. 67, the production scenario included in the jackpot game of “Pattern 1” includes the “production type A” → “production type B” → “production type C” → “production type” from the start of the big hit game. D ”→“ Direction type H1 ”is a scenario that appears in cascade.

  “Direction type A” wins the right grand prize from the time (time t3) when the big hit game starts, that is, when the big hit lottery is won and the “start interval (OP)” of the production time width for the opening effect starts. The section until the time (time ta) when the sensor SW1 is turned on after winning a prize at the mouth 50 or the right big prize opening 50 is closed because the sensor SW1 is not turned on without winning the right big prize opening 50. An effect type that appears in a section up to the point of time (time t5) (hereinafter, both sections are collectively referred to as “section A”).

  “Direction type B” starts when the game ball enters the V chance route (SP route) and is detected by the sensor SW2 from the time when SW1 is turned on after winning the right big prize opening 50 (time ta) ( Section until time tb), or section until time point (time td) when the game ball is detected by the sensor SW4 after entering the through route (losing route) without entering the V chance route (hereinafter, both sections are combined) This is referred to as “section B”).

  The “effect type C” is detected by the sensor SW3 from the point in time (time tb) when the game ball entering the V chance route is detected by the sensor SW2 and entering the specific area 63 (V area). Section until time (time tc), or section until time (time td) until sensor SW4 detects that the player has not entered V in the non-specific area 62 (non-V prize area) (hereinafter both) Are represented as “section C”).

  “Production type D” is a section (time tc) from the time when the sensor SW3 detects that the game ball has entered the specific area 63 and won V (time tc) (time t7) Hereinafter, the production type that appears in “section D”) is shown. “Direction type H1” is an effect type for the winning game after the second round, which is performed at the lower prize opening 40 following this.

(Big hit game production scenario pattern 2)
The production pattern scenario of “Pattern 2” in the big hit game is cascaded as “Production type A” → “Production type B” → “Production type C” → “Production type G” → “Production type H2”. This is a scenario for a big hit game that is connected to the game and appears. The contents of “Production Type A” → “Production Type B” → “Production Type C” are the same as those already described.

  The “production type G” is a section from the time point (time td) when the sensor SW4 detects that the player has not entered V in the non-specific area 62 to the time point (time t7) when the one-round end interval ends (time t7). Hereinafter, the production type that appears in “section G”) is shown. “Direction type H2” is an effect type that appears in correspondence with the winning game in the second round and subsequent rounds performed at the Shimodai winning opening 40 following the production type G. In the case of a big win, even if the V prize is not won, when the interval between rounds ends (time t7), a round game (2R to 16R) in which the lower major winning opening 40 is opened is executed (time t7). ~ Time ED). The same applies to patterns 3, 4, and 6 to 8 described later.

(Big hit game directing scenario pattern 3)
The “Pattern 3” jackpot game directing scenario is a directing scenario when the game ball passes through the through route without going to the V chance route, although it is won in the right big prize opening 50. This is an effect scenario during a big hit game in which the seeds are cascaded in the order of “production type A” → “production type B” → “production type F” → “production type H3”. “Production type A” → “Production type B” is the same as already described.

  “Production type F” is from the time (time td) when the sensor SW4 detects that the game ball has not entered the non-specific area 62 and won a V prize to the time (time t7) when the one-round end interval ends. The effect type that appears in the section (hereinafter referred to as “section F”). This section F is the same as the section G in that it covers the period from time td to t7. However, since the rank of cascade connection is different, the production type F of the section F is different from the production type G of the section G. The contents are different. “Direction type H3” is an effect type that appears in correspondence with the winning game after the second round performed at the Shimodai prize opening 40 following the effect type F.

(Big hit game production scenario pattern 4)
The “Pattern 4” jackpot game production scenario is a production scenario in the case where the right big prize opening 50 is not won, and the production type included in this is “production type A” → “production type E” → “production This is a scenario for directing during a big hit game that is connected in a cascade with “Species H3”. “Direction type A” is the same as already described.

  “Direction type E” is the time when the right round winning opening 50 is closed because the right SW winning opening 50 is not closed and the sensor SW1 is not turned on (time t5). It represents the type of effect that appears in the section up to (time te) (hereinafter referred to as “section E”). “Production type H3” is a production type for the winning game after the second round performed after production type E. In the example of FIG. 67, the production type that produces the same production as pattern 3 appears. It has become. In the case of a big win, even if the right big prize opening 50 is closed without winning, when the interval between rounds after one round is ended (time te), the round game in which the lower big prize opening 40 is opened (time te) 2R to 16R) are executed (time te to time ED).

(Big hit game production scenario pattern 5)
The “Pattern 5” jackpot game directing scenario is “Direction type A” → “Direction type B” → “Direction type C” → “Direction type H4” cascaded and appearing in a big hit game. This is a production scenario, and the contents of “production type A” → “production type B” → “production type C” are the same as those already described. However, in the case of this pattern 5, the “production type D” that appears at the time of the V winning of the pattern 1 is a production scenario excluding this due to the production time (see the remarks column in FIG. 68). “Production type H4” is a production type for the second and subsequent rounds of games that are performed after production type C, and the specific production (Enemy ship hit production) belonging to “Production type D” of pattern 1 Included in species H4.

(Big hit game production scenario pattern 6)
The “Pattern 6” jackpot game production scenario appears with the production types included in this series as “production type A” → “production type B” → “production type C” → “production type H5” cascaded. The effect scenario during the big hit game is as described above, and the contents of “Production Type A” → “Production Type B” → “Production Type C” are the same as those already described. However, in the case of this pattern 6, the “production type G” that appears at the time of the V winning of the pattern 2 is a production scenario excluding this because of the production time. “Direction type H5” is an effect type for the winning game after the second round performed after effect type C, and the specific effect belonging to “Direction type G” of pattern 2 (own ship shot effect) is this effect. Included in species H5.

(Big hit game directing scenario pattern 7)
The “Pattern 7” jackpot game effect scenario is a jackpot game in which the effect types included in this are displayed in cascade from “Direction Type A” → “Direction Type B” → “Direction Type H6”. This is a medium production scenario, and the contents of “production type A” → “production type B” are the same as those already described. However, in the case of this pattern 7, the “effect type F” that appears at the time of the non-V winning of the pattern 3 is an effect scenario excluding this because of the effect time. “Direction type H6” is an effect type for the winning game after the second round performed after the effect type B, and the specific effect (enemy ship finding effect) belonging to “Direction type F” of pattern 3 is this effect type. Included in H5.

(Big success game scenario scenario 8)
The “Pattern 8” jackpot gaming effect scenario is a jackpot gaming effect scenario in which the effect types included in this are displayed in cascade from “Direction Type A” → “Direction Type H6”. The contents of “Production type A” are the same as those already described. However, in the case of this pattern 8, it is an effect scenario excluding “effect type E” that appears at the time of non-V winning of the pattern 4. In the case of the pattern 8 of this example, the “production type H6” is the “production type H6” described in the pattern 7.

(7-1-2. Production scenario during small hit game: Fig. 69A)
Next, with reference to FIG. 69A, an effect scenario during the small hit game will be described. In the example of FIG. 69A, a plurality of patterns 9 to 12 corresponding to each route are prepared as a small hit game effect scenario, and each of the patterns 9 to 12 includes a plurality of effect types AD and effect types. At least one of X to Z is included in a form in which they are connected in cascade. Among these effect types, the effect types A to D are the same as those included in the patterns 1 to 9 of the jackpot gaming effect scenario (FIGS. 67 and 68).

(Small hit game production scenario pattern 9)
In FIG. 69A, the effect scenario included in the small hit game of “Pattern 9” includes “effect type A” → “effect type B” → “effect type C” → “effect from the start of the big hit game. This is a small-hit gaming effect scenario in which the effect type of “effect type H1” appears when the lower large prize opening 40 is opened. This “pattern 9” is the same as pattern 1 of the effect scenario during the big hit game. Therefore, the winning game is concealed for production until at least V is won. In the case of this embodiment, when winning a V, when the big hit, the enemy ship hit effect of the production type D of pattern 1 of FIG. 67, and when the big hit, the enemy ship of the production type D of the production type D of pattern 9 of FIG. 69A Appears. However, the production type D in the case of a big hit and the production type D in the case of a small hit are the same in that the enemy ship hit production appears, but in this embodiment, two types of enemy ship hit production are prepared, In the case of a big hit, “Long version enemy ship hit effect (time tc to t7 (62.5 s): refer to FIG. 66A)” to notify that it is a big hit. “Short version of enemy ship hit stage time tc to ti (21 s): see FIG. 66A”.

(Small hit game production scenario pattern 10)
The production scenario included in the small pattern game of “Pattern 10” appears in a manner that the production types included in this are cascaded as “production type A” → “production type B” → “production type C” → “production type Z”. This is a small-game game direction scenario that is designed to be played. The contents of “Production Type A” → “Production Type B” → “Production Type C” are the same as those already described.

  The “effect type Z” is from the time point (time td) when the sensor SW4 detects that the player has not entered the non-specific area 62 and won the V prize to the time point (time th) when the ending time of the small hit game ends. An effect type appearing in a section (hereinafter referred to as “section Z”) is represented, and “effect type Z” is a constituent element of a scenario (partial scenario) corresponding to the section Z. “Pattern 10” has the same configuration as pattern 2 of the big hit game effect scenario, but since it is a scenario corresponding to a case where the V prize was not won during the small hit game, the effect type for the second round game Does not exist. This is different from pattern 2 (FIG. 67) of the big hit game effect scenario.

(Small hit game production scenario pattern 11)
The small-play game scenario of “Pattern 11” is a small effect in which the production type included in this is cascaded as “Production type A” → “Production type B” → “Production type Y”. This is a direct play scenario. The contents of “Production type A” → “Production type B” are the same as those already described.

  “Production type Y” is the time when the ending time of the small hit game ends (time th) from the time (time td) when the sensor SW4 detects that the game ball has not entered the non-specific area 62 and won V prize. ) Represents an effect type appearing in a section (hereinafter referred to as “section Y”), and “effect type Y” is a constituent element of a scenario (partial scenario) corresponding to the section Y. This section Y is the same as the section Z in that the period from the time td to th is the target, but since the rank of cascade connection is different, the performance type Y of the section Y is different from the performance type Z of the section Z. The contents are different. This “Pattern 11” has the same configuration as Pattern 3 of the big hit game effect scenario, but since it is a scenario corresponding to the case where the V prize was not won during the small hit game, the effect on the 2R round game There are no seeds. This is different from the pattern 3 (FIG. 67) of the big hit game effect scenario.

(Small hit game production scenario pattern 12)
The effect scenario during the small hit game of “Pattern 12” is an effect scenario during the small hit game in which the effect types included in this are connected in a cascade from “effect type A” → “effect type X”. is there. “Direction type A” is the same as already described. “Direction type X” is the end of the small hit game ending time from the time when the right big prize opening 50 is closed because the sensor SW1 is not turned on because the right big prize place 50 is not won (time t5). Represents an effect type appearing in a section (hereinafter referred to as “section X”) up to the time (time tf) to be performed, and “effect type X” is a component of a scenario (partial scenario) corresponding to the section X It has become. “Pattern 12” has the same configuration as Pattern 4 of the big hit game effect scenario, but is a scenario corresponding to a case where the V prize was not won during the small hit game, so the effect type for the second round game Does not exist. This is different from the pattern 4 (FIG. 67) of the big hit game effect scenario.

(7-3. Determination of production scenario during hit game)
As described above, scenario patterns 1 to 12 related to the big hit game effect scenario and the small hit game effect scenario are connected to the behavior of the game ball in the play area 59 by connecting one or more of each effect type in cascade connection. One production scenario corresponding to the progress of the accompanying game is constructed. That is, the patterns 1 to 12 are determined in the order in which the production types A to G and X to Z appear, but the switching timing of the production types is related to the time when the sensor SW is turned on. It is not determined from. In the case of this embodiment, events such as the presence or absence of winning in the right big prize opening 50 during the winning game, whether or not the V chance (SP) route or the lost route is passed, and the presence or absence of the V winning are generated. In response to being grasped by the sensor SW, the time point at which the effect type is switched becomes clear, and the effect type to be displayed is determined. At this time, the non-conforming scenario pattern having the production type that should not appear as the next production type is excluded, and only the suitable scenario pattern is left. By repeating this, a production story in which a production type appears (for example, a narrative-style production having relevance (story characteristics, etc.) between productions proceeds step by step, and finally appears. A direct hit scenario is determined as one (direct scenario progress type of hit scenario). In this way, at the time when the winning game is started, what scenario pattern is made to appear is not determined, and the hit effect scenario that should appear according to the behavior of the game ball after the winning game starts (at least The winning production scenario until the presence or absence of the V prize is determined is determined to be one.

(7-3-1. About scenario branching)
67 to 69A are connection portions where one or more of the production types A to G are connected in cascade when viewed with respect to one scenario pattern. In addition, a to c, when viewed from the mutual relationship between the patterns 1 to 12, leave a scenario that matches the performance progress among the patterns 1 to 12, and remove (reject) the scenario patterns that do not match. It is also a judgment point. In the case of the present embodiment, there are three determination points a to c. This determination point will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 67, a case where “Pattern 1” is finally selected and remains as an example of a hit-and-play effect scenario during a big hit game will be described as an example. At the time when the big hit game is started, all of the scenario patterns 1 to 4 are temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM as “selected scenario”, and an effect belonging to “effect type A” common to these is executed. The Thereafter, the determination point a is reached. This determination location a is a location where it is determined whether or not the right big prize opening 50 has been won, that is, whether the sensor SW1 has been turned on. When the sensor SW1 is ON (wins in the right big prize opening 50), “scenario patterns 1, 2, and 3” that match this are left, and “scenario pattern 4” in the case where the right big prize place 50 is not won. "Is removed from the stored data of the currently selected scenario as incompatible. Therefore, “scenario patterns 1 to 3” are stored and held as the currently selected scenario, and an effect belonging to “effect type B” is executed. Thereafter, the determination point b is reached.

  The determination location b is a location where it is determined whether the sensor SW2 is turned on after passing through the V chance route, or whether the sensor SW4 is turned on after passing through the through route. When the sensor SW2 is ON (passes through the V chance route), “scenario patterns 1 and 2” that match this are left, and “scenario pattern 3” in the case where the right big prize opening 50 is not won is incompatible. As a result, it is removed from the stored data of the currently selected scenario. Therefore, “scenario patterns 1 and 2” are stored and held as the currently selected scenario, and an effect belonging to “effect type C” is executed. Thereafter, the determination point c is reached.

  The determination location c is a location where it is determined whether the sensor SW3 is turned on after winning the V prize or whether the sensor SW4 is turned on without winning the V prize. When the sensor SW3 is turned on (V winning), “scenario pattern 1” that matches this is left, and “scenario pattern 2” of the case that did not win V is considered to be incompatible, and the stored data of the currently selected scenario Removed from. Therefore, “scenario pattern 1” is stored and held as the currently selected scenario, and an effect belonging to “effect type D” is executed. Thereafter, the lower prize winning opening is opened and “production type H1” is executed.

  The same applies to the other scenario patterns 2-12. The effective winning period (sensor SW1 detection effective period) for winning at the right big winning opening 50, and the time points a to c at which the sensors SW1 to SW4 detect the game balls are used as the milestones for changing the effect type. Judgment is made on whether or not the scenario is suitable, and scenario patterns including effects that are inappropriate to appear at the judgment points a and b are excluded, and a winning game is selected from a plurality of patterns. Only the scenario pattern that includes the performance that should appear as it progresses remains. When the decision point c is passed, only an appropriate scenario pattern that finally matches is left, and this is determined as a hitting effect scenario for the current hit game.

<8. Production during hit games>
Next, description will be given of the hit effect (effect scenario) that appears according to the scenario pattern. Here, an example will be described in which a “fleet battle effect (battle effect)” simulating a fleet battle in which the own ship (hero character) and an enemy ship (enemy character) develop a sea battle is described.

(8-1. Effects included in effect types A to G and X to Z: FIGS. 67 to 71)
Next, with reference to FIG. 67 to FIG. 71, the contents of the effects (specific effects) included in the effect types A to G and X to Z will be briefly described. This will be described later in “Examples”.

(8-1-1. About production types A to D)
In the present embodiment, two types of “game method notification effect” and “search enemy effect” are prepared as “effect type A”. Among these, the “game method notification effect” is the effect that appears first in the section A of the big hit game or the small hit game, and the “search enemy effect” appears next to or overlaps with the “game method notification effect”. It is a production to be done. There are three types of “searching enemy directing”, “directing A1 (own ship is a battleship)”, “directing A2 (own ship is a cruiser)”, and “directing A3 (own ship is a destroyer)”. Thus, any one of these is selected and displayed. The selection ratio is as shown in “Production type A lottery table” in FIG.

  In addition, “Electric Probing Capture Effect” is prepared as “Production Type B”, and “Production B1 (captured ship shadow is a short distance)” and “Production B2 (captured ship shadow is a medium distance)” , There are three types of “production B3 (captured ship shadow is a long distance)”, and one of these is selected and displayed by lottery. The selection ratio is as shown in “Production type B lottery table” in FIG.

  Also, “Confrontation production” is prepared as “Production type C”, and “Production C1 (Enemy ship is destroyer)”, “Production C2 (Enemy ship is cruiser)”, “Production C3 (Enemy ship is There are four types, “Battleship)” and “Direction C4 (the enemy ship is an aircraft carrier (aircraft carrier))”, and one of these is selected and displayed by lottery. The selection ratio is as shown in the “effect C lottery table” in FIG.

  Also, “Enemy ship hit direction” is prepared as “Direction type D”. This “enemy ship hit effect” is definitely displayed as an effect of “effect type D” in the section D after winning the V prize (after the game ball has passed the specific area 63) without depending on lottery.

(8-1-2. Production Type E, Production Type F, Production Type X, Production Type Y)
Next, “Direction type E” and “Direction type F” related to the hit effect scenario of the big hit game and “Direction type X” and “Direction type Y” related to the hit effect scenario of the small hit game will be described. .

  There are three types of “Direction Type E” and “Direction Type F” related to the jackpot game: “Enemy Shadow Disappearance Effect”, “Pseudo End Effect”, and “Enemy Ship Discovery Effect”. It is a production that appears one after another. However, as the “effect type X” and “effect type Y” related to the small hit game, only the “end effect” is used in addition to the “enemy shadow disappearing effect” (see FIG. 69A).

  In the present embodiment, the “pseudo end effect” related to the big hit game and the “end effect” related to the small hit game are the same or similar effect modes (the same applies to the effect types G and Z described later). E can be dressed like a production type X, and the production type F can be dressed like a production type Y. In other words, the “Enemy Shadow Disappearance Effect” and the “Pseudo End Effect” of “Direction Type E” and “Direction Type F” are non-V prizes (losing) by the V character lottery 60 as a hit effect of a fake small hit game. ) It acts as an effect that makes it look like it is. In the case of “effect type X” and “effect type Y” related to the small hit game, if it is a non-V prize, the “end effect” ends and the small hit game (winning effect) ends ( (See FIG. 69A). However, in the case of “production type E” and “production type F” related to the big hit game, “enemy ship discovery production (resurrection production)” is provided after the “pseudo end production” as a rebirth production to notify that it is a big hit. It has been announced that it has been a big hit. This revival effect is to notify information indicating that it is beneficial to the player. In addition to the enemy ship discovery effect, there is a lightning striker appearance effect to be described later.

  In this way, the “effect type E” and the “effect type F” can conceal the hit game type until at least the presence or absence of the V prize is determined, and in the case of a big hit game, a fake small hit game can be created. As a result, it is possible to give the player a pleasure of guessing what the current winning game is. On the other hand, from the point of view of the small hit game, it is possible to conceal the hit game type until the presence or absence of the V prize is determined based on the production contents of the production types X, Y, and Z, thereby creating a fake big hit game.

  In the “enemy ship discovery effect”, as the effects belonging to this, in the case of “effect type E” and “effect type X”, “effect E1 (enemy ship is destroyer)”, “effect E2 (enemy ship is cruiser)” , "Direction E3 (Enemy ship is battleship)", "Direction type F" and "Direction type Y" are also "Direction F1 (Enemy ship is a destroyer)" and "Direction F2 (Enemy ship is a cruiser)" ”And“ Rendering F3 (Enemy ship is a battleship) ”, and one of these is selected and displayed by lottery. The selection ratio is as shown in “Production type E lottery table” in FIG. 71 (d) and “Production type F lottery table” in FIG.

(8-1-3. Production type G and production type Z)
Next, “Direction type G” related to the hit-directed effect scenario of the big hit game and “Direction type Z” of the hit-directed effect scenario of the small hit game will be described.

  There are three types of “production type G” related to the big hit game: “own ship impact production”, “pseudo end production”, and “lightning striker appearance production”. In the same way as the above-mentioned production type E and production type F, these are the effects that appear one after another in the section G in which it is a big hit game and disguised as if it was a non-V prize (losing) by the V character lottery 60. It has become. This “Self-bombed effect” and “Pseudo end effect” work as an effect that looks like a non-V winning (losing) by the V character lottery 60, and the “Thunderfighter appearance effect” is a big hit. Work as a “revival director”. As the “effect type Z” related to the small hit game, only the “end effect” is used in addition to the “effect type disappearance effect” of the “effect type G” (see FIG. 69A). In this way, the production contents of the production type G, like the production types E and F, serve as productions that conceal the winning game and create a fake small hit game.

  Thus, the “pseudo end effect” of the production types E, F and G that can appear in the case of big hits 5 and 6 is the same as the “end production” of the production type Z that can appear in the small hits 5 and 6 The production types E, F, and G are pretending to be a non-V prize (losing) due to the V character lottery 60, and they are in a small hit game with small hits 5 and 6. It is a production that looks like.

(8-1-4. Production types H1 to H6)
Next, the production types H1 to H6 will be described. “Production types H1 to H6” are productions appearing in the second and subsequent rounds, and “settlement production” is prepared here. The “settlement effect” is an effect developed according to a time management scenario as an effect belonging to the effect types H1 to H6. (See FIGS. 67 to 69A).

  As shown in the column of the production types H1 to H6 in FIG. 70, the “settlement effect” includes a settlement effect (W) including an enemy ship sinking effect, a settlement effect (L) including an enemy ship survival effect, an enemy ship sinking effect, and a new A plurality of types of settlement effects such as a settlement effect (N) including an enemy ship discovery effect are provided. Of these, the finalizing effect according to the hit type is selected as to which finalizing effect appears. In other words, according to “whether or not there is a hit type that is shifted (set) to the short-time state” and / or “the number of short-time times given”, the finalizing effects having different effects are selected. .

  For example, in the case of the production type H1, if the big hit is 5, the small hit is 1, 2, 5 (95 times each time is given), the content of the final production is “enemy ship sunk production (W)” and the big hit 6 If the small hit is 3, 4, or 6 (the number of time reductions is 0 (no time reduction)), it is “enemy ship survival effect (L)” (see the column of effect type H1 in FIG. 70). Further, for example, in the case of the production type H4, if the jackpot is 1 to 2 (provided the number of time reductions is 95 times), the content of the finalization effect is “Enemy Ship Sinking Production (W)”, and the jackpot is 3 to 4 (times If it is 0 times (no time reduction), it is “Enemy Ship Survival Production (L)”, and if it is 7 to 10 (number of times 3, 4, 5, 95 times), “Enemy Ship Sinking Production and New Enemy Ship Appearance Production” (Refer to the column of the production type H4 in Fig. 70.) For the production types H2, H3, H5, and H6, the settlement production corresponding to the hit type is selected in the same manner. "Direction" is, for example, an effect that expresses that the enemy ship is alive, but the enemy ship is attacked, but the enemy ship is still alive. About sunk enemy ships, but then new enemy ships It has become a production content that expresses the way that appeared.

  In addition, in the column of the production types H4 to H6 in FIG. 70, other productions belonging to the production types D to F (the enemy ship hit production production, the own ship impact production, or the enemy ship discovery production) are also shown together with the settlement production. However, this is because the big hit types (except for big hits 5 and 6) in which the production types H4 to H6 appear are hit types with a very short interval time between rounds (see FIGS. 47 and 68). The production of the seeds D to F is made to appear in the hit production after the second round. In the production types H4 to H6, after one of “Enemy ship hit production, own ship hit production, enemy ship discovery production” corresponding to the hit type appears, one of “Decision production W, L, N” appears It is an effect developed according to a time management type scenario.

<9. Specific example: Big hit 5>
Specifically, the win-winning effect executed during the big hit game will be described by taking the case where the big hit 5 is won as an example. When winning the big hit 5, out of the entire “winning game effect scenario”, the “winning game effect scenario patterns 1 to 4” prepared for the “big hit 5” Become. At this time, when there are a plurality of specific effects belonging to the effect type, the specific effects are determined by each lottery table shown in FIG. 71, and a scenario pattern including the specific effects is set as an initial selection target scenario. . For example, if pattern 1 is taken as an example, since it is production types A, B, C, D, and H1 that make up the production scenario of pattern 1, among these production types A, B, and C, production type A is A1. When the ship type of the ship is battleship, the production type B is B1 (short distance), and the production type C is C1 (the enemy ship type is a destroyer), the production types A1, B1, C1, D, H1 Is set as an initial selection target scenario related to pattern 1 (the same applies to other patterns). In this embodiment, the timing for selecting the “during-playing effect scenario” is set to the time when the winning game is started (trigger). Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives a big hit start command or a small hit start command, the selection target scenario corresponding to the current hit type is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined timing from when the big hit lottery is executed to when the big hit game is started, for example, when the symbol variation display game starts (when a variation pattern designation command is received), the symbol variation display game ends. Time (when a variable stop command is received). In addition, when the symbol variation display game is started, an effect scenario including an effect during the symbol variation display game and a hit effect corresponding to the current hit type is selected, and the timing of starting each effect is reached. Based on the above, various effects can appear. In addition, the specific effect lottery may be configured to be selected by lottery when it is determined that the scenario patterns 1 to 3 are left at the determination points a to c.

  The big hit game with the big hit 5 is performed through the following processes (I) to (V) with respect to opening and closing of the big prize opening. (I) Opening for 21 seconds (opening interval (OP)), (II) Opening the right big prize opening 50 for a long time (1.6 seconds) as the first round game, (III) Ejecting all game balls Interval (INT) for a long time (62.5 seconds) later, (IV) As a round game of the 2nd to 6th rounds, the lower prize opening 40 is opened for a long time (28.5 seconds), and 7-16 As a round game of the round, the lower prize opening 40 is opened for a short time, and (V) 1.42 seconds of ending (end interval). In the following, the effects executed in the process from “opening” to “ending” in this jackpot game will be described in time series with reference to FIG. 67, FIG. 70, and FIG.

(9-1. Scenario pattern 1)
First, the transition of the effect type when pattern 1 is executed will be described. When the pattern 1 is executed, the production mainly includes a portion that follows a non-time management scenario, and additionally includes a portion that follows a time management scenario. The part that follows this non-time management scenario is the transition of the production type. In the case of pattern 1, sections A to H1 are formed by sequentially turning on sensors SW1, SW2, and SW3, and production types A, B, C, D, and H1 are arranged for each section. That is, the production types A, B, C, D, and H1 are sequentially switched based on the response of each sensor SW and the passage of a predetermined time.

(9-1-1. Production of production type A appearing in section A)
When the big hit game corresponding to the big hit 5 is started, the “effect type A” is started together with the start of the opening interval (OP) (time t3 in FIG. 67). There are two types of effects of the effect type A in the section A, “game method notification effect” and “search enemy effect”, which appear in this order.

  That is, in the production type A, first, in the opening time after the start of the big hit game (time t3 to t4 in FIG. 66A), a “game method notification effect” for informing the manner of the game during the win game is executed. In this example, the case where the big hit 5 is won in the normal gaming state is handled, so the gaming method notification effect here is that the gaming method has changed from left-handed to right-handed, and right-handed to the right This is an effect of notifying the player that the big winning opening 50 will be awarded.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the opening time (time t3 in FIG. 67) (for example, time t4 in FIG. 66A: right big opening opening time), the own ship (hero character) destroys the enemy ship (enemy character) First of all, a “searching effect” is performed that expresses the content of searching for enemy ships using radio wave exploration.

  For the “search enemy effect”, three types of effects A1 to A3 with different effects are prepared. These productions A1 to A3 show the ship types that appear through the fleet battle production (battle production) during the big hit game, production A1 is “battleship”, production A2 is “cruiser”, It is a “destroyer”. These ship types represent the degree of expectation that will be set to the short-time state after the jackpot game is over (hereinafter referred to as the "short-time transition expectation degree"). This indicates that the degree of expectation is the highest. If it is a “cruiser,” the expectation is medium. If it is a “destroyer,” the expectation is the lowest. A lottery for selecting one of these three ship types is performed using the production type A lottery table shown in FIG. 70 (a), and is selected for each ship type set in advance based on the hit type. Determined based on selectivity.

(Direction type A lottery table: FIG. 70 (a))
In this example, since the case of “big hit 5” as the current hit type is handled, the “big hit 5” column in FIG. In the case of a big hit 5, the probability that the production A1 (your ship is a battleship) is selected is 60%, the probability that the production A2 (your ship is a cruiser) is selected, and the production A3 (your ship is a destroyer) is selected. Is 15%, and it is easy to select “Direction A1 (own ship is a battleship)” with the highest expected transition time. On the other hand, for example, when the big hit type is “big hit 6”, the game shifts to the “normal game state” after the big hit game ends, so the probability that the production A1 (the ship is a battleship) is 15% and the production A2 The production A3 (destroyer) with the lowest time-shift expectation is selected, such as the probability that the ship (cruiser) is selected is 25% and the probability that the production A3 (destroyer is destroyer) is 60%. It is easy. In addition, with regard to “big hit 7-9 (specific jackpot type that triggers the transition to the short-time state)” other than the jackpot type that gives the maximum of 95 times, the larger the jackpot type that has a shorter number of times The cruiser's selection rate is set to be high. In the case of the present embodiment, the big hit 7 for giving the number of times 3 is 50%, the big hit 8 for the number of times 4 is 60%, and the big hit 9 of the number 5 times is 70%.

(9-1-2. Production of production type B appearing in section B)
When the opening time ends, the right big prize opening 50 is opened (time t4 in FIG. 66A). When the sensor SW1 is turned on while the right big prize opening 50 is open (time ta in FIG. 67), the “production type A” is finished, and it is determined whether or not there is a prize at the right big prize opening 50 at the determination point a. Is made. Here, the non-conforming scenario pattern 4 is eliminated, and patterns 1 to 3 are left. In other words, when the sensor SW1 is turned on during the “searching effect” of the effect type A, the progress condition of the effect scenario is established, the “searching effect” of the “effect type A” ends, and the patterns 1 to 3 “Electric probe capture effect” of “effect type B” which is a common effect type is executed. The production type B “electric probe capture production” is the production content related to the content of the production type A (search enemy production), and the production content between the production type A and the production type B is mutually. It has a story-like production with relevance.

(Direction type B electric probe capture effect)
For the production type B “Electron probe capture production”, three types of productions of production B1 to production B3 are prepared. These effects B1 to B3 are effects that differ from each other in the distance to the enemy shadow captured by the radio wave probe. There are three types of enemy shadow distances displayed by the radio wave expedition, short distance, medium distance, and long distance, suggesting the size of the target shadow inversely proportional to the distance. Large and small correspond to the expected transition time. Specifically, if the distance to the enemy shadow is “short distance”, the enemy ship is likely to be a destroyer with low combat ability (the possibility of victory of its own ship is high) and the short-term transition expectation is the highest. If it is “middle distance”, the enemy ship is likely to be a cruiser with a fighting ability, and its expectation is moderate. If it is “far,” the enemy ship is a battle ship with a high fighting ability. The possibility is high (the possibility of victory of the ship is low), and the expectation is the lowest. The lottery for selecting one of these three types of distances is performed using the production type B lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. 71, and a selection ratio for each distance set in advance based on the hit type. It is executed based on.

(Production type B lottery table: FIG. 71 (b))
Since the big hit type of this time is big hit 5, the "big hit 5" column in FIG. In the case of the big hit 5, the probability that the production B1 (short distance) is selected is 55%, the probability that the production B2 (medium distance) is selected is 25%, and the probability that the production B3 (long distance) is selected is 20%. It is easy to select the production B1 (short distance) having the highest degree of time-shift expectation. On the other hand, for example, when the big hit type is “big hit 6”, the game shifts to the “normal game state” after the big hit game ends, so the probability that the production B1 (short distance) is selected is 25%, and the production B2 ( It is easy to select the production B3 (far-distance) with the lowest time-shift expectation, such as 25% for the medium distance) and 50% for the production B3 (far-distance). . The jackpots 7 to 9 are set so that the selection rate of the cruiser becomes higher for the jackpot type having a greater number of time reductions, as in the case of the “searching effect” in FIG.

(9-1-3. Production of production type C appearing in section C)
When the sensor SW2 is turned ON during the “electric probe capturing effect” of the effect type B (time tb), it is determined that the V chance route has passed, and the “electro probe capturing effect” of the effect type B ends, and at the determination point b. In this determination, only the patterns 1 and 2 out of the scenario patterns 1 to 3 are executed, and the “facing effect” of the “effect type C” of the patterns 1 and 2 is executed as the next effect. . On the other hand, when SW4 is turned on during “Electron probe capture effect” (time td), it is determined that the through route has passed, and “Electron probe capture effect” of effect type B ends, and in the determination at determination point b, A process of leaving only pattern 3 among scenario patterns 1 to 3 is executed, and an “enemy shadow disappearing effect” of “effect type F” described later is executed.

  In the “Electricity capture effect” of this embodiment, an enemy shadow is found, and an effect of whether or not a fleet of the enemy shadow appears is executed. In the subsequent “effect type C” or “effect type F”, An effect on the result is executed. That is, the production type C or the production type F is the production content related to the content of the production type B (electron probe capture production). Therefore, between the production type B and the production type C or the production type F, the production contents are productions that are mutually related. Production type A → Production type B → Production type C or Production type A series of scenarios up to F is a story scenario with a story.

(Direction production of production type C)
When the sensor SW2 is turned on during the “electron capturing effect” of the effect type B, it is determined that the V chance route has passed, and the “facing effect” of the “effect type C” is executed. In the “confrontation production” of the production type C, the enemy shadow captured by the electric probe capture production of the production type B appears and confronts the ship, and a naval battle between the ship and the enemy ship is unfolded.

  Four types of production C1 to production C4 are prepared for the “confrontation production” of the above production type C, and these production C1 to production C4 are different from the content of the production in which the ship types (ship types) of enemy ships are different from each other. It has become. In other words, there are four types of enemy ships, “Battleship”, “Cruiser”, “Destroyer”, and “Aircraft Carrier”, and each ship type corresponds to the expected transition time. If the enemy ship type is a “destroyer”, it indicates that the expected transition time is high. If it is a “cruiser,” the expectation is medium. If it is a “battleship,” the expectation is the highest. It is low. Also, if the enemy ship type is “aircraft carrier”, it is a premium character that indicates 100% time-shift expectation, that is, “time-shortness certainty” in which the time-short state transition is definite. In addition, “aircraft carrier” is selected as a big hit (5 big hits, 10 big hits) given the maximum number of time reductions of 95 times. A lottery for selecting one of these four ship types, that is, a lottery for selecting one of the productions C1 to C4, is performed using the production type C lottery table shown in FIG. It is executed based on a selection ratio for each ship type set in advance based on the jackpot type.

(Production type C lottery table: FIG. 71 (c))
Since the big hit type this time is big hit 5, there is a 57% probability of selecting stage C1 (destroyer), a 25% chance of selecting stage C2 (cruiser), and a probability of selecting stage C3 (battleship). Is 15%, and the probability that the production C4 (aircraft carrier) is selected is 3%. Therefore, in the case of the big hit 5, since the time saving state is set to 95 time reduction after the big hit game is finished, it is easy to select the production C1 (destroyer) having the highest expected time reduction transition. For example, when the big hit type is big hit 6, since the normal game state is set after the big hit game ends, the probability that the production C1 (destroyer) is selected is 15%, and the production C2 (cruiser) is selected. Probability C25 (Battleship) is selected with the shortest expected transition time, such as 25% probability, Probability C3 (Battleship) is selected 60%, Probability C4 (Aircraft Carrier) is selected 0% It is easy to be done

(9-1-4. Production of production type D appearing in section D)
When the sensor SW3 is turned on during the “confrontation effect” of the effect type C (time tc), it is determined that a V prize has been won (SW3 passage determination), and the “confrontation effect” of the effect type C ends and is determined. Only the scenario pattern 1 is left at the location c, and the “enemy ship hit effect” of “effect type D” is executed (time tc to time t7). On the other hand, when SW4 is turned ON during “face-off effect” (time td), a non-V winning determination is made, “face-off effect” ends, and “own ship shot effect” of “effect type G” described later is executed. (Time td to time t7). The “production type D” or the “production type G” appears using the interval time between rounds that starts after the discharge of all the game balls in the right big prize opening 50.

  In this way, in the “confrontation production”, a production is performed that expresses how a naval battle with the enemy ship is developed by confronting the discovered enemy ship. Then, in the subsequent “Direction Type D” or “Direction Type G”, an effect is executed as to whether the enemy ship was able to hit the attack or whether the enemy ship ’s attack was hit by the own ship, Production is to be executed. That is, the production type D or the production type G is production content related to the content of the production type C (confrontation production). Therefore, between the production type D or production type G and the production type C, the production contents are productions that are mutually related. Production type A → Production type B → Production C → Production type D Alternatively, a series of scenarios up to the production type G is a production scenario with a story.

(Direction D's enemy ship hit direction)
Next, the production type D “Enemy ship hit production” will be specifically described. In the effect type D, as an effect related to the content of the effect type C's confrontation effect, a “V display effect” that displays a character image of “V” informing the V prize on the screen appears, and the game that the V prize is won. (For example, V display effect of FIG. 66B (f)). After that, it seems that artillery battles, torpedo battles, etc. according to the ship type of the ship (direction contents of the directing effect of the production type A) and the type of enemy ship (direction contents of the directing effect of the production type C) flow, "Enemy ship hit direction" that expresses the attack of your ship hits the enemy ship is executed. In the case of the present embodiment, information indicating that the “V display effect” in the “Enemy ship hit effect” of the effect type D has gained “per V” (has won V) has been notified to the player. It is an effect that can appear in both cases of big hit games and small hit games. However, in the enemy ship hit stage production of stage H4, which will be described later, it is not necessary to display the “V display stage” because it is the stage of the second round or later when the lower prize winning opening is released. It is designed not to let it go out.

(9-1-5. Production of production type H1)
When the interval between rounds ends (time t7), a round game in which the lower major winning opening 40 is opened is performed over 2R to 16R.

(Decision production of production type H1)
When the 2R round game in which the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened (time t7), the effect type D ends, and the “settlement effect” of the next effect type H1 is executed. This “settlement effect” of the effect type H1 is executed until the big hit game ends, that is, until the end time of the end interval ends after the 16R round game ends.

  Since the big hit type of this time is the big hit 5, in the “settlement effect” of the production type H1, the production related to the production as a result of the attack hitting the enemy ship in the production of the enemy ship of the production type D appears. Here, the enemy ship's attack hits the enemy ship, resulting in the enemy ship ’s sinking appearance, and the fighters celebrating the victory of the imperial kingdom while looking up at the Asahi flag that flutters in the air and the sky. The content includes “blessings”. In addition, in this “settlement effect”, an announcement is made that the transition to the time-short state of “time reduction number 95 times” is set after the big hit game ends, and an effect of selecting the effect mode in the time-short state is also performed. Specifically, an effect of selecting whether to select the “battle mode” or the “school mode” is performed. In this way, the production type H1 is production content related to the content of the production type D (the enemy ship hit production), and in the case of this embodiment, “production type A → production type B → production C → production type D”. The story of Pattern 1 is completed with a series of scenarios of “Direction Type H1”. In addition to the above-mentioned “production type H1”, the production types H2 to H6 are hit-direction productions after the second round, and are considered to be time management scenarios in which there are no determination points after that, pattern 1 ~ Pattern 9 (FIG. 68, FIG. 69AA). The production scenario (for example, production type A → production type B → production C → production type D for pattern 1 until the start of at least the second round excluding production types H1 to H6) ]) May be configured so that a story having one meaning is completed.

(9-2. Scenario pattern 2)
Next, the effects of the other patterns 2 to 4 will be described first from the effects of pattern 2.

  In Pattern 2, production type A (game method notification production, enemy search production) → production type B (electronic probe capture production) → production type C (confrontation production) → production type G (own ship impact production, pseudo-end production, lightning striker appearance) Production) → Production H2 (Ending production), appearing in cascade, the story progresses. The production type A to the production type C of the pattern 2 are the same as those in the case of the pattern 1 except that the production type G and the subsequent production type H2 appearing in the section G are included. It is a point.

  When the switch SW4 is turned on without a V prize (time td), the effect type C ends, and the process of leaving only the scenario pattern 2 of the scenario patterns 1 and 2 is executed at the determination location c. “Direction type G” is executed as an effect. In “Direction Type G”, an enemy ship ’s attack hits the ship ’s own shot, a “pseudo end effect” that informs them that the V-win was not won, and a group of friendly lightning strikers appear to strike the enemy ship The “lightning striker appearance effect” appears in this order (time td to time t7). When the “production type G” ends, the “production type H2” related to the production type G (lightning striker appearance production) appears (time t7). In this production type H2, in the “Thunderbolt Appearance Production” of production type G, the “Enemy Ship Sinking Production” represents how the enemy ship would sink as a result of the torpedoes firing on the enemy ship and hitting the enemy ship. Is performed (time t7 to ED).

(9-3. Scenario pattern 3)
In pattern 3, production type A (game method notification production, enemy search production) → production type B (electronic probe capture production) → production type F (enemy shadow disappearing production, pseudo-end production, enemy ship discovery production) → production type H3 (settled) Production), the productions appear in cascade, and the story progresses. Production type A to production type B of pattern 3 is the same as in the case of patterns 1 and 2, except that production type F appears after production type B, followed by production type H3. It is.

(Direction type F enemy shadow disappearing effect, pseudo end effect, enemy ship discovery effect)
When the sensor SW4 is turned ON during the “electron probe capturing effect” of the effect type B (time td), the effect type B is ended, and it is determined that the through route is passed at the determination point b. The process of leaving only the pattern 3 of ˜3 is executed, and “effect type F” is executed as the next effect. As this “Direction Type F”, “Enemy Shadow Disappearance Effect” that loses sight of the enemy shadow, “Pseudo End Effect” that informs that the V prize was not won, and “Enemy Ship Discovery Effect” that discovers the enemy ship again appear in this order. Issued (time td to time t7). When “production type F” ends, “production type H3” related to this production type F (enemy ship discovery production) appears. This production type H3 is a blessing that includes the “Enemy Ship Sinking Direction” that expresses how the enemy ship was sunk as a result of the enemy ship's assault attack hitting the enemy ship discovered by the “Enemy Ship Discovery Production” of the production type F An effect is executed (time t7 to ED).

(9-4. Scenario pattern 4)
In pattern 4, the production is cascaded as production type A (game method notification production, enemy search production) → production type E (enemy shadow disappearing production, pseudo-end production, enemy ship discovery production) → production type H (settlement production) The story progresses as it appears. The production type A of the pattern 4 is the same as the case of the above patterns 1, 2, and 3. The difference is that the production type E appears after the production type A, followed by the production type H3. .

(Direction E Enemy Shadow Disappearance Production, Pseudo End Production, Enemy Ship Discovery Production)
If the right prize winning port 50 is closed without turning on the sensor SW1 during the “searching effect production” of the production type A, it is determined that there is no prize at the judgment location a, and the scenario patterns 1 to 4 are selected. The process of leaving only pattern 4 is executed, and “effect type E” is executed as the next effect. As for the effect type E, the “enemy shadow disappearing effect”, “pseudo end effect”, and “enemy ship discovery effect” similar to the effect type E appear in this order (time td to time t7). When the “production type E” ends, the “production type H3” appears (time t7 to ED).

(Summary)
In this way, when the winning game is started, the “search enemy effect” of the effect type A at the initial stage is first executed. Then, the production scenario is developed in accordance with the detection result (determination point a) of the sensor SW1, and as the production result for the “searching enemy production”, the “electric probe capturing effect” of the production type B or the “ship shadow disappearing production” of the production type E , “Pseudo end effect, enemy ship discovery effect” is executed. Also, in the electric probe capture effect of the production type B, the production scenario is advanced according to the detection result (determination point b) of the sensor SW2, and when entering the V chance route, the scenario is advanced to the production type C and “confrontation production”. When a through route is entered instead of the V chance route, the scenario is advanced to the effect type F, and the “ship shadow disappearing effect, the pseudo end effect, and the enemy ship finding effect” are executed. Also, in the “confrontation effect” of the effect type C, “enemy ship hit effect” that causes the scenario to progress to the effect type D is executed if it is V prize according to the detection result (determination point c) of the sensor SW3. If it is a V prize, the scenario is advanced to production type G, and “own ship impact production, pseudo-end production, enemy ship discovery production” is executed. When the production of the production type D, E, E, or G is finished, the “settlement production” of the production type H1, H2, or H3 in the final stage is executed corresponding to the production type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, after determining a plurality of initial types of selection target scenarios, the initial production scenario is determined according to the detection results of the sensors SW1 to SW4 formed in the right big prize opening 50 and the play area 59. Are selected, and finally one production scenario is selected. Specifically, the production content of the initial production scenario progresses toward the final production content according to the detection results of the sensors SW1 to SW4, and as a result, the production scenario having one story is completed. It is supposed to be. Thereby, even when there are a plurality of types of routes through which a game ball can pass, such as in the game area 59, or when there are V lottery items, a hit effect suitable for the behavior of the game ball is displayed. Can do.

(About hits under short-term conditions)
In the above, the presentation during the winning game by the winning winning in the normal gaming state has been described, but the opening time and the opening operation of the right big winning opening 50 are also performed for the directing during the winning game by winning in the short-time state. A plurality of types of effect types that take into account the time and interval time when passing through the sensor SW are provided, and a configuration similar to the effect scenario progress type hitting effect described with reference to FIGS.

  For example, the opening time when winning a big hit under the short-time state, the opening operation time of the right big winning opening 50, and the interval time when passing through the sensor SW were won 1 to 4, 7 to 10 under the normal gaming state 68 (refer to the columns of big hits 11 to 17 in special figure 2 in FIG. 47, big hits 1 to 4 in special figure 1, and 7 to 10 in big figure), so that the configuration is similar to the production scenario shown in FIG. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, when winning a small hit in the short-time state, opening time (see the opening column of FIG. 48) when winning a small hit in the normal gaming state, and the right big winning opening 50 is not won Since the end interval time (ending time) is different, the production contents of the production type A and the production type X in the production scenario shown in FIG. 69A are different as follows.

  Referring to FIG. 69B, in the effect type A of “Patterns 13 to 15”, the game method notification effect is not displayed, and only the search effect is displayed. The reason why the game method notification effect is not included is because it is considered that the player is already making a right-handed strike in the short-time state, so there is little need to intentionally present the game method notification effect. is there.

  In addition, “pattern 16” in FIG. 69B is an effect scenario composed only of effect type A. As described above, this is because the end interval time (ending time) for the purpose of speeding up the game and the like in the case of not winning the right big prize opening 50 during the small hit game in the short-time state. Is set to zero or several ms (substantially zero), and the ending effect is not executed, and the effect in the small hit game is ended by the “searching effect” of the effect type A. Therefore, the “pattern 16” effect scenario during the small hit state in the short time state does not include the “pattern 12” effect type X shown in FIG. 69A (configuration that does not appear).

Preferred embodiments are described below.
(1) lottery means (a special symbol management process in FIG. 11, FIG. 15) for performing lottery for multiple types of hits;
Display means (liquid crystal display device 36) capable of effect display relating to the game;
Display control means (effect control unit 24) for controlling display of effect display in the display means;
Variable winning means (first special variable winning device 42, second special variable winning device 52) capable of opening and closing with a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern;
Detection means (SW1 to SW4) for detecting a game ball that has entered the variable winning means at a predetermined detection position;
A winning game control means (main control unit 20, S60 in FIG. 11 (special electric utility management process)) for opening and closing the variable winning means in an operation pattern according to the winning type and controlling execution of the winning game;
After the winning game is over, until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the number of time reductions is exhausted), a privilege game (time reduction state: FIG. 38, FIG. 39, FIG. FIG. 43) is a gaming machine provided with privileged game control means capable of executing control,
The privilege game control means includes
When the type of winning is the first winning (big hit), after the first winning game (big hit game) is executed, the bonus game (shorter time) until the first predetermined condition (short time count) is established as the predetermined condition. Control)
The first predetermined condition includes that the number of times that the hit type is the second hit (small win) reaches a predetermined number (for example, when the number of special electricity is counted as the number of wins per small win, When counting by the number of executions (such as subtracting the number of special electricity at the start of the small hit game or at the end of the small hit game)
The hit game control means includes
When the hit type is the second hit, a second hit game (small hit game) is executed as the hit game,
The display control means includes
When the type of winning is the second winning (small hit) in the bonus game (short time state), a predetermined effect scenario is selected during the second winning game (for example, RAM 1 to 4 in FIG. 34C). ) Display control is possible,
When a game ball is detected by the detection means (SW1 to SW4), the effect contents of the effect scenario are advanced.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
(2) At the time of the bonus game,
When the current second hit (small hit) is not a hit that will reach the predetermined number of times (when the number of time reductions does not become zero (time reduction end) due to the current winning of the small hits), the display The production scenario selected by the control means does not include a production scenario that informs the end of the special game (for example, it does not correspond to the scenario stored in RAM 1 to 4 in FIG. 34C). ,
When the current second hit is a hit that will reach the predetermined number of times (when the number of time reductions is zero (the time reduction number ends) due to the current winning of the small hits), it is selected by the display control means In the production scenario, the production scenario for notifying that the bonus game will continue is not included, but the production scenario for notifying that the game will eventually be a win game (game per V or game per V) ( For example, the scenario stored in the RAM 1 in FIG.
The gaming machine according to (1) above, characterized in that.
(3) When the current hit is the second hit (small hit), the second hit is a hit in the normal game (normal game state), and a game ball enters the variable winning means. If not, after the variable winning means is operated in a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern, the next game is started after a lapse of a first predetermined time (t5 to tf in FIG. 58),
If the second win is a win in the bonus game and no game ball has entered the variable winning means, the variable winning means is operated in a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern, and then the first predetermined Waiting for the elapse of a second predetermined time shorter than the time (t5 to tf = 0 in FIG. 58, or less than t5 to t6, or less than t5 to tf) to start the next game,
The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, wherein

<10. 66A, 66B> Common production effect regarding a specific small hit type win and a specific big hit type win:
In the case of the ball game machine of the present embodiment, when the big win is won by the special symbol win lottery, the big win is fixed regardless of the presence or absence of the V lottery. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the specific effect display (FIG. 66B) can appear in both cases of big hit games and small hit games, and this specific effect display is at least in the first section (FIG. 66B). (A) to (d)) and the second section ((e) to (h) in FIG. 66B). The first section is composed of common display modes ((a) to (d) in FIG. 66B) that are the same or similar to each other, regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit, and the second section Is composed of a first display mode ((g) revival effect in FIG. 66B) including information indicating that it is beneficial to the player when the hit type is a big win ((g) revival effect in FIG. 66B). When the type is a small hit, the second display mode (in FIG. 66B) includes information indicating that it is beneficial to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area (V area). (F) V-winning effect), and when the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the third display mode does not include the first information ((e) non-V winning (end display) in FIG. 66B) → ( h) Start of next fluctuation). More specifically, the effect related to the first specific variation pattern that can be selected when the big hit is drawn is the same as the effect related to the second specific variation pattern that can be selected when the big hit is drawn. When a game ball enters the variable winning means in the big hit game, special effects ((a) to (d in FIG. 66B) until the game ball passes through the non-specific area. )) Appearing, if the game ball passes through the non-specific area, the non-specific area passing effect appears, and if the game ball enters the variable winning means in the small hit game, The special effect ((a) to (d) in FIG. 66B) is displayed until it passes through the non-specific area, and when the game ball passes through the non-specific area, the non-specific area pass effect is displayed. After making the non-specific area passing effect appear, To revealing the winning director to inform the effect that the per.

  FIG. 66A and FIG. 66B are explanatory views for explaining the effects when a specific big hit or a specific small win is won during a normal game. In this embodiment, paying attention to the fact that there is a commonality in the winning game mode (see FIG. 47, FIG. 48) with respect to hits such as big hit 5 and small hit 5, and big hit 6 and small hit 6, etc. In this case, a common production mode (common production production: ((a) to (d) in FIG. 66B)) appears in a part of the symbol variation display game at the time of winning and the subsequent winning game. This makes it possible to conceal from the player which win has been won, so that the expectation and tension related to the winning type can be raised, and the gaming interest can be improved. Hereinafter, the common accent production will be described in detail. In the following, the effects that appear when “5 big hits or 5 small wins” are won, and when “6 big hits or 6 small hits” are won, they will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate descriptions. .

(10-1. About the common sword effect during the symbol variation display game when winning 5 big wins or 5 small wins
First, with reference to FIG. 66A and FIG. 66B, an effect (common change effect during change) that appears during the symbol change display game when the big hit 5 or the small hit 5 is won will be described.

  In FIG. 66A, (a) time t1 indicates a point in time when variable display is started, (b) times t1 and t2 indicate variable display, and (c) times t2 and t3 indicate fixed display (500 ms). ing. FIG. 66B (a) to (c) exemplifies the outline of the effects appearing corresponding to the sections from time t1 to t2 and the sections from t2 to t3 described in (a) to (c). Is. In the example of FIG. 66B, in the sections (a) to (c), the decorative display variation display mode, the notice effect that appears (for example, the notice effect and the reach effect (not shown) by the character of FIG. 66B (b)). )), The combination of decorative symbols to be finally stopped (here, the stop eye “357” in FIG. 66B (c)), the background effect at that time, and the like are the same. As a result, in the current symbol variation display game, it is concealed (completely concealed state) whether the big hit 5 or the small hit 5 is won for the effect.

(10-2. About the common roaring effect during winning game when winning 5 big wins or 5 small wins)
Next, with reference to FIG. 66A and FIG. 66B, the hit / win effect when the big hit 5 or the small hit 5 is won will be described.

  If you win 5 big hits or 5 small hits and stop with a combination of decorative pattern "357" (Fig. 66B (c)), you will get a winning game (1R round game for big hits, small hit game for small hits) ) Is started. As described above, when the winning game is started, first, the right big prize opening 50 is opened at a start interval (time t3 to t4: 21000 ms (in the normal game state), 500 ms (in the short time state)). The In the case of “big hit 5” or “small hit 5”, the maximum opening time of the right big prize opening 50 is 1600 ms, which is an opening time width that is likely to win the right big prize opening 50.

  Here, in the case of a big win, the big hit game is executed regardless of whether or not there is a winning in the right big winning opening 50 and whether or not there is a V winning. In the case of small hits, if the right big prize opening 50 is not won, the right big prize opening 50 is closed after the maximum opening time of 1600 ms (time t4 to t5), and the ending time has elapsed (time t5 in FIG. 69A). ~ Tf, 34.5 s) in the "7 'ending" column in FIG. 66A, the small hit game ends. However, when winning the right big prize opening 50 (time ta), it is determined whether or not the V prize is won by the SP arm combination 58 or the lottery combination 60 in the play area 59 (time tc or At time td), when winning V, a game per V in the same game mode as the big hit game mode is executed (time ti). When not winning V, the ending time elapses (time td to th in FIG. 69A). The small hit game ends with 34.5 s in the column “7 ′ ENDING” in FIG. 66A. In this way, in the case of a small win, in the case where the right big winning opening 50 is not won or the case where the V winning is not won, the winning game mode is greatly changed from the case of the big win. Therefore, in consideration of these cases, it is possible to determine whether the big hit is 5 or the small hit 5 by displaying a common hit effect (a hit effect common hit effect) for the big hit 5 and the small hit 5 It can be kept secret from the person.

  In the example of FIG. 66B, a case where the player has won the right big prize opening 50 is shown. Although (d) in the drawing shows “winning game start”, to be precise, in the interval from the start of the winning game (time t3) until it is determined whether or not to win a V (time tc or time td). An effect is shown, and at least the effect that appears in the section is an effect common to the big hit 5 and the small hit 5. As a result, a common production effect appears until it is determined whether or not to win a V, and at least until it is determined whether or not there is a V winning, it is concealed whether it is a big hit 5 or a small hit 5 and internally If it is a hit game with a big hit 5, it can be worn as if it was a hit game with a small hit 5. Conversely, if it was a hit game with a small hit 5, internally, a big hit 5 It is possible to disguise as if it was a hit game. However, after the presence or absence of the V prize is determined, an effect that reveals whether it is a small hit 5 or a big hit 5 appears.

(For non-V prizes)
(E), (g), and (h) in FIG. 66B show the effects at the time of non-V winning, and the route of (e) → (g) shows the effects in the case of a big hit 5 (e) → The route of (h) shows an effect in the case of 5 small hits. In the case of small hit 5, after the non-V winning (time td), as the ending effect, the effect type Z of the pattern 10 in FIG. 69A (own ship impact effect + end effect: time td to th (34.5 s)) or FIG. 69A The effect type Y of the pattern 11 (enemy shadow disappearance effect + end effect: times td to th (34.5 s)) appears. FIG. 66B (e) shows, as an example of an end effect for telling the end of the small hit game, the same or similar effect contents displayed immediately before the start of the small hit game, that is, “predetermined background effect + “Stop eye '357” ”is displayed, and the contents of the effect that tells the end of the current small hit game are illustrated. Then, when there is an operation holding ball, the next symbol variation display game is started (FIG. 66B (h)).

However, in the case of big hit 5, unlike the case of small hit 5 described above, the following effects are developed.
After the non-V prize (time td), as an effect during the interval between rounds, the effect type G of the pattern 2 in FIG. .5 s)) or production type F of pattern 3 in FIG. 67 (enemy shadow disappearing effect + pseudo end effect + enemy ship discovery effect (resurrection effect): time td to t7 (62.5 s)) appears, and then 2 The jackpot game after the round is executed. In the example of FIG. 66B (e), the stop eye “357” that is confirmed and displayed immediately before the start of the big hit game is displayed as the pseudo end effect, and then the torpedo appearance effect appears as the reviving effect (FIG. 66B). (G)). That is, in the case of a non-V winning, the content of the effect before the revival effect of the pattern 2 at the time of the big hit (corresponding to the time th in FIG. 66A) and the effect content of the pattern 10 at the time of the small hit are the same. In addition, the production content before the revival production of the pattern 3 at the time of the big hit (corresponding to the time th in FIG. 66A) and the production content of the pattern 11 at the time of the small hit are the same. In this way, in the case of a non-V winning of 5 big hits, the same effect as in the case of 5 small hits is executed until 34.5 s corresponding to the time th, and then the revival effect is performed using 28 seconds from time th to t7. Appears and denies the result of the performance that was pretending to be a small hit. In other words, if it is a big hit, pretend that it is the case of a small hit first by a common hitting effect during the hit (pretend small hit game), then tell that it is a big hit by a subsequent revival effect, → In the order of big hits, make an effect that hits the player. As a result, the player is given a sense of security that “actually it was a big hit” from the discouraged state that “the winning per V could not be obtained”, and the excitement for the game can be enhanced.

(When winning V)
(F) of FIG. 66B shows the effect at the time of V winning. In the case of winning V, the effect type D of the pattern 1 in FIG. 67 (Enemy ship hit effect: times tc to t7) is given for the big hit, and the effect type D of the pattern 9 in FIG. Hit effect: times tc to ti) appear. In addition, as already explained, the production type D in the case of big hit and the production type D in the case of small hit are the same in that the enemy ship hit stage production appears, but in the case of big hit, it is a big hit “Long version enemy ship hit effect (62.5s)” to be notified, and in the case of small hit, “short version enemy ship hit effect (21s)” to notify that it is per V. In the example of FIG. 66B (f), “V display effect” in which the letter “V” is displayed on the image of the Asahi flag as an effect at the time of V winning in the enemy ship hit effect. Here, in addition to the display effect of the Asahi flag, an effect of notifying information related to the hit type may be displayed. For example, “V777” for a big hit and “V357” for a small win. A combination of symbols may be displayed together. After completion of the “Enemy ship hit effect” (time t7 or time ti), the “settlement effect” of the effect type H1 is executed.

  Although not shown, in the case of not winning the right big prize opening 50, in the case of a big hit, the production type E of the pattern 4 in FIG. Resurrection effect): Time t5 to te (62.5s)) appears, and then the big hit game in the second and subsequent rounds is executed. In the case of a small hit, an effect type X (enemy shadow disappearing effect + termination effect: times t5 to tf (34.5 s)) of the pattern 12 of FIG. 69 appears, the small hit game ends, and the action holding ball is If there is, the next symbol variation display game is started (FIG. 66B (h)). In the case of a big win, a rebirth effect will appear, and as in the case of the non-V winning mentioned above, the player will be “actually a big hit” from the discouraged state that “the V hit could not be won”. It can give a sense of security and enhance the fun of the game.

(Modification)
In the above-described embodiment, lottery means (the special symbol management process of FIG. 11, FIG. 15) for performing lottery for a plurality of types of hits, display means (liquid crystal display device 36) capable of displaying effects relating to games, and the display Display control means (effect control unit 24) for controlling display of the effect display in the means, and variable winning means (first special variation winning device 42, second special variation) configured to be opened and closed by a predetermined opening / closing operation pattern. A winning device 52), a specific area (63) configured to allow a game ball that has entered the variable winning means to pass through, and the variable winning means when the lottery result is a win. The winning game control means (special electric game management process: S060 in FIG. 11, S19 in FIG. 11) for executing and controlling the winning game to be opened and closed by the pattern, and after the winning game is finished, until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Run controllable benefits game control means advantageous benefits game than game (V winning setting process: S645, jackpot ending process of FIG. 25: S593 of FIG. 27) and, a gaming machine having a
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit (big hit) and a second hit (small hit), and the hit game control means has a case where the first hit is drawn by the lottery means (see FIG. 43, when the first winning game control means for executing the first winning game and the second winning prize are drawn by the lottery means (in the case of the big hit in FIG. 56), 44, the case of the small hit in FIG. 44, the second hit game control means for executing the second hit game, and the game ball passing through the specific area during the second hit game And a third per game control means for executing a third per game (game per V), wherein the display control means is in any of the first per game and the second per game. The specific effect display (FIG. 66B) is possible, The effect display is composed of at least a first section ((a) to (d) in FIG. 66B) and a second section ((e) to (h) in FIG. 66B). In both cases where the type is the first hit and the second hit, the common display modes ((a) to (d) in FIG. 66B) are the same or similar to each other, and the second The section is configured in a first display mode ((g) revival effect in FIG. 66B) including information indicating that it is beneficial to the player when the hit type is the first hit (indicating that it is a win). When the winning type is the second winning and the game ball passes the specific area, it is configured in a second display mode ((f) V winning effect in FIG. 66B) including the information. If the game ball does not pass through the specific area, the information is not included. 3 and a display mode (non-V prize (e) of FIG. 66B (end indication) → (h) The following variations start), and the things. When the lottery result of the lottery is a win, the lottery means includes a transmission means capable of transmitting hit information to the outside, and the transmission means passes the specific area when the win type is the second hit. When the hit information is transmitted at the timing (tc in FIG. 60) and the hit type is the first hit, the predetermined timing (t7 in FIG. 60) regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area. It was assumed that hit information was transmitted with

  However, the display control means includes the first display mode during the first per game and the second display mode during the second per game, the timing at which the transmission unit transmits the hit information to the outside. A configuration may be adopted in which display is started substantially simultaneously.

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 10 to 29>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 29, the game operation process on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described. The main control unit 20 side mainly includes a predetermined main process (main control side main process: FIG. 10) and a timer interrupt process (main control side timer interrupt process: activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC). 11).

<11. Main process on the main control side: FIG. 10>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control unit 20 side. The main process starts when the power is turned on without operating the initialization switch (not shown), such as when recovering from a power failure, and when the initialization switch is turned on. May turn on. In any case, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a voltage is supplied to each control board by a power control board (not shown), and the main control unit 20 (CPU 201) performs main processing on the main control side shown in FIG. Start.

  In the main control side main process, the CPU 201 first executes a necessary initial setting process before the start of the gaming operation (step S011). For example, it first sets itself to an interrupt disabled state, sets it to a predetermined interrupt mode (interrupt mode 2), and initializes register values in the CPU including each part of the microcomputer.

  Next, the state (ON, OFF) of the RAM clear signal which is an output signal of the RAM clear switch inputted through an input port (not shown) is determined (step 012). Here, the RAM clear signal is a signal for determining whether or not to initialize the entire area of the RAM, and usually has a value corresponding to the ON / OFF state of the initialization switch operated by the store clerk of the pachinko parlor. doing.

  Here, assuming that the RAM clear signal is in the ON state, the determination result in step S012 is “YES”, and the entire area of the RAM is cleared to zero (step S016). Therefore, the value of the backup flag set at the time of power-off becomes zero together with other checksum values.

  Next, a “RAM clear display command” for notifying that the RAM area has been cleared to zero is transmitted as an initialization command to each control board (step S017). Then, for example, 30 seconds is stored in the RAM clear notification timer as a time for notifying that the RAM has been cleared (step S018). When the RAM clear is executed, the gaming state is initialized, the internal gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) is 00H which designates the normal state. Also, when the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear display command, an initialization notification effect for notifying that the RAM has been cleared is executed until the RAM clear notification timer (30 seconds) elapses. As the state effect mode, the effect mode is set to the normal effect mode under the normal state.

  Next, the CTC that outputs an interrupt signal for starting the timer interrupt operation is initialized (step S019), and the CPU is set in an interrupt enabled state.

  Thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are repeated until an interrupt occurs, and various random number update processes are executed during that time (steps S020 to S022). In this various random number update processing (step S021), various random numbers used in special symbol variation display games and normal symbol variation display games (random numbers related to jackpot lotteries circulating through a predetermined numerical range by increment processing (used for symbol lottery) Random numbers used for changing the initial value (start value) of the random numbers for special symbol determination) and random numbers related to lottery per auxiliary (random numbers for determining per-subject winning lottery per auxiliary) The initial value random number for determination and the initial value random number for determination per auxiliary) and the random number for variation pattern used for selecting the variation pattern are updated.

  In the RAM 203 of the present embodiment, a special symbol determination random number counter initial value generation counter, a special symbol determination counter, and the like as various random number counters used for symbol lottery related to jackpot lottery, supplementary lottery, or variation pattern lottery, etc. There are provided a random number counter, a counter for generating an initial value per auxiliary sub-counting counter, a random counter for determining an auxiliary per auxiliary counter, a random counter for variation pattern, and the like. These counters serve as random number generation means for generating random numbers in software. In the various random number update processing in step S021, the above-described special symbol determination random number counter, the two initial value generation counters for generating the initial value of the auxiliary hit determination random number counter, the fluctuation pattern random number counter, and the like are updated. Generate various soft random numbers. For example, assuming that the range of values that can be taken as the variation pattern random number counter is 0 to 238, a value is obtained from the count value storage area for generating the variation pattern random number value in the RAM 203, and 1 is added to the obtained value. And then stored in the original count value storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 239, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters are updated in the same manner. The CPU 201 is configured to repeatedly execute various random number update processes except during a timer interrupt process that is executed intermittently.

  Returning to the determination process in step S012, the description will be continued. At the time of recovery from the power failure state, the initialization switch (RAM clear signal) is in the OFF state (step S012: YES). In such a case, the backup flag value is determined following the determination process in step S012 (step S013). Note that the backup flag is set to the ON state (backup flag = 5 AH ('** H' means any hexadecimal number) when the power is shut down, and is OFF (backup) The flag is reset to 00H).

  Therefore, when the power is turned on or when recovering from a power failure, the backup flag should normally be in the ON state. However, the backup flag is reset (OFF) if the predetermined processing is not completed before the power is cut off for some reason. Therefore, when the backup flag is in the OFF state (step S013: NO), the process proceeds to step S016 to return the operation of the gaming machine to the initial state.

  On the other hand, if the backup flag is in an ON state (step S013: YES), a checksum calculation for calculating a checksum value is executed. Here, the checksum operation is an 8-bit addition operation for the work area of the RAM 203. When the checksum value is calculated, the calculation result is compared with the stored value at the SUM address in the RAM 203 (step S014). The SUM address stores a checksum value obtained by the same checksum calculation when the power is turned off. The stored calculation result is maintained by a backup power source together with other data of the RAM 203. Therefore, originally, both should match according to the determination in step S014.

  However, if the checksum operation could not be executed when the power was turned off, or even if it can be executed, the data in the work area may be damaged before the checksum operation of the main process is executed. In such a case, the determination result in step S014 is inconsistent. If data corruption is detected due to a discrepancy between the determination results (step S014: NO), the process proceeds to step S016, RAM clear processing is executed, and the operating state of the gaming machine is returned to the initial state. On the other hand, when the checksum value obtained by the checksum calculation matches the stored value at the SUM address (step S014: YES), the stack pointer before power shutdown is restored based on the backup data, and the processing at power shutdown is performed. A game restoration process necessary for starting the game from the state is performed (step S015). Also, in the game restoration process, predetermined information for game restoration is obtained from the backup information (the number of special figure 1 and special figure 2 operation hold balls, the fluctuation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) and the internal game at the time of power-off. State information, etc.) and various effect control commands (power return command) including the information are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the effect control unit 24 is informed of the game progress state when the power is cut off, and is restored to the effect state when the power is cut off when the game is restored.

  When the game restoration process at step S015 is completed, the process proceeds to the process at step S019, the CTC is initialized and the CPU is set in the interrupt enabled state, and thereafter, the interrupt disabled state and the interrupt enabled state are set until an interrupt occurs. In the meantime, various random number update processes described above are executed (steps S020 to S022).

<12. Main control timer interrupt processing: Fig. 11>
Next, the timer interrupt process on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the main control timer interrupt process. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 4 ms) from the CTC, and interrupted and executed during execution of the main control side main process. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the address value (including data described in the address) when the CPU 201 reads / writes the main memory such as RAM and ROM, the result information obtained by the arithmetic processing on the program, etc. A process such as reading into and taking in a CPU built-in register is sometimes referred to as “acquisition”, and when the CPU 201 accesses a work area of the RAM and stores predetermined data is sometimes referred to as “storage”.

  In FIG. 11, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 first saves the contents of the register in the stack area, and then performs a power supply abnormality check process for monitoring the power supply state from the power supply control board (step S051). In this power abnormality check process, it is mainly monitored whether the power is normally supplied. Here, for example, when an abnormality such as a power interruption occurs, a backup process is performed in which predetermined game information at the time of power interruption is stored in the RAM so that the game can be restored without any trouble when the power is restored.

  Next, a timer management process for managing a timer used for game operation control is performed (step S052). Timer values of various timers (for example, special symbol accessory operation timer described later) used for game operation control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are managed (updated) here.

  Next, input management processing is performed (step S053). In this input management process, information detected by various sensors provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the winning counter. Here, the detection information by various sensors includes, for example, an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a lower large winning opening sensor 42a, a right large winning opening sensor 52a, and a general winning opening sensor. This is ON / OFF information (winning detection information) of a switch signal output from a winning detection switch such as 43a. Thereby, it is monitored for each interruption whether or not a game ball is detected (winning occurs) at each winning opening. The “winning counter” is a counter that is provided corresponding to each winning slot and counts the number of winning game balls (the number of winning balls). In the present embodiment, in a predetermined area of the RAM 203, an upper start opening winning counter for the upper starting opening 34, a lower starting opening winning counter for the lower starting opening 35, a normal symbol starting opening winning counter for the normal pattern starting opening 37, A prize winning counter for the prize winning opening 40, a prize winning prize winning counter for the right prize winning opening 50, a prize winning counter for the general winning opening for the general winning opening 43, and the like are provided.

  This input management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and is based on whether or not the detection information from the winning detection switch has won a prize during a period in which a prize should be allowed. Whether or not there is an illegal winning. For example, even though the movable wing piece 47 is not in operation, the lower start port sensor 35a detects a game ball or does not play a big hit game (within the big winning port effective winning period), but the big winning port sensor 42a. Alternatively, if 52a detects a game ball, this is regarded as an illegal prize, and a predetermined error process is executed in an error management process (step S055) described later in order to notify the outside of the fact. It has become. Examples of the error related to the illegal prize include a big prize mouth illegal prize error and a lower prize prize illegal prize error. When an illegal winning is detected, the detection information can be invalidated, and the payout of prize balls can be treated as invalid. Thereby, it is possible to effectively prevent a winning ball due to illegal winning.

  Next, random number management processing within a timer interrupt for periodically updating the random numbers related to each variation display game is performed (step S054). In this periodic random number update process, a special symbol determination random number or auxiliary per-subject determination random number is updated (+1 is added for each interrupt), and a process for changing the start value of the random number counter is performed each time the random number counter makes a round. For example, the value of the special symbol judgment random number counter is updated (added by +1) within a predetermined range, and the special symbol judgment random number counter initial value generation counter value is read each time the special symbol judgment random number counter makes one round. The value of the generation counter is stored in the special symbol determination random number counter. As a result, the start value of the special symbol determination random number counter is changed according to the value of the generation counter, so that the count value of the special symbol determination random number counter is random while the update cycle is constant.

  Next, an error management process for monitoring presence / absence of abnormality in the game operation state is performed (step S055). This error management process also functions as an abnormality determination means for determining whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine, and monitors for abnormalities in the gaming operation state. Do. Since errors have many error types, error processing according to the error type is performed here. As error processing, for example, a predetermined game operation (for example, game ball payout operation or game ball launch operation) is stopped, or an error command corresponding to the error type is produced in order to execute an error notification operation. Or transmitted to the control unit 24.

  In the error management process, in addition to the error notification process related to the illegal winning for the lower start opening 35 and the large winning openings 40 and 50, detection from the fraud detection sensor 99 (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, or vibration sensor). To detect fraud based on information and to handle error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, vibration sensor error) error processing (if the error cancellation condition is satisfied, to cancel the currently occurring error Error cancellation processing (including the above error cancellation command transmission) is executed.

  Next, prize ball management processing is performed (step S056). In this prize ball management process, the data stored in the above input management process is grasped and the prize counter is checked. Control unit) 29. Upon receiving this payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 to perform a payout operation for the designated number of prize balls. As a result, the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning mouth (a predetermined number of winning balls per winning ball promised for each winning mouth × the number of winning balls corresponding to the value of the winning counter) is paid out. Yes. If a winning ball is detected even during an error, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 29.

  Next, normal symbol management processing is performed (step S057). In this normal symbol management process, a lottery per auxiliary in the normal symbol fluctuation display game is performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol and the stop display mode of the normal symbol are determined, or blinking is repeated every predetermined time. Create normal symbol data (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol variation), and if normal symbol is not varying, create data for stop display (data for LED blinking display during normal symbol stop display) Or The normal symbol management process functions as an auxiliary game lottery unit and a normal symbol display unit (normal symbol display control unit) for controlling the normal symbol variation display operation.

  Next, the ordinary electric accessory management process is performed (step S058). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the generation of an excitation signal for solenoid control for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a necessary for the generation of the ordinary electric game based on the lottery result of the auxiliary per lot in the normal symbol management process (step S057). And the data (solenoid control data) is set. Based on the data set here, an excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41a in a solenoid management process described later, whereby the operation of the movable blade piece 47 is controlled. Note that the ordinary electric accessory management process functions as an auxiliary hit control means.

  Next, special symbol management processing is performed (step S059). In this special symbol management process (hit determination means), the big symbol lottery in the special symbol variation display game is mainly performed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (prefetch variation pattern, variation pattern at the start of variation) based on the lottery result. And special stop symbols. Details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, special electric accessory management processing is performed (step S060). In this special electric utility management process, when the big hit lottery result is “big hit” or “small win”, the setting process necessary for executing and controlling the hit game corresponding to the big hit is performed. Details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, right notification information management processing is performed (step S061). In this right-handed notification information management process, when the high-base gaming state in which “electric support is present” occurs, right-handed instruction information (information for instructing to aim at the right flow path 3c (normal symbol start port) 37 is performed to display a “launch position guidance effect (right-handed notification effect)” that informs 37 of the instruction information for prompting a prize)). The right-handed instruction information here is, for example, an image that prompts the player to “right-hand” on the liquid crystal display device 36 (for example, a character display “right-handed”) or a right-handed sound from the speaker 46. Sound effects (eg, “Right-right” sound) are generated. This right-handed information is reported in a case where it is presumed that the player accidentally targets the launch position on the left flow path 3b side in the state where there is electric support, and in the state where there is electric support. The case where a winning occurs at the upper start opening 34, or the case where no winning occurs at the normal symbol starting opening 37 even after a predetermined time elapses. In such a case, in this right-handed notification information management process, a “right-handed instruction command” instructing the start of the launch position guidance effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 receives this command. The launch position guidance effect is controlled to appear.

  Next, LED management processing is performed (step S062). In this LED management process, display data is output to the normal symbol display device 39 special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thereby, the change display and stop display of a normal symbol and a special symbol are performed. It should be noted that the normal symbol display data created in the normal symbol management process in step S057 and the special symbol display data update process (step S309 in FIG. 12 described later) during the special symbol management process in step S059 Display data is output by this LED management process.

  Next, external terminal management processing is performed (step S063). In this external terminal management process, the operation state information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output to an external device such as a hall computer HC or an island lamp through the frame external concentration terminal board 21. The above-mentioned operation state information includes the fact that a big hit game has occurred (condition device has been activated), that a small hit game has occurred, that a symbol variation display game has been executed, and winning information (in the starting and big winning openings) Various information such as winning information and information on the number of winning balls) and specific error occurrence information (for example, illegal winning prize error, magnetism / vibration / radio wave error, etc. for Goto action) are included. By transmitting specific error occurrence information related to the goto action to the outside of the gaming machine, it is possible to effectively notify the pachinko hall monitoring system and the pachinko hall clerk that the goto action has occurred.

  Next, solenoid management processing is performed (step S064). In this solenoid management process, an excitation signal output process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c based on the solenoid control data created in the ordinary electric accessory management process in step S058, and a special electric accessory management process in step S060. Excitation signal output processing for the special winning opening solenoid 52c based on the solenoid control data is performed. Thereby, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b operate in a predetermined pattern, and the lower start opening 35 and the right big prize opening 50 are opened and closed.

  After the processing of steps S051 to S064 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (register restoration processing), and the interrupt enabled state is set (step S065). Thus, the timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process before the interruption, and the main control side main process is performed until the next timer interruption occurs.

(13. Special symbol management processing: Fig. 12)
Next, the special symbol management process (step S059) in FIG. 11 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol management process in step S059.

  In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first performs a special figure 1 start port check process on the special symbol 1 side (upper starter port 34 side) (step S301), and then a special symbol on the special symbol 2 side (lower starter port 35 side). 2. A starting port check process is performed (step S302). Details of the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the start opening check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hitting flag is determined (step S303). This “small hitting flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not being played.

  When the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), the state of the condition device operation flag is then determined (step S304). The “conditional device operation flag” is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), it indicates that a big hit game is being played. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the big hit game is not being played.

  If the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, neither the small hit game nor the big hit game (step S303: ≠ 5AH and step S304: ≠ 5AH), special In accordance with the symbol operation status (00H to 03H), processing related to the special symbol variation display operation is performed (step S305: special symbol operation status branching process). On the other hand, if the small hit game is being played (step S303: = 5 AH) or if the big hit game is being played (step S304: = 5 AH), the processing related to the variable symbol display operation of steps S306 to S308 is not performed. It progresses to the special symbol display data update process of step S309. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game, the special symbol variation display operation is not performed (the special symbol display state of the special symbol display device is displayed after the small hit or after the big hit) As it is). The “special symbol operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol. This status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

  In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, whether the special symbol operation status is “waiting (00H, 01H)”, “changing (02H)”, or “confirming (03H)”. In response, processing corresponding to each is executed.

  Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H, 01H)”, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) is performed. When the symbol variation processing (step S307) is “confirming (03H)”, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) is executed. Here, “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next change, and “Waiting” indicates that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). The above-mentioned “under confirmation” indicates that the special symbol has been changed and is stopped (confirmed) and is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, a variation display operation that sets a variation start and a variation stop of a special symbol is realized. Details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306: FIG. 15), the special symbol variation processing (step S307: FIG. 17), and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308: FIGS. 18A to 18B) are as follows. It will be described later.

  When any of the processes in steps S306 to S308 is completed, a special symbol display data update process in step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blink display during special symbol stop display) is generated. The special symbol display data created here is output in the LED management process (step S062) of FIG. 11, and the special symbol variation display and stop display are realized on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. Thus, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process in step S060 of FIG.

(8-1. Special Figure 1 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 13)
First, the special figure 1 starting port check process (step S301 in FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 1 starting port check process in step S301. This special figure 1 start opening check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition. Here, as a pre-start process for executing the special symbol variation display game 1, A process of adding the number of suspended balls on the special figure 1 side due to the winning of the upper start opening 34, a process of storing various random numbers, a process of creating a pending addition command, and the like are performed. The special figure 2 starting opening check process (step S302 in FIG. 12), which will be described later, also serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, like the special figure 1 starting opening check process. As a pre-start process for executing the symbol variation display game 2 (special figure 2 side winning process), a random number storing process caused by the occurrence of winning at the lower start opening 35, a winning command creating process, etc. Done.

  In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) has been detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311).

  When the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of the operation holding balls (hereinafter referred to as “special drawing 1 operation holding balls”) according to the special symbol 1 is less than the maximum holding memory number (here, the upper limit of four). If no winning is detected at the upper start opening 34 (step S311: NO), the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited without doing anything.

  If the winning of the upper start opening 34 is detected, but the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is 4 or more (step S312: YES), the process proceeds to step S320 described later, and the special figure 1 operation reservation ball number is not four or more. If this is the case, that is, if it is less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of special FIG.

  When the process proceeds to step S314, various random numbers used for the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are acquired from the random number counter, and the acquired random number value is stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM 203. The reserved storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operating reserve ball (holding data). Until the first variation display operation is performed (until the execution of the special symbol variation display game 1), it is held and stored in the order in which the start conditions are established (the winning order). The reserved storage area is provided with a reserved 1 storage area to a reserved n storage area (where n is the maximum number of activated balls to be held: n = 4 in the present embodiment), each of which is held for the maximum number of activated balls to be held. Data can be stored (holding storage order is stored in the order of holding 1 storage area, holding 2 storage area,..., Holding n−1 storage area, holding n storage area) .

  Of the various random numbers, the special symbol determination random number and the variation pattern random number are extracted from a random number counter that generates a random number in software corresponding to each random number. Since the random number values of these random number counters are updated randomly in the main process executed between the interrupt process and the interrupt process that occur intermittently in the count value storage areas corresponding to each provided in the RAM 203, The value is obtained as it is.

  On the other hand, the jackpot determination random number value is extracted from a random number generation circuit (a jackpot determination random number counter) that generates a random number in hardware. The random number generation circuit latches the count value at this timing when a game ball detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a or the lower start port sensor 34a, and the count value is input to the microcomputer. It has become. The CPU 201 stores this count value as a jackpot determination random number value in a storage area for the jackpot determination random value in the RAM 203 provided separately from the reserved storage area of the RAM 203 (a random latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory). At a necessary timing, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the random number latch buffer for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is read and used.

  Next, pre-read prohibition data (EVENT: “01H” for prohibiting the pre-read determination as winning command data (data corresponding to the lower byte (EVENT) of the hold addition command) for creating a pending addition command (details will be described later) ”) Is acquired (step S315), and it is determined whether the“ special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition ”is satisfied (step S316). The “special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition” is a condition for prohibiting the prefetch determination for the special figure 1 operation holding ball.

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the prefetch determination for the current special figure 1 operation holding ball is not executed (the hold addition command is prohibited by the process of step S315). As a result, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed (see the processing route of step S316: YES). In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not prefetching is prohibited based on the current gaming state. Specifically, the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side is prohibited when the game state is accompanied by the “electric support state”, that is, when the internal game state is in the short-time state. Thus, the reason for prohibiting the pre-reading determination on the special symbol 1 side in the gaming state with the electric support state is as follows.

  In the short time state, the game progresses in the symbol variation display game by the special symbol 2. In addition, since the winning rate to the lower start opening 35 becomes a “high base game state (open extension function is activated)” that can be remarkably improved as compared to the normal game state, the player is allowed to win the normal symbol start opening 37. It is estimated that the special symbol variation display game 2 is frequently executed when the launch position is aimed at (when the aim is such that the game ball passes through the right flow path 3c). On the other hand, when placed in a state without electric support, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 becomes a “low base gaming state (open extension function is not activated)”, and in this embodiment, Due to the fall direction changing member such as a nail, the game ball is difficult to be guided to the upper start opening 34 side or is not guided, and the player aims the launch position on the normal symbol start opening 37 side. In the case of a game, it is a game that is particularly disadvantageous. For this reason, it is presumed that the player does not set the launch position so that the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b side during the electric support state, and the pre-reading notice effect for the special figure 1 operation holding ball This is because if the pre-reading determination is performed one by one for the special FIG. 1 operation holding ball having a low occurrence rate, there is a problem that the control burden increases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in view of the above-described problems, the section (prefetch prohibition state) in which the prefetch determination on the special figure 1 side is prohibited can be switched according to the gaming state. Specifically, the main control unit 20 prohibits prefetch determination by first prefetch determination means (for example, prefetch determination processing on the special figure 1 side: corresponding to S317 to S323 in FIG. Function as 'prefetch prohibition state control means' for switching control of the “prohibited state (for example, in the state with electric support)” based on a predetermined condition (for example, whether there is a current internal gaming state or an electric support state) Department.

  Returning to the description of step S316 again, if the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the processing related to the prefetch determination (steps S317 to S319) is not performed and the processing proceeds to step S320. .

  When the special figure 1 prefetch prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), the process proceeds to step S317, and random number determination processing is performed (step S317). This random number determination process is performed as part of the 'prefetching determination' process. Here, the "winning lottery" relating to the current operation holding ball (here, the special figure 1 side) is performed. Perform pre-reading determination (pre-reading determination) in advance.

  When entering the random number determination process in step S317, first, the big hit determination random number value stored in the RAM 203 (special electric accessory operation determination random number latch buffer) is acquired, and then the per random number determination table for special figure 1 is acquired. . Then, based on the acquired jackpot determination random number value and the hit random number determination table, the winning lottery for the current operation holding ball (another determination of big hit, small hit and lose), that is, the current operation holding ball is The lottery result (the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation) of “special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process (see S409 in FIG. 15 described later)” executed when the variable display operation is performed is determined in advance.

(T-1. Per random number determination table: FIG. 37)
The winning random number determination table includes a “random number determining table for special symbol 1 (FIG. 37 (b))” relating to the special symbol variation display game 1 and a “random number per special symbol 2” relating to the special symbol variation display game 2. A determination table (FIG. 37 (b)) ”.

  These hit random number determination tables include a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type (whether big hit, small hit or lost), and a big hit determination random number (the size of the big hit determination random number) Specifically, depending on which judgment value the big hit determination random number value belongs to, the big hit (determination value: 10001-10219) and the small hit (determination value: 20001-20219) or lose (judgment values: 0 to 10000, 10220 to 20000, 20220 to 65535) is determined. The jackpot winning probability according to the special symbol variation display game 1 of the present embodiment is about 1/299, and the winning probability for the jackpot is the same about 1/299. Other than that, it is lost. In other words, the winning probabilities for the big win and the small win for the special symbol variation display game 1 are the same.

  If this winning lottery (pre-fetch winning determination) results in a “big hit” winning, the big hit determination flag is set to “5 AH (the big hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “ The big hit is not won (the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state). If the “small hit” win is selected, the small hit determination flag is set to “5AH (the small hit determination flag is ON)”, and if it belongs to other determination values, “small hit non-win (small) The hit determination flag is in the OFF state). Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value that is the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The current winning determination result is “lost” (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag are in the OFF state).

  In addition, in the winning lottery by the special symbol variation display game 2 (step S337 (refer to FIG. 14) during the special figure 2 starting point check process described later), the lottery using the “special figure 2 random number determination table” separately provided. Is done. In the random number determination table for special figure 2 of the present embodiment, the determination area for the big win is the same (10001 to 10219), but the determination areas for the small win are the other (0 to 10000, 10220 to 65535). It stipulates. Therefore, the big win winning probability related to the special symbol fluctuation display game 2 is about 1/299, and the big win winning probability is about 298/299, which is a loss. There is no. That is, in the special symbol fluctuation display game 1, the big win, the small hit, and the lose are targeted for the winning lottery, whereas in the special symbol fluctuation display game 2, only the big win and the small win are targeted for the winning lottery. It is a small hit. Of course, also in the random number determination table for special figure 2, the loss may be determined as the winning lottery object (for example, the determination region that causes the loss may be determined as 65534 to 65535).

  When the random number determination process in step S317 is completed, a special stop symbol data creation process is then performed (step S318). This special stop symbol data creation processing is performed as part of the 'prefetch determination' processing, and here, 'prefetch determination (prefetch symbol determination: pre-determining "symbol lottery" related to the current operation holding ball. (Pre-judgment of winning (winning) type)) '.

  When entering the special stop symbol data creation process of step S318, first, the winning lottery result obtained by the random number determination process of step S317 is acquired, and the symbol table corresponding to this winning lottery result (aside from big hit, small hit and lost) (A later-described big hit symbol table: FIG. 40 (a) (b), a small hit symbol table: FIG. 41 (c) (d), or a lost symbol table: not shown) is selected. Then, the random number value for special symbol determination acquired in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the random number value for special symbol determination, the symbol lottery for the current action holding ball, that is, the current action hold The lottery result (the symbol lottery result at the start of variation) of “special stop symbol creation process (see S410 in FIG. 15 described later)” executed when the ball is subjected to the variable display operation is pre-readed.

(T-2. Symbol table: FIGS. 40 and 41)
FIGS. 40 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 41 (a) and (b) show the symbol tables described above. FIG. 40 (a) shows the jackpot symbol table for special figure 1, FIG. 40 (b) shows the jackpot symbol table for special figure 2, and FIG. 41 (a) shows the jackpot symbol table for special figure 1 FIG. 41 (b) shows a small hit symbol table for special figure 2. In each symbol table, a “special symbol determination random value (the size of the special symbol determination random value: 1000)” and a determination area (determination value) for determining the winning type are defined in association with each other. More specifically, the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number are determined depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random number value belongs to.

  The “special symbol determination data” is data for identifying the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and lost type). In the present embodiment, the big hit 1 to the big hit 17 and the small hit 1 Data for identifying which of 14 winning points, losing (if there are multiple types of losing, the losing type: for example, losing A to C) is won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S411 in FIG. 15 described later, a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S412 and a process related to execution control of jackpot game) (This is a special electric symbol management process (step S060) in Fig. 9) The above "special stop symbol number" designates a special stop symbol form to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device. This is data and is used when the “stop symbol type” of the special symbol is specified on the main control unit 20 side.

(T-2-1. Big hit symbol table: FIGS. 40 (a) and (b))
In the jackpot symbol table of the present embodiment, the “big hit symbol table 1 (FIG. 40 (A))” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1 and the special symbol variation 2 for the special symbol variation display game 2 are used. "Big hit symbol table 2 (Fig. 40 (b))" is included. In each jackpot symbol table, a special symbol judgment random number value and a judgment value for determining the jackpot type are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the special symbol judgment random number value is set to any judgment value. Depending on whether or not it belongs, any one of a plurality of types of jackpots is determined.

In the jackpot symbol table 1 (FIG. 40 (a)), the range of the determination value of the special symbol determination random value corresponding to each jackpot type related to the special symbol 1, and the overall allocation value (allocation value, symbol selection rate (symbol) The relationship with the lottery probability)) is shown as follows. Further, the big hit type is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding thereto are determined as follows.
(1) Big hit type: “Big hit 1”, judgment value: 0 to 116, distribution value: 117/1000, special symbol judgment data: 01H, special stop symbol number: 01H
(2) Big hit type: “Big hit 2”, judgment value: 117 to 340, distribution value: 224/1000, special symbol judgment data: 02H, special stop symbol number: 02H
(3) Big hit type: “Big hit 3”, judgment value: 341 to 415, distribution value: 75/1000, special symbol judgment data: 03H, special stop symbol number: 03H
(4) Big hit type: “Big hit 4”, judgment value: 416 to 691, allocation value: 276/1000, special symbol judgment data: 04H, special stop symbol number: 04H
(5) Big hit type: “Big hit 5”, judgment value: 692-730, allocation value: 39/1000, special symbol judgment data: 05H, special stop symbol number: 05H
(6) Big hit type: “Big hit 6”, judgment value: 731 to 769, allocation value: 39/1000, special symbol judgment data: 06H, special stop symbol number: 06H
(7) Big hit type: “7 big hits”, judgment value: 770-849, allocation value: 80/1000, special symbol judgment data: 07H, special stop symbol number: 07H
(8) Big hit type: “Big hit 8”, judgment value: 850 to 909, distribution value: 60/1000, special symbol judgment data: 08H, special stop symbol number: 08H
(9) Big hit type: “9 big hits”, judgment value: 910-929, allocation value: 20/1000, special symbol judgment data: 09H, special stop symbol number: 09H
(10) Big hit type: “10 big hits”, judgment value: 930 to 999, allocation value: 70/1000, special symbol judgment data: 0 AH, special stop symbol number: 0 AH

Further, in the jackpot symbol table 2 (FIG. 40 (b)), the range of the determination value of the special symbol determination random value corresponding to each jackpot type related to the special symbol 2, and the overall allocation value (allocation value, symbol selection rate ( The relationship with the symbol lottery probability)) is shown as follows. Similarly, the jackpot type is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding to this are determined as follows.
(11) Big hit type: “Big hit 11”, judgment value: 0 to 249, allocation value: 250/1000, special symbol judgment data: 11H, special stop symbol number: 11H
(12) Big hit type: “Big hit 12”, judgment value: 250 to 499, allocation value: 250/1000, special symbol judgment data: 12H, special stop symbol number: 12H
(13) Big hit type: “Big hit 13”, judgment value: 500 to 579, distribution value: 80/1000, special symbol judgment data: 13H, special stop symbol number: 13H
(14) Big hit type: “14 big hits”, judgment value: 580-659, allocation value: 80/1000, special symbol judgment data: 14H, special stop symbol number: 14H
(15) Big hit type: “15 big hits”, judgment value: 660-819, allocation value: 160/1000, special symbol judgment data: 15H, special stop symbol number: 15H
(16) Big hit type: “Big hit 16”, judgment value: 820 to 909, allocation value: 90/1000, special symbol judgment data: 16H, special stop symbol number: 16H
(17) Big hit type: “Big hit 17”, judgment value: 910-999, allocation value: 90/1000, special symbol judgment data: 17H, special stop symbol number: 17H

(T-2-2. Small hits symbol table: FIGS. 41 (a) and (b))
The small bonus symbol table of the present embodiment includes “small bonus symbol table 1 (FIG. 41 (A))” for special symbol 1 relating to special symbol variation display game 1 and special symbol 2 relating to special symbol variation display game 2. “Small hit symbol table 2” (FIG. 41 (B)) ”is included. Each small symbol table is defined by associating a special symbol determination random number value with a determination value for determining the small hit type. Specifically, the special symbol determination random number value is any of the determinations. One small hit is determined from a plurality of types of small hits depending on whether it belongs to a value.

In the small hit symbol table 1 (FIG. 41 (b)), the range of the determination value of the special symbol determination random value corresponding to each small hit type related to the special symbol 1, and the overall distribution value (distribution value, symbol selection rate) The relationship with (symbol of symbol lottery)) is shown as follows. Further, the small hit type is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding thereto are determined as follows.
(1) Small hit type: “one small hit”, determination value: 0 to 224, distribution value: 225/1000, special symbol determination data: 21H, special stop symbol number: 21H
(2) Small hit type: “small hit 2”, determination value: 225 to 474, distribution value: 250/1000, special symbol determination data: 22H, special stop symbol number: 22H
(3) Small hit type: “small hit 3”, judgment value: 475-699, allocation value: 225/1000, special symbol judgment data: 23H, special stop symbol number: 23H
(4) Small hit type: “4 per small hit”, judgment value: 700 to 949, allocation value: 250/1000, special symbol judgment data: 24H, special stop symbol number: 24H
(5) Small hit type: "5 small hits", judgment value: 950-974, allocation value: 25/1000, special symbol judgment data: 25H, special stop symbol number: 25H
(6) Small hit type: “6 small hits”, judgment value: 975-999, allocation value: 25/1000, special symbol judgment data: 26H, special stop symbol number: 26H

In addition, in the small hit symbol table 2 (FIG. 41 (b)), the range of the determination value of the special symbol determination random value corresponding to each small hit type related to the special symbol 2, and the entire distribution value (distribution value, symbol) The relationship with the selection rate (symbol drawing probability) is shown as follows. Further, the small hit type is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding thereto are determined as follows.
(7) Small hit type: “7 small hits”, determination value: 0 to 249, distribution value: 250/1000, special symbol determination data: 31H, special stop symbol number: 31H
(8) Small hit type: “8 per small hit”, judgment value: 250 to 499, distribution value: 250/1000, special symbol judgment data: 32H, special stop symbol number: 32H
(9) Small hit type: “9 small hits”, judgment value: 500 to 559, distribution value: 60/1000, special symbol judgment data: 33H, special stop symbol number: 33H
(10) Small hit type: “10 small hits”, judgment value: 560-609, allocation value: 50/1000, special symbol judgment data: 34H, special stop symbol number: 34H
(11) Small hit classification: “11 small hits”, determination value: 610 to 659, distribution value: 50/1000, special symbol determination data: 35H, special stop symbol number: 35H
(12) Small hit type: "12 small hits", judgment value: 660-819, allocation value: 160/1000, special symbol judgment data: 36H, special stop symbol number: 36H
(13) Small hit type: “13 small hits”, determination value: 820 to 909, distribution value: 90/1000, special symbol determination data: 37H, special stop symbol number: 37H
(14) Small hit type: "14 small hits", judgment value: 910-999, allocation value: 90/1000, special symbol judgment data: 38H, special stop symbol number: 38H

(T-2-3. Lost symbol table)
The lose symbol table of the present embodiment includes only the “lost symbol table 1” for the special symbol 1 related to the special symbol variation display game 1.

  In the same manner as the configuration of the big hit symbol table or the small hit table, the lost symbol table 1 depends on whether or not the special symbol determination random number value belongs to any determination area (determination value). , One of the loss A and the loss B) is determined at a predetermined symbol selection rate, and the special symbol determination data and the special stop symbol number corresponding thereto are determined. In this embodiment, the winning probability of Loss B is determined to be lower than the winning probability of Loss A. For example, the SP reach is selected when Loss B is won than when Loser A is won. The proportion of being played is increasing.

  In addition, although the winning result related to the special symbol variation display game 2 has no losing, if the losing is included, the losing symbol table includes the “losing symbol table 2” for the special symbol 2. In this case, the losing symbol table 1 and the losing symbol table 2 may have different determination values related to the winning of the losing symbols A to B, and even if the special symbol determining random number is the same value, the losing symbol table 1 May be different from the case where the lost symbol table 2 is referred to.

  When the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318 described above is completed, a starting port winning random number determination process in step S319 is then performed. This start opening winning random number determination process is also performed as part of the 'look-ahead determination' process, similar to the random number determination process (step S317) and the special stop symbol data creation process (step S318). 'Prefetching determination (prefetching variation pattern determination)' is performed in advance to determine the “variation pattern at the start of variation” relating to the operation hold ball.

  Upon entering the start opening random number determination process, the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process in step S317, the 'symbol lottery' result obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process in step S318, and the step S314 Using the 'random number for variation pattern' acquired in the process, the variation pattern at the start of variation related to the currently activated ball, that is, executed when the current activated ball is subjected to the variation display operation. The result (special pattern variation pattern creation processing (see S412 of FIG. 15 described later)) ”(the variation pattern content at the start of variation) is determined in advance. Then, based on the prefetch determination result, a creation process of winning command data (second byte (EVENT): lower byte) used for creating a “hold addition command” described later is performed. The contents of the look-ahead variation pattern (excluding reserved ball number information) are designated by the winning command data (EVENT) determined in the starting port winning random number determination process. Note that the random number determination process in step S317 to the start port winning random number determination process in step S319 is a process related to 'pre-fetching determination ".

  When the random determination process at the time of starting opening winning in step S319 is completed, a “winning command” that specifies that there has been a winning related to special symbol 1 is created (step S320A), and the number of suspended balls at the time of prefetching determination is designated. A “pending addition command” composed of the winning command data on the upper byte (MODE) side and the winning command data on the lower byte (EVENT) side for designating the look-ahead variation pattern is created (step S320). These “winning command” and “hold addition command” are transmitted to the effect control unit 24 without being stored in the RAM 203 (step S321). As a result, the special figure 1 start opening check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start opening check process in step S302 of FIG. 14 is performed.

  The hold addition command is composed of 2-byte control data. Specifically, the upper byte (first byte (MODE) “BXH” (for example, B6H to B9H is special) is created according to the number of reserved balls and special symbol type (special symbol 1 and special symbol 2). It corresponds to the number of reserved balls of 1 to 4 for symbol 1 and BBH corresponds to the number of 1 of reserved balls for special symbol 2)))), and is generated by the random number determination process at the time of the start opening winning in step S316. The lower byte (the second byte (EVENT) is “XXH (XX is a numerical value corresponding to each command)” and corresponds to the contents of the look-ahead variation pattern) (see FIG. 8). Therefore, this pending addition command includes prefetch determination result information obtained in a series of processes (steps S315 to S317) relating to prefetch determination, specifically, information that can specify a prefetch variation pattern. However, when the lower byte ((EVENT)) value is a specific value (for example, “01H”), prefetch prohibition is designated.

  When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 receives the lottery and performs a lottery (prefetch notice lottery) regarding whether or not to perform the prefetch notice effect based on information included in the hold addition command. If the result of the lottery is determined to be feasible (when the pre-reading notice lottery is won), the pre-reading for the currently activated ball at the start of the symbol variation display game or at a predetermined timing during the game Make a notice effect appear. In addition, when receiving the hold addition command, the effect control unit 24 may cause a “winning effect” to be displayed to notify that the winning has been won regardless of whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is to be displayed. it can.

  In addition, even when a new winning is made when the number of active balls is 4 or more, a holding addition command at the time of overflow winning (hereinafter abbreviated as “OF holding addition command”) is created, and the production control unit 24 is transmitted.

(8-2. Special Figure 2 Starting Port Check Processing: FIG. 14)
Next, the special figure 2 starting port check process (step S302 in FIG. 12) will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the special figure 2 starting port check process.

  The special figure 2 starting port check process, like the special figure 1 starting port check process, serves as a winning process executed based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition. Here, the special symbol variation display game 2 As a pre-start process for executing the process, a process for storing various random numbers, a process for creating a command at the time of winning, and the like are performed in the same manner as the flow of the special figure 1 start port check process described above. Hereinafter, the same processing content as the above-described special figure 1 start opening check processing (step S301) will be described by omitting as appropriate in order to avoid duplication. The special design 1 is provided with an operation holding ball, whereas the special design 2 is not provided. Therefore, the processing related to the operation reservation ball is different from the special design 1 start opening check process. Special figure 2 It is not in the start opening check process.

  In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331).

  If no winning detection is detected at the lower start opening 35 (step S331: NO), the special figure 2 start opening check process is exited without doing anything. However, when the winning of the lower start opening 35 is detected (step S331: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is waiting (00H) (step S332). When the special symbol action status is not standby (00H), when the special symbol fluctuation display game is being executed (02H to 04H), or in standby (01H), the special symbol 1 is activated against the action holding ball The case where the special symbol fluctuation display game 1 is likely to be executed (01H) is shown.

  If the special symbol operation status is not 00H (standby) (step S332: NO), the process proceeds to step S340A. On the other hand, when the special symbol operation status is 00H (standby) (step S332: YES), it is determined whether or not the winning game is being played (step S333). Whether or not a winning game is being performed is determined based on a small hitting flag and a condition device operation flag. When the winning game is being played, the small hitting medium flag is 5AH or the condition device operating flag is 5AH. When the winning game is not being played, the small hitting medium flag and the condition device operating flag are 00H. Yes.

  When the winning game is being played (step S333: YES), the process proceeds to step S340A. On the other hand, if it is not a winning game (step S333: NO), the current random number counter of various random numbers (big hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern random number) used in the special symbol variation display game 2 Values are acquired and stored in the random number storage area for determination in the RAM 203 (step S334).

  Next, a “winning command” for specifying that the special symbol 2 has been won is created (step S340A), and the created winning command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S341), and special figure 2 is started. Exit the mouth check process.

(8-3. Special symbol variation start processing: FIG. 15)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (step S306) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process of FIG.

  In FIG. 15, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401). If the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is not zero (step S401: NO), Proceeding to the process of S403, the process (steps S403 to S416) related to the start of the variation of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 1 operation holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES), the random numbers (hit determination random number, special symbol determination random number, and variation pattern random number) related to the special figure 2 are stored in the determination random number storage area Is stored (step S401), and if stored (step S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S407, and the process at the start of variation (steps S407 to S407) is provided for the present variation display. S416) is performed.

  By the processing in steps S401 and S402, the “priority change order” indicating which of FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is preferentially used for the change display operation is determined. The processes of steps S401 and S402 function as “priority changing means” for preferentially executing the special symbol variation display game 1 over the special symbol variation display game 2. Therefore, the special symbol variation display game 1 is executed and the special symbol variation display game 2 is not executed unless the number of the operation suspension balls of the special figure 1 operation suspension ball is zero.

  In addition, when the number of the operation reservation balls of the special figure 1 operation reservation ball is zero and the random number regarding the special figure 2 is not stored (step S401: YES and step S402: NO), “no operation reservation ball” It becomes a state. This “no operation hold ball” state is when the special symbol is on standby and there is no hold memory, and the effect control unit 24 side is informed that it has entered this state, and the liquid crystal display The device 36 is controlled to switch to a demonstration screen display for waiting for customers. Therefore, when “no operation hold ball” is reached, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is “standby (00H)” indicating the state of “no operation hold ball”. (Step S417).

  When the determination process of step S417 is passed, that is, when the state of “no operation hold ball” is entered, and the special symbol operation status at this time is “standby (01H)” (step S417: NO: Refer to step S472 in the special symbol confirmation time process of FIG. 18A described later), and the special symbol operation status is switched to “waiting (00H)” (00H is stored in the special symbol operation status: step S418). Then, a “demonstration display command” for displaying a demonstration screen is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S419), and the special symbol variation start process is exited. Thus, the reason for switching the special symbol operation status to “waiting (00H)”, transmitting the effect control command, and exiting the special symbol variation start process is as follows.

  If the demonstration display command is sent without condition when the number of active balls is zero, the demonstration display command is repeatedly transmitted at a period of 4 ms while the number of special figure active balls is zero. Will occur. Therefore, when the “no operation hold ball” state is reached, a demonstration display command is transmitted once, and if the demonstration display command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display command is sent to the effect control unit 24. This special symbol management process can be skipped without sending to the user.

  If the presentation control unit 24 does not receive any presentation control command (for example, a hold addition command) related to the symbol fluctuation display game even after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the demonstration display command, the fluctuation display operation is performed for a certain period of time. Assuming that an undisturbed state (a waiting state for waiting for customers) has occurred, the liquid crystal display device 36 performs a “demo screen display” for notifying that the game is waiting.

  When the number of special figure 1 operation reservation balls is not zero (step S401: NO), processing related to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol for the present fluctuation display (steps S403 to S416) is performed. In the latter half of steps S407 to S416 described below, if “NO” is determined in the above step S401, the processing for the special figure 1 is performed, and “YES” is determined in the above step S402. If it is', the process will be for special figure 2, but the process is the same, so in order to avoid duplication, the process for special symbol 1 side is not required unless otherwise required. The process will be described without distinction as to whether the process is for the special symbol 2 side.

  If it progresses to step S403, 1 will subtract the number of operation reservation balls (the number of operation reservation balls concerning the special symbol side used for the present variable display operation -1: step S403), The “subtraction command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S404).

  Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S405), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S406). In the processing of steps S405 to S406, the hold data (the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern use) stored in the hold storage area (hold 1 storage area) corresponding to the hold storage number n = 1. The random number is read and stored in the random number storage area for determination of the RAM 203, and the reserved storage area (the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, the reserved 4 memory) corresponding to the reserved n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4). The hold data stored in (area) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to 'n-1' (step S405), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared (step S406). That is, the hold data in the hold 1 storage area is shifted to the random number storage area for determination, and the hold data after the hold 2 storage area is numbered one by one (hold 2 storage area → hold 1 storage area, hold 3 storage). Area → hold 2 storage area, hold 4 storage area → hold 3 storage area) and overwrite each other to provide an empty area in the hold 4 storage area (if no new active hold ball is generated, processing in step S406) Since the vacant area is sequentially shifted each time the operation is performed, the entire reserved storage area becomes an empty area when all the operating spheres are used. As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number n of the operation reservation balls (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and any of the operation reservation balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening is stored. Whether the area corresponds to the area is specified, and the storage of a new operation holding ball becomes possible.

  Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S407). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the current variation start side. For example, if special symbol 1 is the variation start side, “00H” is indicated, and special symbol 2 is the variation start side. If there is, “01H” is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

  Next, remaining short time command transmission processing is performed (step S408). Here, it is determined whether or not a special symbol short-time counter (a special electricity counter and a special symbol short-time counter) (counter for counting the remaining number of times until the special symbol short-time state ends) is zero. If there is a remaining short time count (special electricity count, special figure short time count), a “remaining short time count command” including the remaining short time count information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S408). By this “remaining short time number command”, the production control unit 24 side can grasp the remaining short time number, for example, using the effect means and can notify the remaining short time number information. The “remaining short time command” may include a “remaining special power time command” including information on the special power counter, and a “remaining short time command” including information on the special time counter. Can process information.

  Next, a random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is performed (step S409). In this special electric accessory activation determination random number determination process, a “winning lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed using the jackpot determination random number value. The random determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory operates in the same manner as the “random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 13)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “winning lottery” is performed. Here, the “winning lottery” in the “determination at the start of change” for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation is performed. Note that the processing procedure of the random determination process for special electric accessory operation determination is substantially the same as the random determination process (step S319 in FIG. 13), and therefore will be omitted as appropriate in order to avoid duplication.

  Here, first, a hit random number determination table corresponding to the current variation display side is acquired based on the special symbol operation confirmation data. This hit random number determination table is the same as the “hit random number determination table” used in the random number determination process (step S317 in FIG. 13). Next, the big hit determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and another winning lottery of big hit, small hit, and loss based on the big hit determination random value and the hit random number determination table is performed.

  If this winning lottery results in a “big hit” win, the big hit determination flag is set to “5AH”, and if it belongs to other determination values, the “big hit non-winning” is set. In addition, when the “small hit” win is made, the small hit determination flag is “5AH”, and when it belongs to other determination values, the “small hit non-win” is set. Therefore, when the big hit determination random number value belongs to the determination value of the big hit determination flag “00H” and the small hit determination “00H”, it means that neither “big hit” nor “small hit” was won, The result of the winning decision this time is 'lost'.

  When the random determination process for determining the special electronic component operation in step S409 is completed, a special stop symbol creating process is then performed (step S410). In this special stop symbol creation process, the “symbol lottery” relating to the current special symbol variation display game is performed by using the winning lottery result and the special symbol determination random number value of the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409. Do. The special stop symbol creation process is a process that works in the same way as the “special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 13)” which is one of the “prefetch determination” processes in that “symbol lottery” is performed. However, here, “symbol drawing” in “determination at the start of change” is performed for the operation holding ball used for the current change display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of the special stop symbol creation process is the same as that of the special stop symbol data process (step S318 in FIG. 13), in order to avoid duplication, the description will be omitted as appropriate.

  Here, first, the special symbol operation confirmation data and the winning lottery result (the big hit determination flag and the small hit determination flag) obtained by the random determination processing for special electric utility operation determination in step S409 are acquired, and based on these As the symbol table corresponding to the current fluctuation display side, one of the big hit symbol tables 1 and 2, the small hit symbol tables 1 and 2, and the lost symbol tables 1 and 2 is selected. This symbol table is the same as the symbol table used in the special stop symbol data processing (step S318 in FIG. 13). Next, a special symbol determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random value, the “symbol selection lottery” related to the current special symbol variation display game is performed. To determine the winning type (winning type) related to the special symbol variation display game of this time.

  When the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 is completed, a game state transition preparation process is then performed (step S411). In the game state transition preparation process, a setting process necessary for designating the game state after the big hit game is performed as a setting for shifting the game state. Details of the game state transition preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game state transition preparation process in step S411 is completed, a special symbol variation pattern creation process is then performed (step S412). In this special symbol variation pattern creation processing, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) (current game state), the winning lottery result obtained in the random determination processing for special electric accessory operation determination, the symbol of the special stop symbol creation processing Using a lottery result, a random number for variation pattern, and the like, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation is determined by lottery. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the variation pattern, a “variation pattern designation command” including variation pattern information that can specify the content of the variation pattern is created as an effect control command, and this is effect control Transmit to the unit 24 side. Note that the special symbol variation pattern creation process is a random number determination process at the time of winning a winning prize, which is one of the 'prefetching determination' processing in terms of determining the variation pattern of the special symbol, and a creation process related to the pending addition command (step of FIG. 13) S319 and S320), but here, the variation pattern of the special symbol for the operation holding ball used for the present variation display operation, that is, the variation pattern at the start of variation is determined. Is done.

  Here, first, a random number value for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and then a “hit fluctuation pattern distribution table” or “losing fluctuation pattern distribution table” (not shown) is acquired based on the big hit lottery result (winning lottery, symbol lottery). . Then, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined by variation pattern lottery using the variation pattern distribution table and the variation pattern random value.

(T-3. Fluctuation pattern distribution table)
The above-mentioned fluctuation pattern distribution table includes a “winning fluctuation pattern distribution table” that is selected when winning a win (big hit or small win), and a “fluctuation pattern changing pattern for loss” that is selected when winning a win. Minute table ".

  In each variation pattern allocation table, the variation pattern related to the special symbol includes the number of active suspension balls (the number of remaining operation suspension balls excluding the operation suspension balls used for the current variation display operation), the variation pattern allocation designation number ( Tcode) (current gaming state), jackpot lottery result (special stop symbol creation process (step S410) symbol lottery result), and variation pattern random number value is determined in association with the variation pattern random number, One of the variation patterns is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  As the variation pattern is determined, a “variation time determination table” corresponding to the variation pattern is also determined. In this “variation time determination table”, the variation time (symbol variation display operation time) is defined. By referring to the variation time determination table corresponding to the determined variation pattern, the variation of the present variation pattern The time will be fixed. This variation time is the game time of the decorative symbol variation display game executed in synchronization with the special symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display time (effect time)).

  Information on the variation pattern determined in this way mainly includes another winning / losing winning lottery result (in the case of this embodiment, the symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command), the current Game state type, variable time, execution specification information for specific notice effect (specifying information such as presence / absence of reach effect, reach effect type (N reach type or SP reach type), presence / absence of pseudo-ream, number of pseudo-reams) Can do. The CPU 201 creates a “variation pattern designation command” that can specify the content, and transmits this to the effect control unit 24 side. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command, the effect control unit 24 controls the appearance of the effect during the current symbol variation display game based on the variation pattern information included in the command. The variation pattern designation command may include symbol lottery result information.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again, when the special symbol variation pattern creation processing in step 412 is finished, 5AH (ON state) is then set to the special symbol N variation flag (N = 1, 2) for designating that the variation is being displayed. ) Is stored (step S413). The “special symbol N changing flag” is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing. When the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH), the special symbol changes. When the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. The special symbol 1 changing flag (N = 1) corresponds to the special symbol 1 side, and the special symbol 2 changing flag (N = 2) corresponds to the special symbol 2 side.

  Next, a decorative symbol designation command is created based on the symbol lottery result obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S410 (step S414), and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). This decorative symbol designation command is composed of two bytes: an upper byte (MODE) for designating a special symbol type on the variable side, and a lower byte (EVNET) for designating a big hit type, a small hit type, and a loss type. Therefore, the “decorated symbol designation command” includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning category (symbol lottery result). For example, the upper byte (MODE) side is set to “BBH” when the special symbol on the variable side is Special Figure 1, “BCH” is set to Special Figure 2, and the lower byte (EVENT) side is selected as winning. EVNET value corresponding to the type (value that can specify the hit type or the loss type, for example, “01H” to “0AH” for the big hit 1 to 10, “11H” to “17H” for the big hit 11 to 17, "21H" to "26H" for small hits 1 to 6, "31H" to "38H" for small hits 7 to 14, and "51H" for lost cases. Since this decoration designating command includes winning type information, on the effect control unit 24 side, mainly a combination of decorative symbols (reach symbols) when forming a reach state, or a decorative symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. This is used when determining the combination of (decoration stop symbol).

  Then, as the change start time setting process, the special symbol operation status is switched to “Fluctuating (02H)” (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the determination random number storage area (cleared to zero) (step S416). ).

  As described above, when the special symbol variation start processing is exited, the special symbol display data update processing (step S309) of FIG. 12 is performed, and thus the special symbol variation display is started. As a result, the special symbol management process (step S059) is exited and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S060) of FIG.

(8-3-1. Game state transition preparation process: FIG. 16)
Next, the gaming state transition preparation process (step S411) will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process of FIG.

  In FIG. 16, the CPU 201 first acquires a big hit determination flag and determines the state of the big hit determination flag (step S431). If the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S431: ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited without doing anything.

  When the big hit determination flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S431: = 5AH), the big hit gaming state transition table selection table (see FIGS. 42 (A) and (B)) is acquired (step S432).

  Next, referring to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step S433). ), Data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (step S434: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in a jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 19) during the special electric utility management process described later, and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). And the counter storage area). When the process of step S434 is completed, the game state transition preparation process is exited and the process proceeds to a special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S412). In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a big win is won is performed, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a small win is won is an electric game management process described later. The small hitting process is performed (see step S504 in FIG. 19).

(T-4-1. Big hit game state transition table selection table: FIG. 42 (a), (b))
42A and 42B show the big hit gaming state transition table selection table. 42 (a) is a jackpot gaming state transition table selection table acquired when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is a number indicating the normal gaming state, and FIG. 42 (b) is a gaming state determination number. It is a jackpot gaming state transition table selection table acquired when (YJ) is a number indicating a short time state. Here, the “gaming state determination number (YJ)” is data for identifying the internal gaming state. Referring to the variation pattern distribution designation number table of FIG. 46, when the gaming state determination number (YJ) is “00H”, “normal gaming state (no electric support state)”, “02H” Indicates “time-short state (state with electric support)”, respectively. Therefore, the game state determination number (YJ) is different from the data for identifying the game state itself, such as the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode), in that it identifies the internal game state as described above.

In FIG. 42 (a), in the case of the normal gaming state (YJ: 00H), the gaming state transition tables (JTTBL-1 to 4, 8) are as follows based on the big hit type (winning type) (big hit 1 to 17). It is set like this.
(1) Jackpot 1, 2, 5, 10: JTTBL-1
(2) Big hit 7: JTTBL-2
(3) Jackpot 8: JTTBL-3
(4) Jackpot 9: JTTBL-4
(5) Big hit 3, 4, 6, 11-17: JTTBL-8
As described above, the relationship between the big hit type and the game state transition table in the normal gaming state also corresponds to the relationship with the number of time reductions set after the big hit game. JTTBL-1 corresponds to JTTBL-1 when the number of time reductions is 95, JTTBL-2 to 4 when the number of time reductions is 3 to 5, and JTTBL-8 when the number of time reductions is not set (0).

In FIG. 42 (b), the game state transition table (JTTBL-1, 5-7) is as follows based on the big hit type (winning type) (big hit 1-17) in the case of the short time state (YJ: 02H). It is set like this.
(1) Jackpot 1, 3, 5-12, 17: JTTBL-1
(2) Jackpot 2, 4, 13, 14: JTTBL-5
(3) Jackpot 15: JTTBL-6
(4) Jackpot 16: JTTBL-7
As described above, the relationship between the jackpot type and the game state transition table in the time saving state also corresponds to the relationship with the number of time savings set after the jackpot game. When the number of time reductions is 95, it corresponds to JTTBL-1, and when the number of time reductions is 3 to 5, it corresponds to JTTBL-5 to 7.

(T-5. Game state transition table: FIG. 45)
FIG. 45 shows the gaming state transition table described above. In the game state transition table of the present embodiment, the game state transition tables “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-” that can be selected in the case of a big hit or per V (a big win started by winning a V during a small hit game). 8 ”and a game state transition table“ JTTBL-9 ”for small hits that can be selected in the case of small hit.

  In these game state transition tables, a plurality of types of data groups for designating game states to be transferred after winning games are defined. Specifically, the utility power release extended transition buffer, normal symbol short transition buffer, special symbol short transition buffer, special power counter counter, special symbol short counter buffer, variation pattern distribution designation number buffer, Various data to be stored in the special symbol fluctuation count counter buffer are defined. In the following, the special electricity number counter buffer and the special symbol short time counter buffer may be collectively referred to as “special symbol time short time counter buffer”. The values stored in these buffers are read at a necessary timing and set in a predetermined flag storage area or a predetermined counter storage area provided in the RAM 203. When various data specified by each game state transition table are stored in each buffer, the game state after the winning game is determined.

  “JTTBL-1” to “JTTBL-8” of the game state transition table for jackpot according to the present embodiment are respectively a time-short state (95 times), a time-short state (3 times), a time-short state (4 times), and a time-short state, respectively. It is a game state transition table for shifting to a state (5 times), a time-short state (3 times), a time-short state (4 times), a time-short state (5 times), and a normal game state. In addition, when the short time state shifted based on this table is ended and the normal gaming state is transferred, or when the normal gaming state is transferred based on this table, CZ can be continuously executed. The role of the various buffers will be described.

(General power utility opening extension transition state buffer)
The “general utility release extension transition state buffer” is used to set a general utility release extension state flag. The “general utility release extension state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the release extension function. When the flag is ON (= 5 AH), The state is “present state”, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the open extension function is inactive and “no electric support” state.

(Normal symbol short transition buffer)
The “normal symbol short time transition state buffer” is used to set a normal symbol short time state flag. The “ordinary symbol short time state flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the normal symbol short time function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the normal symbol short function is not activated and the" normal symbol non-short state ".

(Special symbol short state transition state buffer)
The “special symbol short time state transition state buffer” is used for setting a special symbol short time state flag. The “special symbol time reduction state flag” is a flag for designating the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function. State ", and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the special symbol non-time-short state is inactive.

(Special electricity counter buffer)
The “special power count counter buffer” is used for setting the special power count counter. The above "special electricity counter"
The remaining number of times until the operation of the “Special symbol short-time function” ends, that is, the remaining time until the “Special symbol short-time state” ends, depending on the number of executions of the winning game (small winning game or big winning game) It is a counter for counting the number of times. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 18B).

(Special counter time counter buffer)
The “special-time short-time counter buffer” is used to set a special-time short-time counter. The above “special symbol short time counter” means the number of remaining times until the operation of the “special symbol short time function” is terminated due to the number of times the special symbol fluctuates (the number of executions of the special variation display game). It is a counter for counting the remaining number of times until the end. In the present embodiment, with the end of the special symbol short-time state, the high base gaming state, which is in the state of electrical support, is also ended (see step S481 in FIG. 18B).

(Variation pattern distribution specification number buffer)
The “variation pattern allocation designation number buffer” is used to set a variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode). This “variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)” is game state data for specifying a game state. The variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area of the RAM 203 and is changed based on a predetermined change condition (game state transition condition) (special symbol confirmation time processing (Fig. 18B) steps S481, S486, S490, game state transition preparation processing (see S411 in FIG. 15, S434 in FIG. 16, special electric equipment management processing (FIG. 19), etc.).

(Special symbol variation counter buffer)
The “special symbol variation number counter buffer” is used for setting a special symbol variation number counter. The “special symbol variation counter” is a counter for counting the number of times of variation of a special symbol that is a gaming state transition condition (hereinafter referred to as “the prescribed number of gaming state transitions”). In the special symbol variation number counter of this embodiment, the CZ continuation number is set as the specified game state transition number, and this counter functions as a management means for managing the CZ continuation number.

(8-4. Special symbol variation processing: Fig. 17)
Next, the special symbol changing process (step S307) will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (step S307) of FIG.

  In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed (step S451). If the special symbol accessory action timer is not zero (step S451: NO), the special symbol change time has not yet elapsed, that is, the special symbol is changing. Exit.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S451: YES), a “variation stop command” indicating that the variation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S451). S452). With this change stop command, the effect control unit 24 grasps that the special symbol change display game has ended after the change time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops and displays (decision display) the decorative symbol that is currently being changed. As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game is also terminated along with the termination of the special symbol variation display game.

  Next, as a setting process at the time of stoppage of the special symbol fluctuation, the special symbol determination signal output time (for example, 100 ms) is stored in the special symbol determination timer of the RAM 203, and the fixed display time (for example, 500 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. ), The special symbol operation status is switched to “confirming (03H)” (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special symbol changing flag (step S453). Exit the special symbol change process. The “special symbol determination signal output time” is an extra time for securing the output time of the special symbol determination signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been determined and displayed. It is. The “determined display time” is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the special symbol change display is finished and the special symbol is stopped.

  When the process of step S453 is completed, the special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 in FIG. 12 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special symbol display data update process of FIG. Proceed to the electric accessory management process.

(8-5. Special symbol confirmation time processing (variation stop processing): FIGS. 18A and 18B)
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 18A and 18B are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

  18A and 18B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). The “determined display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S453 in FIG. 23). Until the special symbol accessory action timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory action timer reaches zero (step S471: YES), the special symbol movement status is switched to “standby (01H)”, assuming that the current special symbol fluctuation display game is over (special symbol action). (01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the game state determination number (YJ) corresponding to the current game state is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM 203 (step S473).

  Next, the big hit determination flag is acquired, and the state of the big hit determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the big hit judgment flag is ON)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes when the big hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S475). Here, as various setting processes (pre-start process of the big hit game) at the time of the big hit symbol stop, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the big hit determination flag, 5AH (ON state) is stored in the condition device operation flag, 00H (OFF state) is stored in each of the utility power release extended state flag, normal symbol short state flag, special symbol short state flag, special electricity counter, special symbol short counter, and special symbol fluctuation counter. 00H (normal state designation) is stored in the pattern allocation designation number (Tcode), and 00H is stored in the gaming state notification LED output number for designating turning on / off of the gaming state notification LED (not shown). Exit the process during the symbol confirmation time. The “gaming state notification LED” is state notification means for notifying current game state information. The gaming state notification LED (state notification unit) of the present embodiment is used to notify whether or not the special symbol time-short state is set. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the game state notification LED (state notification means) according to the game state notification LED output number. For example, if the gaming state notification LED output number is “00H”, it means that the current state is not the special symbol short state (gaming state notification LED: off state (non-special symbol short state notification), and “01H”. Now, it is informed that it is in the special symbol short-time state (game state notification LED: lighting state (special symbol short-time state notification).

(When the big hit judgment flag is OFF)
If it is determined in step S474 that the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). . When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), the process proceeds to step S478. When the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S476: = 5 AH), various setting processes when the small hit symbol is stopped are performed (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit determination flag as various setting processes (small hit game start pre-processing) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of the small hit symbol stop are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

  When the processing proceeds to step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining number of special symbol time reduction states) is zero (step S478). If the special time counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything.

  If the special figure short time counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special figure short time counter is decremented by 1 (step S479), and the special figure short time counter after subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not there is (step S480).

  If the special symbol short time counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the special symbol short time state end count has not been reached, and the process proceeds to step S487 without doing anything.

  If the special symbol short-time counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), setting processing at the time short-term end is performed on the assumption that the number of special symbol short-time states has been reached (step S481). Here, 00H (OFF state) is set for each of the utility power release extended state flag, the normal symbol time-short state flag, and the special symbol time-short state flag, and the gaming state notification LED output number as the setting process at the time-short-time end. 00H (non-special symbol time short state designation) is stored. As a result, from the next game, the player is placed in a state without power support.

  When the setting process at the time-short end in step S481 is finished, a “short-time end command” indicating that the special symbol time-short state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command ( Step S482). Since the short end command is transmitted at the end of the current symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 can grasp that the next game is in the “no electric support” state before the next game starts.

  In the present embodiment, since the transition from the power support state to the power support state is a transition from the short time state to the normal state, when the production control unit 24 receives the “short time end command”, for example, When the next decorative symbol variation display game is started, or in advance, the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” is switched. In addition, as the launch position in the “no power support” state, an effect control process is performed for causing a “launch position guidance effect (left-handed notification effect)” to be directed to aim at the left-down flow path 3b. As a result, even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started), the effect mode related to the next symbol variation display game is shifted to. be able to.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step S487, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation number counter is zero, that is, whether or not the gaming state transition specified number (in this embodiment, the CZ continuation number) is zero.

  If the special symbol variation counter is zero (step S487: YES), the special symbol confirmation time is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S487: NO), the special symbol variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S488) as the digest of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is zero. It is determined whether or not (step S489).

  If the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (step S489: NO), it is determined that the game state transition prescribed number has not been reached, and the processing during this special symbol confirmation time is terminated without doing anything.

  If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), the game state transition setting process is performed on the assumption that the special symbol variation number has reached the prescribed game state transition number (step S490: variation pattern change). Minute designation number setting process). Here, a transition setting process of the game state after the CZ continuation count is completed is performed. In the present embodiment, the game state of the transfer destination differs depending on whether the game state at the end of CZ is a normal game state or a short time state. Here, the game state determination number (YJ) is first acquired, and the current internal game state is the normal state (game state determination number (YJ) = 00H) or the short time state (game state determination number (YJ) = 02H). ). If the current internal gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set to “00H” designating the normal state, and if the current internal gaming state is the short-time state, the variation The pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) is set to “03H” designating the time reduction state (see FIG. 46). Thereby, in the next special symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol in the “normal game state” or the “short time state” is selected. This step S490 process functions as a variation pattern selection condition switching means for performing switching control of a variation pattern selection condition (variation pattern selection mode) based on establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Next, a “game state designation command” including the game state information of the transfer destination is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S491). With this “gaming state designation command”, the effect control unit 24 grasps that “CZ” ends in the current symbol variation display game, and the next game becomes “normal gaming state” or “short time state”. Thereby, when starting the next symbol variation display game, the effect control unit 24 controls to switch to the background image (background effect) for the “normal effect mode” or the background image for the “short-time effect mode”. The effect control process under the mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described gaming state designation command is transmitted before the variation pattern designation command relating to the next symbol variation display game is transmitted. For this reason, when receiving such a game state designation command, the production control unit 24 produces an effect for the current production mode before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent. It is possible to switch from (for example, one background display) to another effect mode (for example, another background display). That is, before the variation pattern designation command related to the next symbol variation display game is sent, an effect related to the other variation mode appears, in other words, before the next symbol variation display game, The production related to the production mode can be made to appear. As a result, the player can perform the effects related to the next symbol variation display game even if there is no operation holding ball when the current symbol variation display game ends (when the next symbol variation display game is not started). There is an advantage that the mode can be grasped in advance.

  As described above, when the processing during the special symbol confirmation time is exited, the special symbol display data update processing in step S309 in FIG. 12 is performed, and then the special symbol management processing is exited, and the special electric equipment management in step S060 in FIG. Proceed to processing.

(9. Special electric equipment management process: FIG. 19)
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S060) in FIG. 11 will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S060.

  In FIG. 19, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hitting flag (step S501). When the small hitting flag is ON (= 5AH) (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit for controlling a series of operations of the special variable winning device (open / closed opening / closing control) related to the small hit game. A process is performed (step S504), and this special electric accessory management process is exited.

  If the small hitting flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH) and is not in the big hit game. Exit the special electric property management process.

  When the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S502: = 5AH), processing according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) is performed (step S503: special electric accessory status branching process). . The “special electric accessory operation status” is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable prize winning devices 42 and 52. This status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM 203 is stored. Stored in

  In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, a process corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status value is called and executed. Specifically, when the operation status of the special electric accessory is “starting process (00H)”, the big hit start process (step S505) is performed. In the case where the accessory actuating start process (step S506) is in operation (02H), the special electric accessory actuating process (step S507) is in effect. In the case where the accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508) is “ending process (04H)”, the jackpot end process (step S509) is called and executed. By these processes, the operation of the special variable winning device 52 related to the big hit game is controlled. Here, “being started (00H)” indicates that the player is in a standby state before the jackpot game starts, and “operation start process (01H)” is that the player is in a standby state before starting the round game. “In operation (02H)” indicates that a round game is being executed, and “Continuing determination (03H)” indicates that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. “Big jackpot end process in progress (04H)” indicates that the big hit game is ending. When any of the processes in steps S505 to S509 is completed, the special electric accessory management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-hand notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

  Hereinafter, the big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509) and the small hit process (step S504) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

<Big hit game control processing (steps S505 to S509)>
First, the big hit start process (step S505 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing details of the jackpot start process.

(9-1. Big hit start processing: FIG. 20)
At the start of the big hit game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to “starting process (00H)” of the initial status value. Therefore, when a big hit is made, first, the big hit starting process is performed.

  In FIG. 20, first, the CPU 201 performs a setting process at the time of starting the big hit required when starting the big hit game (step S511: setting process at the time of starting the big hit). Here, as a setting process at the time of starting the big hit, 5 AH (ON state) is stored in the accessory continuous operating device operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation starting process (01H)” (special electric accessory) 01H is stored in the object operation status), and 01H is stored in the continuous number counter. The above-mentioned “actual accessory continuous actuating device operation flag” is a flag for designating the operating state of the accessory continuous actuating device. When the flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), the accessory continuous actuating device is operating. This indicates that the round game can be continued, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it indicates that the accessory continuous operation device is inactive (round game cannot be continued). The “continuous number counter” is a counter for managing the number of continuous executions of the round game, and the current round number is stored here.

  The value stored in the continuous number counter (number of rounds) is a big hit when the special symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a big hit, or per V that is triggered by a V winning in the small hit game It is different depending on the type. If it is the former (in the case of special figure big hit), “01H” indicating that the current round number is 1R is stored, and if it is the latter (in the case of V hit), the current round number is 2R. “02H” is stored. In the case of hitting V, the 1R round game corresponds to a small hit game.

  Next, a jackpot start setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S512), referring to the jackpot start setting table, the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) according to the special symbol determination data (jacket type), The round display LED numbers are stored in the corresponding storage areas of the RAM 203, and the start interval time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S513: setting processing for each special symbol determination data).

(T-6. Big hit start setting table)
In the jackpot start setting table, “special symbol determination data” for identifying the jackpot type and “maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED number” are defined in association with each other. “Maximum number of rounds, start interval time, and round display LED” are determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Here, the “start interval time” refers to the first special variable winning device 42 after the special symbol fixed display time has elapsed and the jackpot has been determined (see step S 471 in FIG. 23, step S 471 in FIG. 26A). This is an interval interval until the second special variable prize-winning device 52 is activated, and indicates a time width (initial effect time before the first round game is performed) in which an opening effect is performed. The “round display LED number” is data specifying the notification mode of the round number display device 39b (round display LED: specified round number notification means), and specifies the maximum number of rounds (specified number of rounds) of this big hit game. To do. The CPU 201 changes the notification mode of the round display LED according to the round display LED number.

Specifically, as shown in the “Opening” column of FIG. 47, the “start interval time” at the time of the big hit is set as follows based on the big hit type and the gaming state (YJ) at the time of winning. .
(1) In the case of big hits 1-4 and 7-17 in the normal gaming state: 11440 ms
(2) For big hits 5 and 6 in the normal gaming state: 21000 ms
(3) Large hits 1-4 and 7-17 in the time-short state: 11440 ms
(4) For big hits 5 and 6 in the short time state: 500 ms

  Also, the “maximum number of rounds” is set to 16 rounds for all jackpot types as shown in the “number of rounds / actual number of rounds” column of FIG. The “number of actual rounds” indicates the number of rounds in which the lower prize winning opening 40 is opened for a long time and a winning ball can be obtained substantially.

  In addition, at the time of winning V (when the V winning flag is ON), the “start interval time” is not provided, 0 ms is set, and the “maximum number of rounds” is the type of the small hit as in the case of the big hit. Regardless, 16 rounds are set.

  When the process of step S513 is completed, a “big hit start command” instructing the start of the opening effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command (step S514). The “hit start command” includes the current jackpot type information and the game status information at the time of the big win, and the production control unit 24 side performs a series of win production modes (opening production, This is used when determining a round effect (a series of hit effect scenarios including a round start effect, an in-round effect, an end effect), an ending effect, and the like.

  As described above, when the big hit start process is exited, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing: FIG. 21)
Next, the special electric accessory activation start process (step S506 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory activation start process.

  In FIG. 21, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S521). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, “interval time before starting round game” is set. As the interval time, in the first round (1R), the “start interval time” set in step S513 in FIG. 27 is monitored, but when passing through this step S521 after the end of the 1R, “Interval time before opening (interval time set in step S575 in FIG. 26 described later)” is monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S521: NO), this special electric accessory operation start processing is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, if the interval time before opening (in the case of the first round, the starting interval time) has elapsed (step S521: YES), the effect is displayed along with the opening operation of the big prize opening. As the control command, a “large winning opening release command” is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S522). This “big winning opening release command (round start command)” includes round game start information (round production start instruction information) and current round number information, and on the production control unit 24 side, a round production corresponding to the number of rounds. It is used when making it appear.

  Next, a special winning opening operating time setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S523), and a special winning opening operating time setting process is performed (step S524). In this special winning opening opening time setting process, the special winning opening operation time corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds is referred to the special winning opening operation time setting table. To store.

(T-7. Grand prize opening operating time setting table)
The big winning opening operating time setting table defines the special winning opening opening operation time associated with the special symbol determination data and the current number of rounds. The special symbol determining data (big hit type) and the current round number Depending on whether or not, the opening operation time of the big prize opening is determined.

  Specifically, regarding the “big winning opening opening operation time” at the time of big hit, “opening” in the “1R (right big winning opening) character lottery” item of FIG. 47, “2R-16R (Shimodai) Based on the winning category, as shown in the “Open” section in the “Open at the time of winning a prize opening” item and “Open” in the “At the time of short opening of the 2R-16R (Shimodai winning opening)” item. It is set as follows.

(1) In case of big hit 1, 2, 7-10: 60ms (1R), 28500ms (2-6R), 60ms (7-16R)
(2) For big hits 3 and 4: 60 ms (1R), 28500 ms (2 to 11 R), 60 ms (12 to 16 R)
(3) For big hit 5: 1600ms (1R), 28500ms (2-6R), 60ms (7-16R)
(4) For big hit 6: 1600ms (1R), 28500ms (2-11R), 60ms (12-16R)
(5) For big hits 11 and 12: 60ms (1R), 28500ms (2-16R)
(6) For big hits 13-17: 60ms (1R), 28500ms (2-5R), 60ms (6-16R)

In addition, for “Various winning opening opening operation time” at the time of V, “Opening during long opening of 2R to 16R (Lower winning opening)” and “2R to 16R (Lower winning opening) of FIG. 48 are shown. As shown in the column of “Open during long open”, the following is set based on the winning type. Note that the opening operation time at the time of the small hit corresponding to the 1Rth is set in the small hit processing (step S504).
(1) In the case of 1, 2, 5, 6 per unit: 28500ms (2-6R eyes), 60ms (7-16R eyes)
(2) In the case of 3 or 4 big hits: 28500ms (2-11R eyes), 60ms (12-16R eyes)
(3) In case of big hit 7, 8: 28500ms (2-16R eyes)
(4) In case of 9-14 in the big hit: 28500ms (2-5R eyes), 60ms (6-16R eyes)

  Next, 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the special winning opening winning number counter (step S525). The “large winning opening winning number counter” is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of winning balls in the lower large winning opening 40 or the right large winning opening 50.

  Next, a special winning opening / closing operation setting process is performed (step S526). In this special winning opening / closing operation setting process, solenoid control data for the special winning opening solenoid 42c or the special winning opening solenoid 52c is created and set. With this data, the opening / closing operation pattern of the lower major prize opening 40 or the right major prize opening 50 is designated. Further, here, a “special electric accessory N operation flag (N = 1, 2)” is set for designating whether or not the special variable winning device that is controlled to open and close is in operation.

  The “special electric accessory 1 operation flag” is a flag used to determine whether or not the first special variable winning device 42 is operating, and the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH). Indicates that the first special variable winning device 42 is in operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the first special variable winning device 42 is inactive. Indicates. The “special electric accessory 2 operation flag” is a flag used to determine whether or not the second special variable winning device 52 is in operation, and the flag is in an ON state (= 5 AH). Indicates that the second special variable winning device 52 is in operation, and when the flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), the second special variable winning device 52 is inactive. Indicates. Note that the period during which the flag is ON (= 5 AH) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable prize winning device is in operation, is after the grand prize opening is closed and then the special prize winning opening is closed. This is a period until the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) elapses. On the other hand, during the period in which the flag is OFF (= 00H) between round games, that is, the period during which the special variable winning device is not in operation, the next round game is performed after the above-mentioned remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. It is a period in the interval time (20 ms) until the start. Note that if a special prize is generated at the special winning opening while the special electric accessory N operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), it is regarded as an illegal winning and a predetermined error processing (large winning opening illegal winning error) is executed. It has come to be.

  When the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process in step S526 is completed, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status) (step S527).

  As described above, when the special electric accessory activation start process is finished, the process proceeds to the right-hand notification information management process in step S061 of FIG.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory: FIG. 22)
Next, the special electric accessory operating process (step S507 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operating process.

  In FIG. 22, the CPU 201 first performs a large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S551). In the big winning opening maximum winning number confirming process, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening relating to the current big hit game is mainly counted, and it is confirmed whether or not the number of winning balls has reached the maximum winning number. The details of the large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the big winning opening maximum winning number confirmation processing in step S551 is completed, the big winning opening opening / closing operation setting processing is performed (step S552). The special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process here is the same as the special winning opening opening / closing operation setting process (step S526) during the special electric accessory activation start process of FIG. Description is omitted.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S553). Since the special winning symbol action timer is set with the special winning opening operation time, the determination process of step S533 determines whether or not the special winning action operation time has elapsed. Become. Until the special symbol accessory operating timer becomes zero (step S553: NO), the special electric accessory operating process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol feature action timer reaches zero (elapsed time for opening the big prize opening operation time) (step S553: YES), a "round end command" is produced, assuming that the big prize opening in this round game is closed. It transmits to the control part 24 (step S554). The “round end command” is used when the “round end effect” appears during the interval time between round games on the effect control unit 24 side.

  Next, various setting processes when the round game ends are performed (step S555). Here, as various setting processes at the end of the round game, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Continuing judgment (03H)” (03H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status), and the special symbol accessory operation timer is set. The remaining ball discharge time (for example, 1480 ms) is stored.

  In this embodiment, the remaining ball discharge time set after each round game is described as the same time width (1480 ms), but the present invention is not limited to this. Since the remaining ball discharge time is determined as an allowance time for discharging the remaining balls in the big prize opening after the big prize opening is closed, the internal structure of the big prize opening (for example, the right big prize opening sensor) This is necessary until the right big prize opening sensor 52a detects a gaming ball (or until the gaming ball is discharged to the outside from the big prize opening) in consideration of the maximum path length until 52a detects the gaming ball. The time width that allows for the maximum time is set. However, in one big hit game, when the round game is controlled to a plurality of types of operation modes according to the number of rounds, or when different big prize opening is controlled according to the number of rounds, It may be configured such that different remaining ball discharge times are set by paying attention to the operation mode. For example, paying attention to the fact that the winning rate to the big prize opening is relatively low during the round game related to the short opening time, the game balls are frequently bitten by the open / close doors 42b and 52b and the number of gaming balls in the big prize opening Since congestion is not expected, the remaining ball discharge time having a relatively shorter time width than that during the round game related to the long open time may be used.

  As described above, when the special electric accessory operating process is exited, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(9-3-1. Number of winning prizes confirmation process: FIG. 23)
Next, the process for confirming the number of winning prizes (step S551 in FIG. 22) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing details of the big prize opening number confirmation process.

  In FIG. 23, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the special electric accessory 2 operation flag (step S561). If the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H), then the state of the special electric accessory 1 operation flag is determined (step S562). When both the special electric accessory 2 operation flag and the special electric accessory 1 operation flag are in the OFF state (= 00H) (step S561: ≠ 5AH and step S562: ≠ 5AH), that is, the first special fluctuation If the winning device 42 is not in operation and the second special variable winning device 52 is not in operation, the process exits the maximum winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process without doing anything. The “when the first special variable winning device 42 is not in operation and the second special variable winning device 52 is not in operation” during the big hit game is during the pre-opening interval time.

  When the special electric accessory 2 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S561: = 5AH), the right big prize winning number confirmation process (step S568) is executed. This right large winning opening winning number confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the special electric accessory 1 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S562: = 5 AH), it is determined whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the lower large winning opening 40 (step S563). A winning (winning ball) to the lower large winning opening 40 is detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 42a. If no winning (winning ball) is detected at the lower major winning opening 40 (step S563: NO), nothing is done without doing anything, and the process for confirming the number of winning prizes is terminated.

  When a winning is detected at the lower major winning opening 40 (step S563: YES), a normal winning command transmission process is performed (step S564). In this normal winning command transmission process, the “large winning opening winning command 1” is transmitted as the normal large winning opening winning command for designating that the lower large winning opening 40 has been won. The effect control unit 24 performs a winning effect process corresponding to the normal winning award winning command according to the normal winning award winning command.

  It should be noted that the determination of whether to send the command for the big prize winning prize command 1 can be made based on the detection information of the lower big prize winning mouth sensor 42a. Specifically, when a detection is made by the lower major prize opening sensor 42a, the 'large prize opening prize command 1' can be transmitted. In addition, based on the setting state of the special electric accessory actuating flag, it is possible to determine which normal big prize winning prize command is to be transmitted. Specifically, when the special electric accessory 1 operation flag is in the ON state (= 5 AH), since the first special variable winning device 42 is in operation, the “large winning opening winning command 1” is transmitted.

  During the process of confirming the maximum number of winning prizes, the “normal winning mouth winning command for normal use” corresponding to each winning prize is displayed for each winning prize until the number of winnings at the lower winning prize opening 40 reaches the maximum winning number. Is transmitted (the processing route of 'step S563: YES to S566: NO'). In addition, since over winning is a winning when the maximum number of winnings is exceeded, it is monitored in the large winning mouth winning number confirmation process that monitors the winning balls until reaching the maximum winning number that does not become the over winning. It is not a winning ball.

  When the normal winning command transmission process is completed, the lower large winning opening winning counter corresponding to the lower large winning opening 40 in which the winning is detected is incremented by 1 (step S565: large winning opening winning counter adding process).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory operation status is “operating (02H)” (step S566a). When the determination result is “operating (02H)” (step S566a: = operating (02H)), whether or not the right big prize winning prize counter after the addition has reached the maximum number (for example, 9) Is determined (step S566b). If the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S566b: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer (large winning mouth operating time) is cleared (step S567), and the winning prize winning number confirming process is exited.

  On the other hand, if the operation status of the special electric accessory is not “operating (02H)” (step S566a: ≠ operating (02H)) or if the maximum number of winnings has not been reached (step S566b: NO), nothing is done. Then, the process of confirming the number of winning prizes is completed.

  As described above, when the winning prize opening number confirmation process is terminated, the process proceeds to the winning opening / closing operation setting process in step S552 of FIG.

(9-3-2. Right large prize winning number confirmation process: FIG. 24)
Next, the right large winning opening maximum winning number confirmation process (step S568 in FIG. 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing details of the right large winning opening winning number confirmation process.

  In FIG. 24, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the right big winning opening 50 based on whether or not it is detected by the sensor SW1 (step S621). If there is no detection by the sensor SW1 (step S621: NO), step S627 is executed.

  When the detection by the sensor SW1 is made (step S621: YES), a normal winning command transmission process is performed (step S622). In this normal winning command transmission process, a “large winning opening winning command 2” is transmitted as a normal large winning opening winning command designating that the right large winning opening 50 has been won. The effect control unit 24 performs a winning effect process corresponding to the normal winning award winning command according to the normal winning award winning command.

  When the normal winning command transmission process is completed, the right large winning opening winning counter corresponding to the right large winning opening 50 in which the winning is detected is incremented by 1 (step S623: counter adding process). In this process, 1 is added to the right big prize exit discharge confirmation counter. This “right big prize opening discharge confirmation counter” is a counter provided in the RAM 203 for counting the number of game balls staying in the right big prize opening 50.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory operation status is “operating (02H)” (step S624). When the determination result is “operating (02H)” (step S624: YES), it is determined whether or not the right large winning opening winning counter after the addition has reached the maximum number of winning (for example, 4) ( Step S625). If the maximum number of winnings has been reached (step S625: YES), the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S626).

  On the other hand, if the operation status of the special electric accessory is not “operating (02H)” (step S624: NO), and if the maximum number of winnings has not been reached (step S625: NO), step S627 is executed.

  In step S627, it is determined whether or not the sensor SW2 has detected. If there is no detection by the sensor SW2 (step S627: NO), step S629 is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is detection by the sensor SW2 (step S627: YES), a V-chance winning command transmission process is performed (step S628). In this V-chance winning command transmission process, a “V-chance command” is transmitted as a command. In response to this command, the effect control unit 24 performs an effect process for executing an effect in which the game ball flowing down in the right big prize winning opening 50 may pass through the V region.

  In step S629, it is determined whether or not there is detection by the sensor SW3. If there is no detection by the sensor SW3 (step S629: NO), step S633 is executed.

  On the other hand, if there is detection by the sensor SW3 (step S629: YES), that is, if the game ball passes through the V region, a V winning prize command transmission process is performed (step S630). In the V winning prize command transmission process, a “V winning command” is transmitted as a command. In response to this command, the effect control unit 24 performs an effect process for executing an effect of notifying that the game ball flowing down in the right big prize opening 50 has passed through the V region.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the right big prize opening discharge confirmation counter (step S631), and a V winning time setting process is executed (step S632). Details of the V winning time setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S633, it is determined whether or not there is detection by the sensor SW4 (or sensor SW5). If there is no detection by the sensor SW4 (step S633: NO), the process exits the right big prize winning number confirmation process without doing anything. On the other hand, if there is detection by the sensor SW4 (step S633: YES), that is, if the game ball won in the right big prize opening 50 does not pass through the V region, a discharging winning command transmission process is performed (step S634). . In this payout winning command transmission process, a “discharge command” is transmitted as a command. In response to this command, the effect control unit 24 performs an effect process for executing an effect of notifying that the game ball flowing down in the right big prize opening 50 is discharged without passing through the V region.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the right big prize winning exit confirmation counter (step S6345. When the game ball won in the right big prize winning opening 50 is discharged, the V winning is detected by the sensor SW3, and the V winning is not won. Is detected by the sensor SW 4. Therefore, when all of the game balls won in the right big prize opening 50 are discharged, the right big prize opening discharge confirmation counter becomes 0 in either the process of step S631 or step S635. The interval time is set when this right big prize exit discharge confirmation counter becomes zero.

(9-3-3. V winning setting process: FIG. 25)
Next, the V winning time setting process (step S632 in FIG. 24) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing details of the V winning setting process.

  In FIG. 25, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (= 00H) (≠ 5AH) (step S641). If the condition device operation flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S641: NO), in this case, since it is a big hit game, the V winning prize setting process is exited without doing anything.

  On the other hand, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (≠ 5AH) (step S641: YES), flag setting processing is performed (step S642). In this flag setting process, the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (= 5 AH), and the V winning flag is set to the ON state (= 5 AH). This “V winning flag” is a flag that specifies that a V winning is made during the small hit game, and is a flag that is used to specify whether or not the V winning is made a big win in the processing during the big hit game. It is. Further, the “V winning flag” is set to an OFF state (= 00H) at the start of the small hit game.

  Next, the V winning game state transition table selection table (see FIGS. 43A and 43B) is acquired (step S643). With reference to the acquired gaming state transition table selection table, a gaming state transition table (see FIG. 45) corresponding to the gaming state determination number (YJ) and the jackpot type (special symbol determination data) is acquired (step 644), Data determined in the gaming state transition table is stored in various buffers described later (step S645: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these buffers are read out in a jackpot end process (step S509 in FIG. 19) during the special electric utility management process described later, and are stored in predetermined storage areas of the RAM 203 (flag storage areas corresponding to the respective buffers). And the counter storage area). In this game state transition preparation process, a setting process related to a game state transition when a V winning is made during a small hit game, and a setting process related to a game state transition when a V winning is not made during a small hit game. Is performed in a small hit end process (see step S616 in FIG. 29) described later.

(T-4-2. V winning game state transition table selection table for winning a prize: FIG. 43 (a), (b))
43 (a) and 43 (b) show the game state transition table selection table for small hits acquired when winning V. FIG. 43 (a) is a number indicating a normal gaming state as a gaming state determination number (YJ), and is a small hit gaming state transition table selection table acquired when winning V, FIG. 43 (b) The gaming state determination number (YJ) is a number indicating a short-time state, and is a gaming state transition table selection table for small hits acquired when winning V.

In FIG. 43 (a), the game state transition table (JTTBL-) is based on the small hit type (winning type) (small wins 1 to 14) in the case of the V winning and the normal game state (YJ: 00H). 1 and 8) are set as follows.
(1) 1, 2, 5 per unit: JTTBL-1
(2) Small hit 3, 4, 6-14: JTTBL-8
As described above, the relationship between the small hit type and the game state transition table in the normal game state at the time of winning the V game also corresponds to the relationship with the number of short times set after the game per V game. When the number of time reductions is 95, it corresponds to JTTBL-1, and when the number of time reductions is not set (0), it corresponds to JTTBL-8.

Further, in FIG. 43 (b), in the case of a V winning time and a short time state (YJ: 02H), the gaming state transition table (JTTBL-) is based on the small hit type (winning type) (small wins 1 to 14). 1, 5-7) are set as follows.
(1) Small hit 1, 3, 5-8, 14: JTTBL-1
(2) Small hit 2, 4, 10, 11: JTTBL-5
(3) Small hit 12: JTTBL-6
(4) Small hit 13: JTTBL-7
As described above, the relationship between the small hit type and the game state transition table in the time-short state at the time of winning V corresponds to the relationship with the number of short-time times set after the game per V. When the number of time reductions is 95, it corresponds to JTTBL-1, and when the number of time reductions is 3 to 5, it corresponds to JTTBL-5 to 7.

(9-4. Special electric equipment operation continuation determination process: FIG. 26)
Next, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process (step S508 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process.

  In FIG. 26, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S570). In this special symbol accessory operation timer, since the remaining ball discharge time set after the transition to the closing of the big prize opening is set (see step S555 in FIG. 22), in the determination process of step S570, the remaining ball discharge is performed. It is determined whether time has passed.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer is not zero (step S570: NO), a “large winning mouth winning number confirmation process” for confirming the winning ball of the big winning mouth within the remaining ball discharge time is performed (step S581). This large winning opening winning number confirmation process is the process described with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (remaining ball discharge time has elapsed) (step S570: YES), it is determined whether or not the right big prize exit discharge confirmation counter is zero (step S571). . If the right big prize opening discharge confirmation counter is zero (step S571: YES), that is, if no game ball is left in the right big prize opening 50, next, step S572 is executed. On the other hand, if the right big prize opening discharge confirmation counter is not zero (step S571: NO), that is, if a game ball is left in the right big prize opening 50, the winning ball of the big prize opening within the remaining ball discharge time will be shown. “Large winning mouth winning number confirmation process” is performed to confirm (step S581). In addition, since the process of this step S571 is a process which determines the counter regarding the right big prize opening 50, when the lower big prize opening 40 is opened and closed, this process is skipped and the next S572 is executed. .

  Next, a continuous number counter is acquired to determine whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds) of the specified number of rounds (step S572).

  If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached (step S572: NO), the processing at the later-described steps S573 to S576 (round continuation processing) is performed as processing when the round game is continued. However, when the maximum number of rounds has been reached (step S572: YES), processing at steps S577 to S580 (round continuation end processing) is performed as processing at the time of ending the round game.

(Round continuation processing: steps S573 to S576)
When the current number of rounds has not reached the maximum number of rounds (step S572: NO), the processing route of steps S573 to S576 is performed as the round game continuation processing.

  First, in the process of step S573, 1 is added to the continuous number counter (+1) by the end of the current round game (step S573).

  Next, a special electric accessory end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S574). With reference to the special electric accessory end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the continuous counter after the addition are obtained. The corresponding “interval before opening” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S575).

(T-8. Special electric accessory end interval setting table)
The pre-release interval time associated with the special symbol determination data (big hit type) and the continuous number counter is defined in the special electric accessory end interval setting table. Specifically, the pre-release interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data and the current value of the continuous number counter (the continuous number counter value after the addition processing in step S573: the next round number). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, “INT” in the “1R (right big prize opening) character lottery” item, “INT” in the “2R-16R (lower big prize opening) long open” item in FIG. ”, And“ INT ”in the“ 2R to 16R (Shimodai prize opening) short opening ”item, the interval time before opening basically set after each round game is basically Although it is the same 20 ms, only the end interval time of the first round for the big hits 5 and 6 (interval time before opening of the second round) is 62500 ms.

  During the interval before opening, the special electric accessory operation flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S576 described later. Accordingly, the pre-opening interval time is a large winning opening prize invalid period in which the winning at the big winning opening is invalid (an illegal winning monitoring period during the big hit). There is no particular limitation on the interval time before opening, but since it is provided as an interval time between round games including the remaining ball discharge time (1480 ms in this embodiment), the time is set to an extremely long time, for example, about several seconds. If this happens, the waiting time between round games increases and the player feels annoying. In particular, in a big hit game with a substantial round number of 15R, the total waiting time between round games is as long as several tens of seconds to nearly 1 minute, which is not preferable.

  Therefore, the interval time before opening in this embodiment is set to a short time of 20 ms. This is because when the game ball actually enters the winning opening and the ON signal of the winning detection switch is output, the output time (signal duration) is the longest although the rolling time of the winning ball is long or short. This is in consideration of about 20 ms. Goto action (for example, goto action (selgoto) aiming at excessive prizes using plastic plates or piano wires at the big prize opening, or fraudulent persons misoperating the switch using illegal equipment (illegal radio transmitters, magnets, etc.) It is expected that ON signals from the large winning opening sensors 42a and 52a are frequently output when there is an illegal continuous winning due to a goto action that is activated to aim for excessive winning. Therefore, it is considered that there is no problem in monitoring illegal winnings between round games even if the interval time before opening is set to about 20 ms which is a proper ON signal signal duration.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 26 again, when the process of step S575 is completed, various setting processes for continuing the round are performed (step S576). Here, as a setting process for starting the next round game after the end of the current round game, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “operation start process”. “Middle (01H)” (01H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  When the above steps S573 to S576 (round continuation process) are completed, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited, and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

(Round continuation end processing: steps S577 to S580)
On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds (step S572: YES), the processing route of steps S577 to S580 is performed as round continuation termination processing.

  First, in the process of step S577, an accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is acquired (step S577), and this accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table (not shown) is referred to. Then, the “end interval time” corresponding to the special symbol determination data and the added continuous number counter is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer (step S578).

(T-9. Actor continuous operation device operation end interval setting table)
In the above-mentioned accessory continuous operation device operation end interval setting table, the special symbol determination data and the end interval time are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the end interval time is determined according to the special symbol determination data (big hit type). Is to be decided. This “end interval time” is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and is a time that defines the section in which the ending effect is performed Refers to the width. During the end interval time, the special electric accessory actuating flag is set to the OFF state (= 00H) in the process of step S579 described later. Accordingly, during the end interval time, as in the interval time before opening, it becomes a large winning opening prize invalid period in which winning to the big winning opening is invalidated.

  Specifically, the “end interval time” at the time of big hit is set as follows based on the winning type and the gaming state (YJ) at the time of winning, as shown in the “Ending” column of FIG. .

(1) In the case of big hit 1, 2, 5, 7-10 in the normal gaming state: 2420 ms
(2) In case of big hit 3, 4, 6 in normal gaming state: 3220 ms
(3) For big hits 11 and 12 in the normal gaming state: 18020 ms
(4) In the case of a big hit 13-17 in the normal gaming state: 100 m
(5) In the case of big hit 1, 2, 5, 7-10 in the short time state: 1420 ms
(6) In case of big hit 3, 4, 6 in time-short state: 3220 ms
(7) For big hits 11 and 12 in the short-time state: 11020 ms
(8) Big hit 13-17 in the time-short state: 100 m

Further, at the time of hitting V, the “end interval time” is set as follows based on the winning type and the gaming state (YJ) at the time of winning, as shown in the “Ending” column of FIG. .
(1) In the case of 1, 2, 5 per unit in the normal gaming state: 2420 ms
(2) In the case of 3, 4, 6 per small hit in the normal gaming state: 3220 ms
(3) In the case of 7 or 8 per unit in the normal gaming state: 18020 ms
(4) In the case of 9-14 small hits in the normal gaming state: 100 m
(5) In the case of 1, 2, and 5 per minute in the short time state: 1420 ms
(6) For small hits 3, 4, and 6 in the short time state: 3220 ms
(7) For small hits 7 and 8 in the short time state: 11020 ms
(8) Big hit 9-14 in the short time state: 100m

  When the process of step S578 is completed, various setting processes at the end of the round are performed (step S579). Here, as the setting process when reaching the maximum round, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “ending process (04H)” (special electric accessory) 04H is stored in the operation status).

  Next, a “big hit end command” instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S580). This "hit end command" includes information regarding the current jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, that is, information that can specify the gaming state (including the internal gaming state) after the jackpot game is finished. It is also used when determining the effect mode after the big hit game on the control unit 24 side. Therefore, this “hit end command” has a role as a game state designation command for designating a game state since it can specify a game state after the end of the big hit game in addition to the role of instructing the start of the ending effect. Yes. The effect control unit 24 determines the effect mode based on the information included in the jackpot end command so that the game state after the jackpot end can be matched with the effect mode related to the game state. It has become.

  In addition, the information that can specify the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit may include information on the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode) or information on the variation pattern allocation designation number and information on the internal gaming state. it can. The jackpot end command may be a single command or a plurality of commands. In the case of a plurality of commands, for example, information that makes it possible to specify the current jackpot type in one jackpot end command, and information that makes it possible to specify the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot in another jackpot end command These commands can be transmitted simultaneously or sequentially to the effect control unit 24 at a necessary timing. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of types of information are included in the effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24, the information may be included in a single effect control command and transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The effect control unit is divided into an effect control command including one information and an effect control command including other information, and the role of the single effect control command is divided into a plurality of effect control commands. It is good also as a structure which transmits to 24.

As described above, when the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is finished, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.
(9-5. Big hit end processing: FIG. 27)
Next, the big hit ending process (step S509 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the big hit end process.

  In FIG. 27, the CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the above-described end interval time is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined whether or not the end interval time has elapsed in the determination process of step S591. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

  If the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), it is set in the game state transition preparation process (step S411 in FIG. 15) as part of various settings at the end of the big hit. The values of the respective transition state buffers are stored in the respective state flags and counters shown (step S592). Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit game is designated.

  Subsequently, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are performed (step S593). Here, the various flags and buffers shown in the figure are cleared to zero (stores 00H) as various data used during the big hit game control process. Then, the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “Starting process (00H)” (00H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  Note that the special symbol determination data is not subject to clearing because it is used for final display on the special symbol display device until the symbol variation display game is started after the big hit game. The special symbol determination data is stored in the RAM 203 (special symbol determination) when the special symbol creation processing (step S410 in FIG. 15) during the special symbol variation start processing is performed after the current big hit game ends. There is no problem because the data storage area) is overwritten.

  Next, a game state notification information update process for updating the game state notification information is performed (step S594). In the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not it is in the special figure short time state by the gaming state notification LED, in the game state notification information update process, the special symbol short time state flag is in the ON state (= 5AH) or in the OFF state. Whether or not (≠ 5AH) is confirmed, and in the case of the ON state, a predetermined gaming state notification LED output number for designating the special state short time state is stored as data for lighting the gaming state notification LED.

  Thus, a series of control processes related to the big hit game is completed. After exiting the big hit end process, the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process of step S061 in FIG.

<Small hit game control processing: FIGS. 28 and 29>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the small hit game control process will be described.

(9-6. Small hit processing: FIG. 28)
First, the small hit process (step S504 in FIG. 19) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the small hit processing.

  In FIG. 28, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the operation status of the special electric accessory is “in operation (02H)” or “during continuation determination (03H)” (step S601).

  If the operation status of the special electric accessory is not “operating (02H)” and “continuing determination (03H)” (step S601: ≠ 02H and ≠ 03H), the process proceeds to the determination process of step S603, and the special electric accessory When the operation status is “Active (02H)” or “Continuing determination (03H)” (Step S601: = 02H or = 03H), the right big prize winning number confirmation process is performed (Step S602). ), The process proceeds to step S603. The right big prize winning number confirmation process in step S602 is the same process as the right big prize winning number confirmation process in FIG. 24, and thus detailed description is omitted to avoid duplication.

  When the processing proceeds to step S603, it is determined whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S603). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the determination process of step S606. If the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: YES), a small hit medium command transmission process is performed (step S604). In this small hit command transmission process, an effect control command corresponding to the special electric accessory operation status is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. Specifically, when the special electric accessory operation status is in the process of starting (00H), a “small hit start command” for instructing the start of an OP effect during the small hit game is being continuously determined (03H) Transmits a “small hit end command” instructing the start of the ED effect during the small hit. Further, when it is in operation (02H), that is, when the right big prize opening 50 is closed, a “right big prize opening closing command” instructing the fact is transmitted. Otherwise, the process exits without sending anything.

  When the small hit command transmission process of step S604 is completed, the process enters the special electric accessory operation status process (step S605). Here, processing according to the special electric accessory operation status is performed. Details of the special electric accessory operation status processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing for each special electric accessory operation status in step S605 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory operation status is “Active (02H)” (step S606).

  If the operation status of the special electric accessory is not “operating (02H)” (step S606: ≠ 02H), the small hit process is exited without doing anything.

  When the operation status of the special electric accessory is “in operation (02H)” (step S606: = 02H), a special prize opening / closing operation setting process is performed (step S607). In this special winning opening / closing operation setting process, a small hit opening / closing operation setting table is acquired, a special symbol accessory operation timer is acquired, and then a solenoid setting process is performed. This solenoid setting processing is similar to the solenoid setting processing in the special winning opening / closing operation setting processing (step S524) in the special electric accessory operation start processing of FIG. The opening / closing operation of (right big prize opening 50) is controlled.

  Also, in this special winning opening / closing operation setting process, various types of accessories related to the passage of a specific area in the right large winning opening are also controlled based on the corresponding table.

(T-10. Small hit opening / closing operation setting table)
In the above-described small hitting opening / closing operation setting table, a data group necessary for designating the opening pattern of the big prize opening relating to the small hitting game is determined, and the opening pattern corresponding to the special symbol determination data (small hitting type) Is to be decided.

  Specifically, the “opening pattern” is a pattern in which the right big winning opening 50 is opened once from the beginning to the end in the following “big winning opening operating time (1600 ms)” regardless of the small hit type. .

  In addition, the control of various objects relating to the passage of a specific area in the right prize winning opening is defined as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55.

  When the big winning opening / closing operation setting process at step S607 is completed, the small hit process is exited and the process proceeds to the right-handed notification information management process at step S61 in FIG.

(9-7. Processing by operation status of special electric accessory: FIG. 29)
Next, the process according to the special electric accessory operation status (step S605 in FIG. 28) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory operation status processing.

  In FIG. 29, the CPU 201 first determines whether the special electric accessory operation status branching process (step S611) is in the process of starting (00H) to ending (04H). Branch processing. If the special electric accessory operation status is in the start process (00H), the small hit start process (step S612) is performed. If the operation start process is in the process (01H), the small hit special electric accessory operation start process (step S613) is performed. In the case of operation (03H), the small hit special electric accessory operating process (step S614), in the case of continuation determination (04H), the small hit continuation determination process (step S615), and the end process (04H) In this case, the small hit end processing (S616) is performed.

(9-7-1. Small hit start process: Step S612)
When the small hit game is started, the operation status of the special electric accessory is “being started (00H)”. Therefore, in the special electric accessory operation status-specific process, the CPU 201 first starts the small hit process in step S612. In this small hitting start processing, the “pre-operation interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “operation start processing (01H)” (to the special electric accessory operation status). 01H is stored).

  The “pre-operation interval time” is an interval interval from when the final display time of step S453 in FIG. 17 has elapsed and the small hit is determined until the operation of the second special variable winning device 52 actually starts. Thus, it refers to a time width that defines a section in which an OP (opening) effect is performed.

Specifically, the “pre-operation interval time” at the time of a small hit is as follows based on the small hit type and the gaming state (YJ) at the time of winning as shown in the “Opening” column of FIG. Is set.
(1) In the case of 1 to 4 and 7 to 14 in a normal gaming state: 17000 ms
(2) In the case of 5, 6 per unit in the normal gaming state: 21000 ms
(3) In the case of 1 to 14 small hits in the short time state: 500 ms

(9-7-2. Small hit special electric accessory operation start processing: Step S613)
When the pre-operation interval time elapses (step S603 in FIG. 28: YES) and the processing by special electric accessory operation status is entered, the special electric accessory operation status is “being activated (01H)”. For this reason, the CPU 201 performs the small hit special electric accessory activation start process in step S613. In this small hit special electric accessory operation start processing, 00H is stored (cleared to zero) in the big prize opening prize counter, the big winning opening operation time is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is stored. Is switched to “in operation (02H)” (02H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status). It should be noted that the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, until the special winning combination opening operation time elapses or until the maximum winning number is reached and the special symbol accessory operation timer is cleared (step S602 in FIG. 28, step S603: NO). ), The process of step S607 (FIG. 28) is performed, and the right big prize opening 50 is controlled to be opened.

  Specifically, the “big winning opening operating time” at the time of the small hit is, as shown in the “open” in the item of “the lottery (right big winning prize)” of FIG. Regardless, it is set to 1600 ms.

(9-7-3. Small hitting special electric accessory in operation: step S614)
When the above special winning opening operating time has elapsed or the maximum number of winnings has been reached, the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: YES), and the special electric accessory operation status processing is entered. Since the accessory operation status is “operation starting process (02H)”, the CPU 201 performs the small hit special electric accessory operating process in step S614. In this small hit special electric accessory operating process, the remaining ball discharge time (1480 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operating timer, and the special electric accessory operating status is switched to “continuing determination (03H)” (special electric 03H is stored in the accessory operation status).

(9-7-4. Small hit continuation determination process: step S615)
When the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed and all the game balls have been discharged from the right big prize opening 50, the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603: YES in FIG. 28), and the special electric accessory When the operation status-specific processing is entered, the operation status of the special electric accessory is “continuing determination (03H)”, and therefore the CPU 201 performs the small hit continuation determination processing in step S615. In the small hit continuation determination process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the special electric accessory operation flag, “small hit end interval time” is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric accessory operation status is set to “ “End process (04H)” is switched (04H is stored in the special electric accessory operation status).

  Here, the “small hit end interval time” is an interval time after the right big winning opening 50 is closed and the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and it depends on whether or not a V win is won during the small hit game. The width is different. When winning V, the second round of game per V starts after the small hit game ends, so this “small hit end interval time” corresponds to the “interval time before start of round” and is set as follows: The Further, when the V prize is not won, it indicates an interval interval until the end of the small hit game, and the interval in which the ED effect is performed is set and is set as follows.

Specifically, regarding the “small hit end interval time” at the time of small hit, as shown in the column “INT” in the ““ Lottery lottery (right big prize opening) ”item of FIG. The following is set based on the small hit type.
(1) In the case of 1 to 4, 7 to 14 per unit: 15000 ms
(2) In the case of 5, 6 per unit: 21000 ms

Specifically, regarding the “small hit end interval time” at the time of the small hit, as shown in the “Ending” column of FIG. 48, when the V winning is not made, the small hit type and the gaming state at the time of winning (YJ ) And is set as follows.
(1) In the case of 1 to 4, 7 to 14 in a normal gaming state: 9000 ms
(2) In the case of 5, 6 per unit in the normal gaming state: 34500 ms
(3) In the case of 1 to 14 small hits in the short time state: 5000 ms

(9-7-5. Small hit end processing: Step S616)
When the small hit end interval time elapses, the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S603 in FIG. 28: YES), and when the special electric accessory operation status processing is entered, the special electric accessory operation status is Since it is “ending process (04H)”, the CPU 201 performs the small hit end process in step S616. In this small hitting end process, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hitting flag as various setting processes at the end of the small hitting, and the special electric accessory operation status is switched to “starting process (00H)” (special 00H is stored in the operation status of the electric accessory).

Further, in this small hit end process, only when the V winning is not made during the small hit game, the special electric number counter 1 is decremented, and the small hit game state transition preparation process is performed. When the small hit game state transition preparation process ends, a series of control processes related to the small hit game is completed.
(9-8. Game state transition preparation process for small hits)
Next, the small hit game state transition preparation process will be described.

  In the small hit game state transition preparation process, a setting process for specifying the game state after the small hit game is performed in order to specify the game state after the small hit game. Specifically, a small hit gaming state transition table selection table (FIG. 44) is acquired. Whether or not to acquire the gaming state transition table “JTTBL-9” based on the gaming state at the time of winning and the small winning type (special symbol determination data) with reference to the gaming state transition table selection table for winning To decide. If acquired, the game state transition table (JTTBL-9) is referred to, and the corresponding data is stored in predetermined areas of the RAM 203 (variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and special symbol variation number counter). When the game state transition table “JTTBL-9” is acquired, the game state transition (change of the variation pattern allocation designation number (Tcode)) as the variation pattern selection mode is only performed. When the game state transition table “JTTBL-9” is not acquired, it indicates that the transition is not performed.

  Here, after the small hit game (in the non-V winning), the internal gaming state does not shift to the short-time state, but when the special electricity number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes zero, the number of special symbol short-time state ends. If it has been reached, the transition to the normal gaming state is performed by performing the setting process at the end of the short time. Note that the setting process at the time of short end is the same as step S481 in FIG. When the setting process at the time reduction end is completed, a “time reduction end command” indicating that the special symbol time reduction state has ended (electric supportless state transition information) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. A series of processes related to these special electricity counters (subtraction process, setting process at the end of short time, command transmission process) are not limited to this small hit end process, but can be executed at the start of a small hit game, It may be executed when the small hit symbol is stopped, and an effect accompanying the end of the short time state can be executed based on the short time end command during the small hit game.

(T-4-3. Non-V winning game state transition table selection table when winning a prize: FIGS. 44 (a) and (b))
44 (a) and 44 (b) show the game state transition table selection table for small hits acquired when the V prize is not won. FIG. 44 (a) is a game state transition table selection table for small hits acquired when the gaming state determination number (YJ) indicates the normal gaming state and is not won V, and FIG. ) Is a number indicating a short-time state in the game state determination number (YJ), and is a game state transition table selection table for small hits that is acquired when a V prize is not won.

In FIG. 44 (a), in the case of a non-V winning and in the normal gaming state (YJ: 00H), the gaming state transition table (JTTBL) is based on the small hit type (winning type) (small hits 1 to 14). Whether or not -9) is set is as follows.
(1) Small per unit 1-4: JTTBL-9
(2) Small hit 5 to 14: table is not set In this way, the relationship between the small hit type and the game state transition table in the normal gaming state when a non-V prize is won is a small portion of the special symbol 1 JTTBL-9 is set for the winning, and the gaming state transition table is not set for the small winning of the special symbol 2.

In FIG. 44 (b), the game state transition table is not set regardless of the small hit type (winning type) in the case of the non-V winning time and the short time state (YJ: 02H).
(T-11. Non-V winning game state transition table for small hits: FIG. 45)
With reference to FIG. 45, the non-V winning small win game state transition table “JTTBL-9” will be described. In the game state transition table for small hits, data to be stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter is defined as data for designating the game state to be transferred after the small hit game. It has been. When these data values are stored in the variation pattern distribution designation number storage area and the special symbol variation number counter, the gaming state after the small hit game is identified. Here, only the data to be stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer and the special symbol variation number counter buffer is defined in the above “JTTBL-9”, so that even if the small hit is won, the internal game state There is no transition, and only the transition of the gaming state as the variation pattern selection mode (change of the variation pattern assignment designation number (Tcode)) is performed. Specifically, 09H is stored in the variation pattern allocation designation number buffer, and 10 times is stored in the special symbol variation number counter buffer.

<Processing on production control unit side: FIGS. 30 to 36>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 36, an effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described. The processing on the side of the effect control unit 24 mainly includes a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 30) and a timer interrupt process (effect control side timer interrupt process: FIG. 32) activated by a scheduled interrupt. It is comprised including.

<16. Production control side main processing: FIG. 30>
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing on the production control unit side (production control side main processing). The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG. 30 when the gaming machine body is powered on from the outside.

  In the main process on the effect control side, the CPU 241 first performs a necessary initial setting process before starting the game operation (step S071). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, moving object starting point return processing, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of CPU internal register values including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

  When the initial setting process in step S071 is completed, the main loop process in steps S073 to S078 is performed at predetermined time intervals as the process during normal operation, and otherwise the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is repeated.

  In the process of step S072, the CPU 241 refers to the counter value for main loop update period and determines whether or not the main loop update period that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S072). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that is updated in a main loop update process (step S096 in FIG. 32) during an effect control side timer interrupt process described later. In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every 16 ms. Until this main loop update period arrives (step S072: NO), various effect lottery random numbers are updated (step S079: various effect soft random number update processing).

  When the main loop update period has arrived (step S072: YES), the CPU 241 performs a received command analysis process (step S073). In this received command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer. If an effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect control process corresponding to the read effect control command is read. I do. Among these effect control commands, the hold addition command, hold subtraction command, variation pattern designation command, decoration symbol designation command, variation stop command, various commands transmitted during a hit game, etc. (for example, jackpot) A start command, a normal prize winning prize winning command (large prize winning prize winning commands 1 and 2), and the like.

  For example, when at least a variation pattern designation command is received and stored in the reception buffer (in this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command are received and stored in the reception buffer. In the case of command analysis processing, one or more types of effect patterns are determined based on information (variation pattern information and winning information (or winning type information)) included in the command. The effect pattern determined here works as a “part effect” as an element constituting the effect scenario. Next, determine the time schedule for how and at what timing the production pattern (parts production) determined above will appear, and compose the production scenario. The production scenario data is stored in the scenario setting area of the RAM 243. Various production patterns (part production) incorporated in this production scenario are developed one after another or simultaneously, thereby realizing an “production scenario” in a broad sense. Note that the above-described production scenario is rewritten to a different production scenario as necessary (for example, a part production for operation may be incorporated based on operation detection of the frame production button 13). In this case, the changed effect scenario data is reset in the scenario setting area, and an effect appears based on the changed effect scenario data.

  When the received command analysis process in step S073 is completed, a scenario update process is performed (step S074). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer necessary for execution of the production pattern are updated. A typical example of the timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, the time within the variation period (decoration symbol variation period) in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed is within the same period as the variation period (special symbol variation period) in which the special symbol is variably displayed. On this axis, a time schedule for what kind of production pattern is made to appear in the production means with what time width is managed by this timer. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in an effect process related to an LED data update process (step S075) and an effect agent control data update process (step S077) which will be described later. Here, this production scenario timer is monitored, and when the production time of one production comes, the sound data for the speaker 46 and the liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in the designated area of the RAM 243, respectively. . The LED data for the light display device is created by an LED data update process (step S075) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created by an after-mentioned effect actor control data update process (step 077). The

  Next, LED data update processing is performed (step S075). In this LED data update process, LED data for a light display device such as a decorative lamp unit 45 or an LED is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. The data created here is used in an effect LED management process (step S095 in FIG. 32) during a timer interrupt process to be described later.

  Next, sound output processing is performed (step S076). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process in step S074 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a sound effect is output from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit (sound source LSI). Thereby, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

  Next, a production accessory control data update process is performed (step S077). In the effect accessory control data update process, drive control data for the movable accessory motor 97a or the movable accessory motor 98a is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer. The data created here is used in a director action operation management process (step S094 in FIG. 32) during a timer interrupt process described later.

  Next, noise countermeasure management processing for monitoring malfunction of the sound source LSI or the like is performed (step S078). If the program goes into a runaway state due to a malfunction, the watchdog timer expires and the CPU is automatically reset to recover from the runaway state. Thereby, the main loop process is terminated, and the effect soft random number update process in step S079 is performed until the next main loop update period comes.

(17. Command reception interrupt processing: FIG. 31)
Next, a command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing on the effect control side. This command reception interruption process is executed preferentially over an effect control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) described later when an effect control command is received from the main control unit 20.

  First, when an interruption based on a strobe signal from the main control unit 20 occurs during execution of the main process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S081). The received effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243 (step S082), and the saved register contents are restored (step S083). Thereby, the command reception interrupt process is ended, the process returns to the effect control unit side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until an interrupt based on the next strobe signal is generated. As described above, when various effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 are received, this command reception interrupt process is executed, and when the effect control command is received, the command is stored in the command reception buffer. Is done.

(18. Production control side timer interruption process: FIG. 32)
Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the timer interrupt process on the production control side will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the effect control-side timer interrupt process. This production control side timer interruption process is started by interruption every predetermined time (about 1 ms), and is executed by interruption during execution of the production control side main process.

  In FIG. 32, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S091), and then performs an effect button input management process (step S092). In this effect button input management process, whether or not an operation (ON operation) detection signal is input from the frame effect button 13 is monitored, and when it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. To store. This information is used for the button notice effect.

  Next, a liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S093). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, when there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S074) in the effect control side main process of FIG. 30, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU). Thus, image display control for the liquid crystal display device 36 is executed. Thereby, the image production along the production scenario is realized.

  Next, directing action operation management is performed (step S094). In this production actor operation management, based on the motor control data for the movable object created in the production actor control data update process (step S077), the movable article motor 97a or the movable article through the drive control unit. A control signal is output to the motor 98a. Thereby, the visual production | presentation by the movable body accessory (The clock hand 97 of a clock type accessory, the flower type accessory 98) along a production scenario is implement | achieved.

  Next, effect LED management is performed (step S095). In this effect LED management, based on the LED data created in the LED data update process (step S075), the decorative lamp unit 45 and the LED are turned on and blinked through the light display control unit. Thereby, the light effect according to the effect scenario is realized.

  Next, a main loop update process for managing the main loop update period is performed (step S096). In this main loop update process, the main loop update cycle counter is updated for each interrupt (main loop update cycle counter + 1). The main loop update cycle counter is a counter that circulates in a range of multiples of 16 (for example, 0 to 31) by increment processing, for example.

  After the processing of steps S091 to S096 is completed, the saved register contents are restored (step S097). As a result, the timer interruption process is terminated, the process returns to the effect control side main process before the interruption, and the effect control side main process is performed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Contents of received command analysis processing: FIGS. 33 to 36>
FIG. 33 to FIG. 36 show processing closely related to the present invention among the processing executed in the received command analysis processing (step S073 in FIG. 23). Hereinafter, the case where a command transmitted from the main control unit 20 is received in the second round of the game per V, the second round of the game per V, or the first and second rounds of the big hit game will be described.

(Achieving effect processing: FIG. 33)
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing processing when a command related to winning game is received. Here, processing is performed using the following commands among the commands related to winning games. The “big hit start command” sent at the start of the big hit game (step S514 in FIG. 20), the “small hit start command” sent at the start of the big hit (step S604 in FIG. 28), the final of the right big prize winning port 50 during the big hit game “Round end command” sent when the opening is finished (step S554 in FIG. 22), or “Right big” sent when the final opening of the right big winning opening 50 during the small hit game is finished (step S604 in FIG. 28). “Winning mouth closing command”, “Big winning mouth winning command 2”, “V chance command”, “V winning” sent when the sensors SW1 to SW4 are turned ON (steps S622, S628, S630, S634 in FIG. 24), respectively. “Command”, “discharge command”, 2R “big prize opening release command” sent at the start of 2R (step S522 in FIG. 21) It is used as in the.

  In FIG. 33, when the production control unit 24 (CPU 241) receives a hit start command (a big hit start command or a small hit start command) (step S910: YES), it executes a preparation process (step S912). On the other hand, when the hit start command is not received (step S910: NO), that is, when other commands related to the win game are received, the hit effect switching process (step S914) is then executed.

  In the preparation process of step S912, first, the content of the hit start command is analyzed, the current hit type as the content is acquired, and then the hit effect table selection table in which data relating to all hit effects is recorded ( Referring to (not shown), the data of the hitting effect scenario corresponding to the hit type is stored in the RAM 243. Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69A, the hitting effect scenario includes patterns 1 to 4, and each pattern 1 to 4 includes a plurality of effect types (effect types A to Z). The production types included in each pattern are connected in cascade. Therefore, regarding the structure of the RAM 243 for storing data, the RAM 243 is divided into four RAMs 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of patterns in order to store each pattern, and each of the RAMs 1 to 1 is stored in order to individually store the effect types connected in cascade. 4 is divided into a plurality of first to fifth areas (effect type selection tables A to D in FIG. 34). Therefore, each effect type included in the hit effect scenario is individually stored in the RAM 243. Specific storage in the RAM 243 will be described with respect to the following three examples using the effect type selection tables A to C shown in FIG. The effect order flag shown in the figure indicates a cascade of effect types, and the effect type stored in the area corresponding to the number of the effect order flag is set as an effect to be executed. Details will be described later.

(Production type selection table A: FIG. 34 (A))
The effect type selection table A in FIG. 34 (A) shows data of the hit effect scenario (FIG. 67) stored in the RAM 243 when the hit type is 5,6. The RAM 1 stores the pattern 1 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fifth area of the RAM 1 store the effects A, effects B, effects C, effects D, and effects H1, respectively. The RAM 2 stores the pattern 2 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fifth area of the RAM 2 store the effects A, effects B, effects C, effects G, and effects H2, respectively. The RAM 3 stores the pattern 3 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fourth area of the RAM 3 store the effects A, effects B, effects F, and effects H3, respectively. The RAM 4 stores the pattern 4 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the third area of the RAM 4 store the effect A, the effect E, and the effect H3, respectively.

(Production type selection table B: FIG. 34 (B))
The effect type selection table B of FIG. 34 (B) shows the data of the hit effect scenario (FIG. 68) stored in the RAM 243 when the hit types are 1 to 4 and 7 to 10 for the big hits. The RAM 1 stores the pattern 1 of the hitting effect scenario, and the first area to the fifth area of the RAM 1 store the effects A, effects B, effects C, none, effects H4. Although the effect type is not stored in the fourth area, only a new effect is not set when the effect is executed, and the effect of the last effect type is actually executed continuously (the same applies to the RAMs 2 to 4 below). The RAM 2 stores the pattern 2 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fifth area of the RAM 2 store the effects A, effects B, effects C, none, effects H5. The RAM 3 stores the pattern 3 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fourth area of the RAM 3 store the effects A, effects B, none, and effects H6, respectively. The RAM 4 stores the pattern 4 of the hitting effect scenario, and the first area to the third area of the RAM 4 store the effects A, none, and the effects H6.

(Production type selection table C: FIG. 34C)
The effect type selection table C of FIG. 34 (C) shows a hit effect scenario (FIG. 69A) stored in the RAM 243 when the hit type is 1 to 6 (small case type in the normal gaming state). Data is shown. The RAM 1 stores the pattern 1 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fifth area of the RAM 1 store the effects A, effects B, effects C, effects D, and effects H1, respectively. The RAM 2 stores the pattern 2 of the hit effect scenario, and the first area to the fourth area of the RAM 2 store the effects A, effects B, effects C, and effects Z, respectively. The RAM 3 stores the pattern 3 of the hitting effect scenario. The first area to the third area of the RAM 3 store the effects A, effects B, and effects Y, respectively. The RAM 4 stores the pattern 4 of the hit effect scenario, and the effect A and the effect X are stored in the first area and the second area of the RAM 4, respectively.

(Production type selection table D: FIG. 34 (D))
The effect type selection table D of FIG. 34 (D) is data of the hit effect scenario (FIG. 69B) stored in the RAM 243 when the hit type is 7 to 14 (in the case of the small hit type in the short time state). Is shown. Only the RAM 4 is different from the case of the effect type table C, and the pattern 4 of the hit effect scenario is stored in the RAM 4, and the first area and the second area of the RAM 4 are the effects A and A, respectively. None is stored.

  As described above, when the data of the hit effect scenario corresponding to the hit type is stored in the RAM 243, the pattern flags 1 to 4 are set to the ON state (= 5 AH), and the effect order flag is set to zero (= 00H). . The pattern flags 1 to 4 are flags used to determine which pattern of the hit effect scenario is selected for each data stored in the RAM 243. In addition, the effect order flag is a flag used for determining, for the data stored in the RAM 243, data for which order type of the pattern of the hit effect scenario is selected.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 71, the production A (however, the production A during the time-saving state is excluded) is the production of three types of productions A1 to A3 having different production contents (own ship type). Any one of them is selected by lottery (search effect production of production type A in FIG. 70). Similarly, any of the other effects B, C, E, and F is selected from among a plurality of types of effects (the effect types B, C, and E in FIG. 70, the enemy ship discovery effect in F, and the enemy ship discovery effect in F). ). These lots of effects A to C, E, and F are executed before the process of storing in the RAM 243. The effect determined by lottery is stored in the RAM 243. For example, in the case of a big hit 5, assuming that an effect A1, an effect B2, an effect C3, an effect E1, and an effect F2 are selected by the effect lottery, the data of the hit effect scenario stored in the RAM 243 is as follows. The first area to the fifth area of the RAM 1 store the effects A1, the effects B2, the effects C3, the effects D, and the effects H1. Production A1, production B2, production C3, production G and production H2 are stored in the first area to the fifth area of the RAM 2, respectively. Production A1, production B2, production F2 and production H3 are stored in the first area to the fourth area of the RAM 3, respectively. Production A1, production E1, and production H3 are stored in the first to third areas of the RAM 4, respectively. In addition, there are two types of productions for productions H1 to H3 with different production contents (enemy ship sinking production or enemy ship survival production), but productions H1 to H3 with production contents corresponding to the jackpot type are selected. The production types H1 to H3 in FIG. 70 are stored in the RAM 243. In addition, the productions E, F, and G include two types of productions with different production contents corresponding to the jackpot type (a scenario with a long production time or a short scenario). It is selected (production types E to G in FIG. 70) and stored in 243.

  Next, by performing the hit effect switching process (step S914), the effect type corresponding to the command related to the acquired hit game is selected from the RAM 243, and finally the effect scenario data setting process (step S916) is performed. By executing, by setting the selected effect type, an effect included in the effect type appears. The winning effect switching process and the effect scenario data setting process will be specifically described.

(Winning effect switching processing: FIG. 35)
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the hit effect switching process in FIG. In this hit / between effect switching process, a process of setting the pattern flags 1 to 4 and the effect order flag corresponding to the acquired command related to the hit game is performed.

  In FIG. 35, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not a hit start command (big hit start command or small hit start command) has been acquired (step S930). If it is acquired (step S930: YES), then step S950 is executed, and the effect order flag is incremented by one. Since the production order flag was zero (00H) before this processing, the production order flag is set to 01H by the execution of step S950 this time.

  On the other hand, when the hit start command is not acquired (step S930: NO), it is then determined whether the SW1 command is acquired and the effect order flag is 01H (step S932). If this condition is satisfied (step S932: YES), then step S933 is executed, and the pattern flag 4 is set to the OFF state (= 00H). Therefore, the pattern flags 1 to 3 other than the pattern flag 4 remain in the ON state. Next, step S950 is executed and 1 is added to the effect order flag. Therefore, with respect to the pattern flags 1 to 3, the performance order flag becomes 02H by the execution of the current step S950.

  On the other hand, when the condition of step S932 is not satisfied (step S932: NO), it is then determined whether a command related to closing is acquired and the pattern flag 4 is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S934). Here, the command related to closing indicates a “round end command” acquired during the big hit game or a “right big prize opening closing command” acquired during the small hit game. If this condition is satisfied (step S934: YES), then step S935 is executed, and the pattern flags 1 to 3 are set to the OFF state (= 00H). Therefore, only the pattern flag 4 remains in the ON state. Next, step S950 is executed and 1 is added to the effect order flag. Therefore, with respect to the pattern flag 4, the performance order flag becomes 02H by the execution of the current step S950.

  On the other hand, when the condition of step S934 is not satisfied (step S934: NO), it is then determined whether or not the SW2 command is acquired (step S936). If this condition is satisfied (step S936: YES), then step S937 is executed, and the pattern flag 3 is set to the OFF state (= 00H). Therefore, the pattern flags 1 and 2 remain in the ON state. Next, step S950 is executed and 1 is added to the effect order flag. Therefore, with respect to the pattern flags 1 and 2, the performance order flag becomes 03H by the execution of the current step S950.

  On the other hand, when the condition of step S936 is not satisfied (step S936: NO), it is then determined whether or not the SW3 command is acquired (step S938). If this condition is satisfied (step S938: YES), then step S939 is executed, and the pattern flag 2 is set to the OFF state (= 00H). Therefore, the pattern flag 1 remains in the ON state. Next, step S950 is executed and 1 is added to the effect order flag. Therefore, with respect to the pattern flag 1, the performance order flag becomes 04H by the execution of the current step S950.

  On the other hand, when the condition of step S938 is not satisfied (step S938: NO), it is next determined whether or not the SW4 command is acquired and the pattern flag 3 is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S940). If this condition is satisfied (step S940: YES), then step S941 is executed, and the pattern flags 1 and 2 are set to the OFF state (= 00H). Therefore, only the pattern flag 3 remains in the ON state. Next, step S950 is executed and 1 is added to the effect order flag. Therefore, with respect to the pattern flag 3, the performance order flag is set to 03H by the current execution of step S950.

  On the other hand, when the condition of step S940 is not satisfied (step S940: NO), it is then determined whether the SW4 command is acquired and the pattern flag 2 is in the ON state (= 5 AH) (step S942). If this condition is satisfied (step S942: YES), then step S943 is executed, and the pattern flag 1 is set to the OFF state (= 00H). Therefore, only the pattern flag 2 remains in the ON state. Next, step S950 is executed and 1 is added to the effect order flag. Therefore, with respect to the pattern flag 2, the rendering order flag is set to 04H by the current execution of step S950.

  On the other hand, when the condition of step S942 is not satisfied (step S942: NO), it is then determined whether or not the 2R big prize opening release command is acquired (step S944). If this condition is satisfied (step S944: YES), then step S950 is executed, and the effect order flag is incremented by one. Therefore, with respect to all the pattern flags, the execution order flag is incremented by 1 by executing the current step S950, the pattern flag 1 becomes 05H, the pattern flag 2 becomes 05H, the pattern flag 3 becomes 04H, and the pattern flag 4 is 03H.

  Note that if the V winning is not won in the small hit game, the 2R big winning opening release command is not transmitted (step S944: NO), so that the hit effect switching process is terminated without doing anything.

(Direction scenario data setting processing: FIG. 36)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing effect scenario data setting processing in FIG. In this effect scenario data setting process, it is stored in the RAM 243 in the hit effect process (FIG. 33) based on the values of the pattern flags 1 to 4 set in the hit effect switching process (FIG. 35) and the value of the effect order flag. A process for selecting the selected effect type and setting the selected type is performed.

  In FIG. 36, the effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) determines whether or not the pattern flag 1 is in the ON state (= 5AH) (step S970). If the pattern flag 1 is in the ON state (step S970: YES), then step S971 is executed, and the effect type of the number corresponding to the effect order flag is selected from the effect types stored in the RAM 1 and set. . Since any of the effect order flags 01H to 05H is set, the effect type stored in the region (the first region to the fifth region) with the number corresponding to the value is selected and set.

  On the other hand, when the pattern flag 1 is in the OFF state (step S970: NO), it is then determined whether or not the pattern flag 2 is in the ON state (step S972). If the pattern flag 2 is in the ON state (step S972: YES), then step S973 is executed, and the effect type with the number corresponding to the effect order flag is selected and set from the effect types stored in the RAM 2. . Since any of the effect order flags 01H to 05H is set, the effect type stored in the region (the first region to the fifth region) with the number corresponding to the value is selected and set.

  On the other hand, when the pattern flag 2 is in the OFF state (step S972: NO), it is next determined whether or not the pattern flag 3 is in the ON state (step S974). If the pattern flag 3 is in the ON state (step S974: YES), then step S975 is executed, and the effect type with the number corresponding to the effect order flag is selected and set from the effect types stored in the RAM 3. . Since any of the effect order flags 01H to 04H is set, the effect type stored in the numbered area (first area to fourth area) corresponding to the value is selected and set.

  On the other hand, when the pattern flag 4 is in the OFF state (step S974: NO), next, step S977 is executed, and the effect type with the number corresponding to the effect order flag is selected from the effect types stored in the RAM 4. Set. Since any one of the effect order flags 01H to 03H is set, the effect type stored in the numbered area (first area to third area) corresponding to the value is selected and set.

  In this way, the hit effect scenario data corresponding to the hit type is stored in the RAM 243 in the hit effect process (FIG. 33), and the pattern for selecting the effect type appearing in the hit effect switching process (FIG. 35) is stored. By setting the flag and the production order flag and selecting the production type corresponding to the flag from the RAM 243 stored in the production scenario data setting process (FIG. 36), what kind of production is produced during the current winning game. It will be decided whether to make it appear. As a result, the effect control unit 24 develops the hit effect based on the hit effect table and causes “effect A” to appear at the start of the hit game. Thereafter, the detection of SW1 to SW4, the right big prize opening 50 A production type corresponding to the closing, the start of the 2R, etc. is displayed. In the above description, only the hit type when winning in the normal gaming state has been described, but even when winning in the short-time state, the same processing as the hit effect processing, hit effect switching processing, and effect scenario data setting processing is performed. It is way.

<20. Vibration goto measures>
(Change sensitivity of vibration sensor)
In general, a pachinko gaming machine has a game characteristic such that a winning ball is paid out when a gaming ball flowing down in the gaming area enters a winning opening, or a big hit by entering a specific area. For this reason, an improper act of giving a prize or making a big hit is likely to be performed artificially by giving vibrations such as hitting (so-called dozing) and shaking to the gaming machine table to influence the movement of the game ball. The same applies to not only pachinko machines but also arranged ball machines and sparrow balls. Therefore, conventionally, a vibration sensor having a constant sensitivity is attached to the gaming machine stand in order to prevent such an illegal act (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-0775630).

  However, the strength of the vibration applied to the pachinko machine differs depending on the hall to be installed. In halls where a lot of people who handle game machines stand wildly, a relatively strong vibration is given as an act without illegal intentions, and in a hall where many gentle people who carefully handle game machines gather, acts without illegal intentions As a relatively weak vibration. For this reason, a situation in which appropriate anti-fraud vibration detection cannot be performed simply occurs when the sensitivity of the vibration sensor in the gaming machine is fixed to a fixed detection level value before shipment. In addition, even if it is the same hall, the customer base will change if the date passes, so it will not be possible to cope with such changes in the situation. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the sensitivity of the vibration sensor can be changed to an appropriate value on the hall side in accordance with the difference in the customer layer for each hole or the change of the customer layer in the same hall.

(Use one vibration sensor properly)
When the sensitivity of the vibration sensor can be changed to an appropriate value on the hall side, the appropriate value should be set so that vibrations with a short cycle such as hitting (so-called “sticking”) can be detected, that is, the detection level is It is necessary to set a high sensitivity value (for example, 4 ms). However, if the detection level is set to a high sensitivity value (for example, 4 ms) in this way, it becomes too sensitive to detect other relatively long period fluctuations (for example, 1000 ms) such as “swaying”. It will be inappropriate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the most important monitoring section including the guidance section where the game ball enters the specific area or including the front and back thereof is set as the first period in which the sticking is likely to occur, and the other monitoring sections are shaken. The second period is distinguished, and the first period functions as a highly sensitive vibration sensor that can cope with the shaking, and the second period functions as a low sensitivity vibration sensor that can cope with shaking.

(Reason for using two sensors)
As described above, even when one vibration sensor is used, by changing the sensitivity level to an appropriate value, it is possible to detect two types of vibrations of hitting and shaking. However, there is a big difference in the nature of the misconduct to be reported between “striking” and “shaking”. That is, “hitting” is considered to occur in the most important monitoring section where a game ball may enter a specific area, and the game should be stopped immediately. On the other hand, the “swaying” is considered to be performed when the game ball is still a little far from the specific area, and is not considered to stop the game.

  Therefore, even if it is possible to clearly distinguish between hitting and shaking with the same single vibration sensor, it attaches the vibration sensor to the same place where both hitting and shaking can be detected, and the output waveform obtained from the vibration sensor is It is the result of the evaluation, and is not an evaluation of the output waveform obtained from the vibration sensor attached to the most important monitoring section where the game ball may enter the appropriate place, for example, the specific area. Therefore, it cannot be said that the evaluation result has a sufficient basis for stopping the game.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the guidance section (play area 59) that affects the game ball entering the specific area (V area) 63 is treated as the most important monitoring section, and the play area 59 is dedicated to the section. A 1st vibration sensor is attached as a thing. In addition, the second vibration sensor is attached as a general-purpose sensor in which other sections are also placed in the monitoring range and fluctuations there are also monitored. And a detection output is separately obtained from both vibration sensors. With this configuration, if a hit signal is detected on the basis of the detection output from the first vibration sensor, it is clear that the hit has been performed in the most important monitoring section. A rational basis for determining that the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the ball 63 is obtained. Therefore, it is possible to show a strong intention to prevent fraud by adopting a hard means of stopping the progress of the game (game stop processing).

<21. Vibration gossip measures with double vibration sensor>
In the present embodiment, a first vibration sensor 101 and a second vibration sensor 102 that detect vibration generated in the gaming machine main body (game board 3) are arranged on the back side of the game board 3. The first vibration sensor 101 and the second vibration sensor 102 are formed in the vicinity of the second special fluctuation winning device 52, and when a physical impact is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the outside, the pachinko machine is caused by the impact. It detects the vibration generated in the gaming machine 1 and functions as a vibration detection means. The first vibration sensor 101 and the second vibration sensor 102 are each composed of a piezoelectric acceleration sensor, but other contact type vibration sensors such as an electrodynamic acceleration sensor, a strain gauge type acceleration sensor, and an electrodynamic speed sensor are used. You can also

(21-1. Countermeasures against vibration due to the first vibration sensor)
The first vibration sensor 101 is connected to the main control unit 20 and is used to detect that the hit (drag) has been performed in the most important monitoring section (floating area 59). Specifically, the first vibration sensor 101 moves the game ball for the purpose of, for example, guiding the game ball that has entered the second special variation prize-winning device 52 to the specific region (V region) 63. For detecting abnormal vibrations (illegal vibrations) that occur when an impact is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 by observing the movement of the latch members 65 to 57 and the movement of the reciprocating rotary member 61. Is. In the case of the present embodiment, the most effective place is disposed near or below the SP arm accessory 58. The detected vibration is converted into an electric signal having a length proportional to the magnitude and transmitted to the main control unit 20.

  The first vibration sensor 101 has the following input / output characteristics of a single impact input time (ms) and an output holding time (ms). That is, the output signal duration is 200 ms or more when the instantaneous impact input time is 3 ms or more, and the output signal duration is less than 200 ms when the instantaneous impact input time is 3 ms or less. Therefore, this is used as a boundary for determining whether or not 200 ms is abnormal. Therefore, as an abnormality detection judgment, if the output signal has a short duration such as 46 ms or 196 ms, it is not treated as vibration abnormality detection (error detection). If the output signal has a duration of 200 ms or more, vibration abnormality detection (error Detection).

  Since the first vibration sensor 101 is connected to the main control unit 20 and the main control unit 20 performs interrupt control every 4 ms, the first vibration sensor 101 can acquire a change in vibration at a cycle of 4 ms. The vibration detection by the first vibration sensor 101 is performed from the time when the right big winning opening 50 is opened to the time when the winning game ball is discharged, as shown as section B in FIG. If there is no winning, it will be performed until the time when the remaining ball discharge time elapses or in any period. When vibration of 200 ms or more is detected by the first vibration sensor 101, the main control unit 20 determines that tapping has been performed, and performs security notification and game stop. In addition, information is sent to the production control unit 24 to generate an error sound and notify the LED.

  FIG. 74 shows a main control side improper vibration monitoring process using the first vibration sensor 101. The main control unit 20 acquires the previous data A of the IO port to which the first vibration sensor 101 is connected (step S621). This is done by loading the detection data A that has already been acquired at the previous interruption. Then, the data B at the time of the current interruption of the IO port is acquired (step S622). The obtained data A and B every 4 ms are compared (step S623), and this process is exited without having to match. If they match, the detection signal is at the H level (or L level), and therefore it is determined whether or not the vibration can be handled as detected (step S624). If the L level continues (step S624: NO), it cannot be determined that the vibration is present, so the number of vibration detections is reset to zero (step S628) and the process is exited. If the detection signal continues at the H level (step S624: YES), the process proceeds to step S625, and the vibration detection frequency is incremented by 1 (step S625), and it is determined whether or not the vibration detection frequency exceeds the threshold value N (step S625). Step S626).

  If the number of vibration detections does not exceed the threshold value N, the process exits once and enters this process again. After steps S621 to S625, 1 is added to the number of vibration detections. It is determined whether or not (step S626). When the threshold value N (50 times) has been reached, it has reached 200 ms, at which it can be determined that the hit has been made, so the process proceeds to vibration detection error processing in step S627, and an error command is transmitted and game stop processing is performed. In the game stop process, the production control unit 24 that receives the security notification and the error command for stopping the game generates an error sound and notifies the error by the LED. This vibration detection error process continues until the power is turned off (power interruption).

  In a second type of ball game machine such as the ball game machine according to the present embodiment, when an impact for the purpose of fraud is applied to the pachinko game machine 1, vibrations generated by the shock are caused to occur in a specific region (V (Region) 63 has a direct influence on the probability of entering the game 63 (probability that a game ball will enter). Therefore, the first vibration sensor 101 is preferably formed at a position in the vicinity of the second special variation winning device 52 or the specific region (V region) 63 in order to accurately detect the impact for the purpose of fraud. . The position where the first vibration sensor 101 is formed is not particularly limited, and any position of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be used as long as the position can detect an impact or vibration for the purpose of fraud as described above. (For example, you may form in the surface side (a game part is also included) and back side of the upper saucer unit 8, the upper saucer 9, a lower saucer, and the game board 3). Further, the number of first vibration sensors 101 is not limited to one, and a plurality of first vibration sensors 101 may be formed.

(21-2. Anti-vibration countermeasures by the second vibration sensor)
The second vibration sensor 102 has two types of monitoring areas. That is, the game area 59 including the guidance section (the most important monitoring section) for guiding the game ball to enter the specific area (V area) 63 is set as the first monitoring target area, and the other areas are set as the second monitoring target. It is a vibration sensor as a region. The second vibration sensor 102 has a performance in which the output changes in the shortest 1 ms or less after detecting the vibration. Since the second vibration sensor 102 is connected to the effect control unit 24 and the effect control unit 24 performs interrupt control every 1 ms, the vibration change can be acquired from the second vibration sensor 102 at a cycle of 1 ms. The effect control unit 24 detects vibration when the gaming machine table is shaken based on the output signal from the second vibration sensor 102.

  At that time, the sensitivity of the second vibration sensor 102 is switched to an appropriate vibration detection level. That is, high sensitivity (4 ms to 72 ms) is set for vibration detection in the first monitoring target region, and low sensitivity (1000 ms) is set for the second monitoring target region.

  More specifically, in the vibration detection for the first monitoring target area by the second vibration sensor 102, the right big prize opening 50 is opened, as shown in FIG. The game is performed in any period from the time until the time when the winning game ball is discharged, or until the time when the remaining ball discharge time elapses when there is no winning. If a small vibration of about 4 ms to 72 ms is detected continuously or intermittently by the second vibration sensor 102, it is determined that a swing for guiding the game ball to the specific area is detected, and an error sound is generated. Notification by LED is performed. The generation of the error sound and the notification by the LED are normally canceled in 30 seconds. Here, unlike the case where tapping vibration is detected by the first vibration sensor, the security notification and the game stop are not performed. When trying to guide the game ball to the specific area 63 by swinging in small increments, the result may be less serious than when trying to guide the game ball to the specific area 63 by hitting, or due to fraud This is because it is not definitive.

  The low-sensitivity (1000 ms) vibration detection for the second monitoring target area by the second vibration sensor 102 is shown as “periods other than section B” in the above-mentioned accessory game, that is, sections A and C in FIG. Done in a period. Specifically, the section A (waiting for a customer, changing, starting interval, right grand prize until the right big prize opening 50 is opened and won, that is, during the game of an accessory, starts from the waiting state for the customer. Period until the opening of the mouth 50) and the end of the section A during the game (when the winning game ball is discharged or when the remaining ball discharge time has passed without winning) In the section C that is a later period (in the example shown in FIG. 79, during the 1R interval period, the 2R-16R round game period, the end interval period, and the customer waiting state). When a vibration of about 1000 ms is detected by the second vibration sensor 102, it is determined that a swing for guiding the game ball to a specific area has been detected, and an error sound is generated and an LED is notified. The generation of the error sound and the notification by the LED are normally canceled in 30 seconds. Also here, unlike the case where the first vibration sensor detects the hit vibration, the security notification and the game stop are not performed. This is because of the same reason as the case of vibration detection in the section B. In the case of the present embodiment, the range to be the first monitoring target area is a range over the guidance section in which the game ball enters the specific area, but a predetermined section including the front and back is set as the first monitoring target area. In this case, the section where other game balls flow down is the second monitoring target area.

(21-3. Vibration sensor sensitivity switching setting)
As described above, vibration detection with low sensitivity (1000 ms) is performed in section A in FIG. 79, vibration detection with high sensitivity (4 ms to 72 ms) is performed in section B, and vibration detection with low sensitivity (1000 ms) is performed in section C. Is done. Among these, in the vibration detection in the section B, the detection level of the sensitivity of the second vibration sensor can be changed in multiple stages by manual operation on the hall side.

  In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, “Hall setting function 1” to “Hall setting function 5” are provided as the hole setting functions that can be set on the hall side. The vibration sensor LV5 "to" vibration sensor LV1 "can be switched to five levels. The “vibration sensor LV5” has the highest sensitivity, and when the vibration sensor signal is continuously received for 4 ms, the error sound and the error LED are turned on. Similarly, the vibration sensors LV4, LV3, LV2, and LV1 turn on the error sound and the error LED when the vibration sensor signals are continuously received for 20 ms, 36 ms, 50 ms, and 72 ms, respectively. If the vibration sensor LV3 has a default value and the detection level is not changed, the vibration sensor LV3 is maintained.

  FIG. 81 is a list of methods for setting the vibration sensor sensitivity. For example, when setting the vibration sensor LV4 by using the hall setting function 2 as the hall setting, the list button indicates whether the left button is pressed in the state of the vibration sensor LV5 or the right button is pressed in the state of the vibration sensor LV3. Indicates that it can be set.

  When the vibration sensor sensitivity is switched using the hall setting function, as shown in FIG. 82, a setting method is suggested by an image and a message on the liquid crystal screen. This sensitivity level setting method will be specifically described as follows.

(Sensitivity level setting method)
(I) When the power is turned on, the decorative pattern “2, 3, 7” is displayed on the liquid crystal screen.
(Ii) Press the button provided on the production board on the back side once. Thereby, the vibration sensor sensitivity level setting screen shown in FIG. 82 is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In the figure, an array of five square frames is a set level meter, and represents the set detection level of the vibration sensor being set by the number of filled squares.
(Iii) As shown in FIG. 82, the vibration sensor sensitivity level setting screen includes a “left button” image b1, a “right button” image b2, and a “center button” image b3 as frame buttons to be operated. The role (not shown) played by the button of the image is displayed. For example, a message such as “Low sensitivity level” as the role of “Left button”, “High sensitivity level” as the role of “Right button”, “Close setting screen” as the role of “Center button”, etc. Is displayed.

  Therefore, the sensitivity level is changed with the left and right buttons of the frame cross button while the setting screen is displayed. With the left and right buttons, the setting can be changed in the lower sensitivity level by pressing the left button, and the setting can be changed in the higher sensitivity level by pressing the right button. After this change operation, when the frame center button is pressed, the setting screen is closed and the setting is made.

(Unauthorized vibration monitoring processing by the second vibration sensor: FIGS. 77 and 78)
FIG. 77 shows the sensor sensitivity change setting process performed in the unauthorized vibration monitoring process (step S097) of FIG. 32, and FIG. 78 shows the vibration error determination process. In FIG. 77, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not a sensor SW1 command has been received. The sensor SW1 command is a command transmitted from the main control unit when winning the right big prize opening 50. When this sensor SW1 command is received, it can be seen that the beginning of the accessory game (section B) in FIG. 79 has arrived. However, until the sensor SW1 command is received (step S721: NO), since it is in section A of FIG. 79, the process proceeds to step S724, and nothing is done, that is, sensitivity setting processing (step S723) or basic sensitivity. This flow is exited without executing the setting process (step S726).

  In FIG. 78, the effect control unit 24 determines whether or not a sensitivity setting process or a basic sensitivity setting process has been performed. Since neither has been executed yet, the process proceeds to step S822.

  The effect control unit 24 acquires the previous data A of the IO port to which the second vibration sensor 101 is connected (step S822). This is done by loading the detection data A that has already been acquired at the previous interruption. Then, the data B at the time of the current interruption of the IO port is acquired (step S823). The obtained data A and B for every 1 ms are compared (step S824), and this processing is exited without having to match. If they match, since the detection signal is at the H level (or L level), it is determined whether or not the vibration can be handled as detected (step S825). If the L level continues (step S825: NO), it cannot be determined that the vibration is present, so the number of vibration detections is reset to zero (step S829), and the process is exited. If the detection signal continues at the H level (step S825: YES), the process proceeds to step S826, and the vibration detection frequency is incremented by 1 (step S826), and it is determined whether or not the vibration detection frequency exceeds the threshold value K ( Step S827).

  If the number of vibration detections does not exceed the threshold value K, this process is exited once and this process is entered again. After steps S822 to S826, the number of vibration detections is incremented by 1, and then the vibration detection number exceeds the threshold value K. It is determined whether or not (step S827). When the threshold value K (1000 times) is reached, the length reaches 1000 ms at which it can be determined that shaking has occurred, so the process proceeds to vibration detection error processing in step S828, an error sound is generated, and an error is notified by the LED. This vibration detection error process continues for about 30 seconds.

  Returning to FIG. 77, when the beginning of the accessory game (section B) of FIG. 79 comes, the sensor SW1 command is received. The determination in step S721 is YES, the process proceeds to step S722, the section B flag is set to ON, and sensitivity setting processing is performed (step S723). In this sensitivity setting process, the sensitivity of the second vibration sensor 102 is changed from low sensitivity (1000 ms) to high sensitivity (a value set in the hall setting, for example, 20 ms of the vibration sensor LV4). Thereafter, the sensor sensitivity change setting process is exited through step S724.

  The determination in step S820 of FIG. 78 is YES because the sensitivity setting process is being executed (section B flag is ON). That is, after the section A in FIG. 79 is finished, the beginning of the section B has arrived. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S821, and a value corresponding to the set sensitivity set on the hall side (for example, 20 times corresponding to 20 ms of the vibration sensor LV4) is set in the threshold value K of the number of vibration detections.

  The effect control unit 24 performs the same processing (step) as that performed in the section A. In other words, the effect control unit 24 acquires the previous data A of the IO port to which the second vibration sensor 101 is connected (step S822). This is done by loading the detection data A that has already been acquired at the previous interruption. Then, the data B at the time of the current interruption of the IO port is acquired (step S823). The obtained data A and B for every 1 ms are compared (step S824), and this processing is exited without having to match. If they match, since the detection signal is at the H level (or L level), it is determined whether or not the vibration can be handled as detected (step S825). If the L level continues (step S825: NO), it cannot be determined that the vibration is present, so the number of vibration detections is reset to zero (step S829), and the process is exited. If the detection signal continues at the H level (step S825: YES), the process proceeds to step S826, 1 is added to the number of vibration detections (step S826), and the number of vibration detections is a threshold value K (for example, 20 ms of the vibration sensor LV4). It is determined whether or not it has been exceeded (step S827).

  If the number of vibration detections does not exceed the threshold value K, this process is exited once and this process is entered again. After steps S822 to S826, the number of vibration detections is incremented by 1, and then the vibration detection number exceeds the threshold value K. It is determined whether or not (step S827). When the threshold value K (for example, 20 times corresponding to 20 ms of the vibration sensor LV4) is reached, the length (20 ms of the vibration sensor LV4) that can be determined to have occurred has reached, so the process proceeds to the vibration detection error process in step S828. An error sound is generated and the error is notified by the LED. This vibration detection error process continues for about 30 seconds.

  While the above-described vibration monitoring is being performed, when the section B during the game of the accessory game in FIG. 79 ends, that is, when the discharge waiting time has elapsed, the determination in step S724 in FIG. 77 becomes YES, and the period B flag in step S725 Is turned OFF, and the basic sensitivity setting process is executed (step S726). In this basic sensitivity setting process, a process of returning the sensitivity of the second vibration sensor to a low sensitivity (1000 ms) is performed. As a result, the section B in FIG.

  In FIG. 78, the determination in step S820 is NO because the basic sensitivity setting process is being executed (section B flag is OFF). That is, after the section B in FIG. 79 is finished, the beginning of the section C has arrived. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S821, and a value corresponding to the basic setting sensitivity (1000 times corresponding to 1000 ms) is set to the threshold K of the number of times of vibration detection. Hereinafter, the vibration monitoring by the second vibration sensor is performed by the same vibration error determination process as in the period A.

  As described above, the vibration error determination process of FIG. 78 can be used in common for the periods A, B, and C, so that the error can be determined simply. In the embodiment described above, the section B during the game of an accessory is regarded as a period starting from the time of winning a prize. However, the section B can be regarded as a period starting from the time when the big hit starts and processed.

  As in the case of the ball game machine according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of movable accessories for guiding the game ball are formed in the specific area (V area) 63 or the non-specific area (losing area) 62, Usually, a plurality of reaching routes to the specific region (V region) 63 are formed. A game ball that has entered the inside of the second special variable prize winning device 52 is guided along the reaching route selected by the latch members 65 to 57, and the specific region (V region) 63 or non-specific. The ball enters the area (losing area) 62. In the case of this type of ball game machine, a player or Goto who is excited about the game (a person who performs an act of gaining profits for illegal purposes (Goto action)) is divided into multiple times and intermittently receives a small shock to a large shock. In addition to the gaming machine, a case is assumed in which the movement of the game ball is changed so that the route to the specific area (V area) is advantageous (so-called “dodging action”). Therefore, in this embodiment, although not shown in the flow, the vibration of a predetermined level or more is continuously detected by the second vibration sensor 102 for the first predetermined time (1000 ms), and then the predetermined vibration is detected by the second vibration sensor 102. When vibration exceeding the level is detected, it is a scene that doubts the connection between the two. Therefore, in order to allow the game ball to enter the specific region (V region) 63, the player intentionally swings with a strong and weak swing. It is possible to determine that the vibration is applied to the table.

  The detection of the unauthorized vibration is started when a game ball is detected by the right big prize opening detection switch SW1 (see FIG. 3), and the game ball is detected by the sensor SW3 of the specific region (V region) 53 or not. It is preferable to end the game after confirming that all the game balls have been discharged to the outside of the second special variation winning device 52 by the sensor SW4 in the specific area (losing area) 62. The reason for this is that Goto applies an impact to the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the game ball is normally entering the second special variable winning device 52. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the detection of an unintentional vibration of a goto action by detecting an illegal vibration while a game ball is entering the second special variable winning device 52. Can be suppressed. In addition, the detection start timing and end timing of unauthorized vibration are not limited to the above-described timing, but may be started when a game ball enters the first special symbol start port or the second special symbol start port described later. After a predetermined time elapses, the process may be terminated and can be changed to various modes according to the purpose.

A preferred embodiment for fraud prevention is summarized as follows.
(1) A variable winning device having a variable winning device having an opening / closing member that can be converted into an open state that allows a game ball to enter and a closed state that makes it difficult or impossible to enter the game ball, A gaming machine configured to generate a profitable state advantageous to a player on the condition that a game ball has entered a specific area formed inside, wherein the ball game machine is external Based on the vibration detected by the vibration detection means (second vibration sensor: sub-side fluctuation detection sensor) for detecting vibration applied from the vibration detection means, the vibration is illegal (constant level vibration). An unauthorized vibration determination means for determining whether or not (vibration error determination processing in FIG. 78), and when the unauthorized vibration determination means determines that the unauthorized vibration is, Injustice to inform the outside to that effect And the unauthorized vibration determination means detects vibrations of a predetermined level (low sensitivity) or more continuously for a first predetermined time (1000 ms) by the vibration detection means. A first fraud determination function that determines that the vibration is an improper vibration, and a vibration with a short time width that is greater than the predetermined level but is not determined to be improper by the first fraud determination function. A second fraud determination function that determines that the vibration is illegal when detected continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time (4, 20, 36, 50, 72 ms). A gaming machine in which the vibration detection sensitivity of the vibration detection means can be switched to a plurality of detection levels (4, 20, 36, 50, 72 ms) by manual operation with respect to the second fraud determination function.

  (2) In the second fraud determination function, a predetermined section including or before and after the guidance section in which the game ball enters the specific area is more than in a section in which other game balls flow down. The gaming machine according to (1) above, including a process of setting the vibration detection sensitivity of the vibration detection means to a high sensitivity (sensor sensitivity change setting process of FIG. 77).

  Further, the following configuration is preferable. Vibration detection means (first vibration sensor 101, second vibration sensor 102) capable of detecting vibrations satisfying a first condition (vibrations above a predetermined level) and vibrations satisfying a second condition (vibration below a predetermined level); When the vibration detecting means detects vibration, vibration notifying means capable of notifying that effect (game stop on the main control unit 20 side, lamp lighting, sound generation, error command transmission; lamp lighting on the sub control unit 24 side, Sound generation), wherein the first condition and the second condition are different from each other. As one aspect, the vibration detecting means is a single detecting means, a first abnormality determining means for determining a first abnormality when the first condition is satisfied, and a second when the second condition is satisfied. And a second abnormality determination unit that determines abnormality. As another form, as the vibration detection means, a first detection means (first vibration sensor 101) for detecting vibration satisfying the first condition, and a second detection means for detecting vibration satisfying the second condition. (Second vibration sensor 102), and the first detection means and the second detection means are arranged at different positions. The first condition is that a vibration of a predetermined level or more is detected by the vibration detection means, and the second condition is that the vibration detection means continuously or intermittently vibrates below the predetermined level for a predetermined time. It can be set as the form made into the structure detected. In addition, an operation unit is provided, and by operating the operation unit, at least one of the first condition (detection of vibrations above a predetermined level) and the second condition (detection of vibrations below a predetermined level) is changed. It is also possible to have a possible configuration, and by operating the operating means, at least one of the first condition (detection of vibration above a predetermined level) and the second condition (detection of vibration below a predetermined level). It can be set as the structure which can invalidate one condition.

  The present invention can be applied to a gaming machine using a game medium.

1 Pachinko machine,
2 Front frame,
3 Game board,
3a gaming area,
4 outer frame,
5 ball guide rail,
6 Glass door,
7 Front operation panel
8 Upper tray unit,
9 Top saucer,
11 Ball rental button,
12 Card return button,
13 Frame production button,
14 Ball release button,
15 Launch control handle,
19 game ball dispensing device,
20 Main control unit,
21 External terminal board for frame,
24 production control unit,
28 Launch control board,
29 payout control board,
32 launcher,
34 Upper starting port (first special symbol starting port),
34a Upper start sensor,
35 Lower starting port (second special symbol starting port),
35a Lower start sensor,
36 liquid crystal display devices,
37 Normal design starting port,
37a Normal symbol start sensor (third starter),
38a 1st special symbol display device,
38b Second special symbol display device,
40 Shimodai prize opening (first big prize opening),
50 Right Grand Prize (second Grand Prize),
41 Ordinary variable winning device,
41c Ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
42 The first special variable winning device,
52 second special variable winning device,
42a, 52a Big prize opening sensor,
42b, 52b open door,
42c, 52c
43 General prize opening,
43a General prize opening sensor,
44 Windmill,
45 Decorative lamp,
45a optical display device,
46 speakers,
46a sound generator,
47 Movable wing pieces,
48 Center decoration,
49 Out mouth,
56 Taxiway,
56a first taxiway,
56b second taxiway,
56c third taxiway,
56d Fourth taxiway,
56e fifth taxiway,
57 Medium distribution member,
58 SP arm role,
58a, b arm,
58c reservoir,
59 idle area,
60V lottery,
61 Reciprocating rotary object,
62 non-specific area,
63 Specific region (V region),
65 latch member,
72 Replenishment detection sensor,
73 ball counting sensor,
74 Dispensing motor,
101 first vibration sensor;
102 second vibration sensor,
201 main control CPU,
202 main control ROM,
203 main control RAM,
241 Production control CPU,
242 Production control ROM,
243 Production control RAM.

Claims (6)

Vibration detecting means capable of detecting vibration satisfying the first condition and vibration satisfying the second condition;
A vibration notifying means capable of notifying the fact when the vibration detecting means detects vibration, and a gaming machine comprising:
The first condition and the second condition are different from each other.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The vibration detection means is one detection means,
First abnormality determination means for determining a first abnormality when the first condition is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a second abnormality determination unit that determines a second abnormality when the second condition is satisfied. The vibration detecting means includes
First detecting means for detecting vibrations satisfying the first condition;
Second detection means for detecting vibration satisfying the second condition,
The first detection means and the second detection means are arranged at different positions,
The gaming machine according to claim 1. The first condition is that a vibration of a predetermined level or more is detected by the vibration detecting means,
The second condition is that vibration below the predetermined level is detected continuously or intermittently for a predetermined time by the vibration detecting means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: With operating means,
By operating the operating means, it is possible to change at least one of the first condition and the second condition.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: By operating the operating means, it is possible to invalidate at least one of the first condition and the second condition.
The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein:

Images